Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout355 Towne Center Cir (a) (Burlington)L 0 ct- w uj C) 0 LO co IA Q LLJ Lu 0ry0-0 D:� LL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . o CO w L 0 ct- w uj C) 0 LO co IA Q LLJ Lu 0ry0-0 D:� LL o CO w x 0 W p 9 . 2: Lij 0 C) U) 0 UJ Cf) W C) M CO LLJ CO W ui W 0 7) ::D I 'I 'I I I i a i i I �I j i il � Aj f n I 'I 'I I I i a i i I �I j i GYPSUM BO @1 V-6'A.F.1 2'X ZCEILIN @ 12'-6" A.F.f GYPSUM BOi @ 11'-0" A. F. I -- --------- - .1, .......... GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT @ 9'-6" A.F.F. 2'X 2' CEILING TILL @ 12'-6" A.F.F. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING @ 11'-0" A.F.F. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING @ 14'-0" A.F.F. GYPSUM BOARD BARREL VAULT 2'X 2' CEILING TILE @ 12--6" A.F.F. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING @ 11'-0" A.F,F, 2'X 2' CEILING TILE @ 12'-6" A.F.F. 3YPSUM BOARD SOFFIT 11'-0" A.F.F., TYP. ?'X 2' CEILING TILE @ 11'4' A.F.F. STEPPED GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT 9'-6" / 11'-0" A.F.F., TYP. u - d It 0 u - U) 0 Lu C) uj z R 0 (y) w 0� 0 0 It 1-0 co I— Q'i 0+<D Al SHEET NO. tls 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... MY ,V 4"u"? NX �R- u - d It 0 u - U) 0 Lu C) uj z R 0 (y) w 0� 0 0 It 1-0 co I— Q'i 0+<D Al SHEET NO. I i .a N i I -111 I TYP. SALES AREA i r. L NL� nM 1 Unw AREAS r w F.. SCALE1-011 as DEMOLITION PLAN NOTES ` CODECS NOTES: 100. REMOVE PLUMBING FIXTURE COMPLETE. REMOVE ASSOCIATED COUNTERS, BRACING, ETC. TEMPORARILY CAP PLUMBING BEHIND WALL FOR RE -USE AS REQUIRED. . 101. REMOVE COUNTER COMPLETE 102. REMOVE ALL WALL TILE AND GYP. BOARD BACK TO STUDS. REMOVE ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES AND ALL NON -PERMANENT PARTITIONS COMPLETE. 103. REMOVE DOOR AND FRAME COMPLETE. 104. REMOVE WALL COMPLETE. 105. REMOVE ROOM COMPLETE, INCLUDING WALLS, DOORS AND FRAMES, -- CEILINGS, LIGHT FIXTURES, AND ALL ASSOCIATED HVAC. 106. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES AS INDICATED ON THIS PLAN AND ANY ASSOCIATED TRANSITIONS; BASES, ANCHORING BOLTS, TRACK; FIXTURE BASE, CASHWRAPS; ANTI -THEFT DEVICES, ETC., U.N.O. EXISTING ON FLOOR FINISH PLAN. CAP ALL WIRING AS REQUIRED BELOW FLOOR OR ABOVE CEILING. REMOVE ALL UNUSED WIRING BACK TO JUNCTION BOX OR PANEL. co 107. REMOVE PORTION OF EXISTING WALL AND PREPARE FOR NEW DOOR. �- COORDINATE WITH SHEET A4.0. - u 108. REMOVE ALL RECESSED STANDARD STUDS THROUGHOUT ENTIRE TENANT Q a uj SPACE. ®� o X 41i GENERAL PLAN NOTES: x' 1. THE CONTRACTOR(S) SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, J DIMENSIONS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR THE CONTRACTED WORK d PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK, REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN FIELD CONDITIONS AND THE DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT IN a' WRITING, 2. VERIFY WITH BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY (BCF), PRIOR TO c DEMOLITION, ALL REMOVED ITEMS TO BE USED, STORED, OR THROWN AWAY. REMOVE DEBRIS, RUBBISH AND OTHER MATERIALS RESULTING c: FROM DEMOLITION OPERATIONS FROM BUILDING SITE. BURNING OF �? e= REMOVED MATERIALS ISNOT PERMITTED ON PROJECT SITE, 3. COORDINATE WITH BCF ANY & ALL NECESSARY SHUTOFF, CAPPING AND CONTINUATION OF UTILITY SERVICES PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT. DO NOT INTERRUPT EXISTING UTILITIES SERVING OCCUPIED OR USED FACILITIES. 4. DO NOT TERMINATE ANY UTILITY SERVICE TO EXISTING BUILDINGS TO REMAIN. COORDINATE ANY SHUT OFF OR TEMPORARY DISRUPTION WITH JOB SUPERINTENDENT 5. BCF ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTUAL CONDITION OF ITEMS OR STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED. 6. PROMPTLY REPAIR DAMAGES CAUSED BY DEMOLITION TO ANY ADJACENT FACILITIES AT NO COST TO OWNER. 7. DO NOT CLOSE, BLOCK, OR OTHERWISE OBSTRUCT STREETS, WALKS OR OTHER FACILITIES OCCUPIED OR USED BY THE GENERAL PUBLIC. 8. COMPLY WITH GOVERNING REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION. J, ALL WORK, MATERIALS, AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITIONS OF ALL ORDINANCES AND STATE AND LOCAL BUILDING CODES. 10. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO DISCONNECT POWER TO ALL ITEMS TO _11 BE REMOVED CONTAINING ELECTRICAL LINES. 11. ALL POWER POLES NOT TO BE RE -USED ARE TO BE REMOVED c COMPLETE. V- 12. PATCH & REPAIR ALL EXISTING WALL, SOFFIT AND CEILING ry CONSTRUCTION DAMAGED DUE TO DEMOLITION WORK TO FLUSH < SMOOTH CONDITION TO MATCH AND ALIGN W/ ADJACENT SURFACES AND PREPARE SURFACES AND RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. 13, SAW -CUT EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS AS REQUIRED FOR 0- INSTALLATION OF NEW UNDER FLOOR SLAB WORK. PATCH, REPAIR AND LEVEL CONCRETE SLAB AS REQUIRED TO MATCH AND ALIGN WITH U Lu ADJACENT SURFACES TO PREPARE SURFACES AND RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. (D 14. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT THROUGHOUT SPACE NOT TO BE RE -USED OR m U) AS DIRECTED BY BCF PROJECT MANAGER. � m 15. REMOVE ALL UNUSED WIRES, CHAINS, STRUTS AND ANCHORS FROM__j EXISTING METAL AND CONCRETE DECK AREAS IN SALES AREA. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS WITH PAINTED SHEET METAL COVER OR CONCRETE r PATCH. �. , Lu w Lu 0 LL1 I 0 C Lo C REVISIONS I _. ---- — — I I I III L,].IA_Ill I I I R 0 i TYP. ENTIRE TENANT SPACE DEMOLITIONPLANOTES`�-- CODED NOTES C "w 150. REMOVE CEILING COMPLETE AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WALLS INCLUDING ALL TILE, GYPSUM BOARD, GRIDS, LIGHTING, HVAC, WIRES, ETC. 150. REMOVE CEILING COMPLETE INCLUDING ALL TILE, GYPSUM BOARD, GRIDS, LIGHTING, HVAC, WIRES, ETC. 151. REMOVE SOFFIT COMPLETE. 152. REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES COMPLETE.. 153. REMOVE CEILING TILES COMPLETE. REFER TO A0.0 &d A1.2 GENERAL NOTE AREAS r �v:k'Ettti'�t. qh ��i n • yy f p Ye, i t i ] l } r �v:k'Ettti'�t. t� I� A� i t i ] l } i' l �I �: I I � I 0 FLOOR PLAN NOTESc CODED NOTES: 200. EXISTING VESTIBULE AND GLAZING TO REMAIN. CLEAN GLAZING PRIOR TO TURN OVER TO BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY. ENSURE ALL DOORS ARE IN ! _ PROPER WORKING ORDER. BRING TO "LIKE NEW" CONDITION. 1 201. HOLLOW METAL DOOR, SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR DETAILS. 202. OVERHEAD DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR DETAILS. 203. LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED ON ALL OFFICE WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING AND ALL SALES FLOOR WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK (OR CEILING). LEVEL 4 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH REQUIRED ALL OTHER AREAS THROUGHOUT TENANT SPACE, 204: NOT USED. 205. NOT USED. 206. COLUMNS IN SALES TO BE PAINTED P-1. COLUMNS IN OFFICE 1 STOCK / RECEIVING TO BE PAINTED P-2. ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS ARE TO HAVE CORNER GUARDS INSTALLED THROUGHOUT ENTIRE SPACE. BRING TO LEVEL 5 FINISH. GO 207. NOT USED. 208. COAT/ SHELF HANGER SYSTEM ABOVE. SEE DETAIL SHEET 10/A4.1. o Lo 209. BABY REGISTRY KIOSK'TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA (VIA UNDERGROUND 40! O CONDUIT). SEE A4.1 & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. uj 210. TWO (2) ACCESSIBLE CASH WRAPS AND ONE (1) ACCESSIBLE CUSTOMER o � SERVICE COUNTER REQUIRED. SEE A4.1 & E3.0 FOR CASH -WRAP & CUSTOMER !� SERVICE COUNTER DETAILS. VERIFY W/ LOCAL & STATE CODES REQUIRED co NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE CHECK OUT / CUSTOMER SERVICE STANDS. 211. COMPACTOR DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR DETAILS q) c� 212. WIDESPAN BABY FIXTURES TO RECEIVE POWER FOR SHELF LIGHTING. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. > t'- 213. LINEN FIXTURES TO RECEIVE POWER FOR VALANCE LIGHTING, REFER TO u < _-_ ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. -1(0 214. MARKING AREA COUNTER. 215. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. cz) 216, FLOOR FINISH LINE. SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN A1.4. 217. NOT USED. r x- 218. NOT USED. 219. NOT USED. 220. TRAM -PACK STATIONARY COMPACTOR BY PTD #TP-4000HD, PROVIDE GUIDE RAILS FOR RECEIVER BOX PER COMPACTOR MFR. RECOMMENDATIONS. _ 221 NOT USED. 222. POWER / DATA REQUIRED FOR SEASONAL CASHWRAPS / KIOSK @ COLUMN. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 223. FRP-1 BEHIND CUSTOMER SERVICE AND CHECKOUT AREA UP TO 48" A.F.F. 224, AIR FRESHENERS LOCATED ON WALL @ 8'-0" A.F.F. MANUFACfURER:AIR DELIGHTS MODEL #: MICROBURST 3000 FINISH: WHITE OPERATION: BATTERY PROVIDE (1) AEROSOL CAN FOR EACH AIR FRESHENER. SCENT TO BE SELECTED BY BCF PROJECT MANAGER 225. INSTALL NEW METAL STUDS TO MATCH EXISTING THICKNESS WHERE RECESSED STANDARDS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. INSTALL 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD OVER ALL NEW STUDS. LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED IN SALES / OFFICE AREA. LEVEL 4 FINISH REQUIRED IN STOCK AREAS clq� 226. INSTALL NEW GYPSUM BOARD OVER EXISTING STUDS FROM FINISH FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING. LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED IN SALES / OFFICE AREA. LL_ LEVEL4 FINISH REQUIRED IN STOCK AREAS ci B� FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING Cdr 2. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS THROUGHOUT 71 ENTIRE BCF SPACE. CG -1 TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM �0 CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK AREAS. 3. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL a UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) < III 4. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PARTITION TYPES.12 It 5. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK LLB < THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THEc o ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING a-- Lu WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M:E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. LIJ 6. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES IN THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 7. APPROVED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL BE LOCATED AS PER THE FIRE ® 0 MARSHALL, 8. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT W 0- INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED 9- CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. - U) 9. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR C ,) Q SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. Lu 10: LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED ON ALL OFFICE WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING O 111 AND ALL SALES FLOOR WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK (OR CEILING). LEVEL 4 w GYPSUM BOARD FINISH REQUIRED ALL OTHER AREAS THROUGHOUT TENANT U) SPACE. C Lo z 11. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE LLJ GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF 0 MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL 0 IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. W U PARTITION LEGEND c) SYMBOL DESCRIPTION M UJ ::DLLB G 119'911 u� NEW FULL HEIGHT PARTITION, F� REFER TO SHEET A4.0 BSB N BY NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION; Q REFER TO SHEET A4.0 f- SYMBOL LE Lj SYMBOL DESCRIPTION I now= I: 0 # PARTITION TYPES (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0) no DOOR NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0) ROOM ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0) JII� 110 h'i'l . .. ...... FLOOR FINISH PLAN NOTES CODED NOTES 300. EXTEND PCT -1 (2) FULL TILE LENGTHS INTO STOCK AREA. PROVIDE METAL ANGLE AND INSTALL HEAVY DUTY FLOOR EPDXY TO RAMP UP FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO METAL ANGLE 301. EDGE OF TILE TO ALIGN WITH EDGE OF WALL 302. EDGE OF TILE TO ALIGN WITH EDGE OF COLUMN ENCLOSURE 303. NOT USED. 304. TILE EXPANSION JOINT OVER SUBSTRATE EXPANSION JOINT. SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET. 305. G.C. TO VERIFY THRESHOLD IN FIELD. INSTALL NEW THRESHOLD IF EXISTING IS DAMAGED. INSTALL NEW DOOR SWEEPS TO ENSURE DOOR 13 WEATHER TIGHT. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR HARDWARE. 306. EXTRUDE LVT-2 MIN. INTO STOCK ROOM. GENERAL PLAN NOTES 1. GC TO VERIFY AND ENSURE THAT SUB -FLOOR IS SOUND, SMOOTH, LEVEL & READY TO ACCEPT FINISH FLOORING MATERIALS - SEE SPEC SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 2. SEE A4.0 FOR ALL MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS AND COLORS 3. RAISE ALL FLOOR DRAINS & CLEAN OUTS TO NEW FINISH FLOOR LEVEL (TYPE III DEALS) 4. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR FLOOR FINISHES & TRANSITION STRIP TYPES. 5. GC TO MEASURE AND VERIFY DIMENSIONS. ANY DISCREPANCIES MUST BE REPORTED TO BCF PROJECT MANAGER & ARCHITECT BEFORE ANY FINISH FLOOR INSTALLATION CAN COMMENCE. (TYPE III DEALS) 6. ALL CERAMIC / PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE (NEW & EXISTING) IS TO BE PROTECTED IMMEDIATELY UPON INSTALLATION W/ 1/8" MASONITIF BOARD, DUCT TAPED AT ALL EDGES. ALL TAPE & ADHESIVE RESIDUE ON TILE TO BE REMOVED & ALL TILE TO BE POLISHED BEFORE GRAND OPENING. 7. ANY DAMAGED FLOOR TILE SHALL BE REPLACED AT THE GENERAL CONTRACTORS EXPENSE - SEE GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 8. PORCELAIN SALES TILE: TILES TO BE CUT NO SMALLER THAN 11 OVER SIX (6) TILES AND IN THE CENTER OF AISLE (NOT NEAR TURNS OR INTERSECTIONS) 9. INSTALL LVT SQUARE TILE AT 4 TURNS PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. 10. INSTALL LVT PLANK TILE PARALLEL WITH FRONT ENTRY WALL, TYP. 11. PROVIDE TRANSITIONS AT ALL CHANGE OF FLOOR MATERIAL LOCATIONS. 12; LVT TO BE LAID TIGHT WITH NO GAPS BETWEEN EACH PIECE OF MATERIAL 13. PITCH / SLOPE FLOORS IN JANITOR AND TOILET ROOMS TOWARDS FLOOR DRAINS, TYPICAL. FINISH Su"HEDULE KEY MATERIAL HATCH AREA CPT -1 CARPET 280 S.F. El CT -1 CERAMIC TILE . .. ..... ..... 665 S.F. d 0 LL_ PCT -1 PORCELAIN TILE 13,030 S.F. LL_ LVT-1 LUXURY VINYL TILE +1- 6,715 S.F. 0 0 LVT-2 LUXURY VINYL TILE . ... . ... .. ......... .. +/- 34,360 S.F. LL 0 7-1-17. Z-1 ENTRY FLOORING 0 ui 355 S.F. CE 0 FS -1 FLOOR SEALER 4,870 S.F. w < fR TRANSITION STRIP (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) TEJ TILE EXPANSION JOINT (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) RUN FLOOR FINISH TIGHT TO COLUMN ENCLOSURE. CUT VINYL WALL BASE TO ENSURE TIGHT AGAINST FLOORING & COLUMN ENCLOSURE. INSTALL LEVEL AROUND COLUMN ENCLOSURE FuS REVISIONS El LL_ FuS REVISIONS Lu A Kim A 1 SHEET NO. ..... . - -- ---- ----- LL_ d 0 LL_ U) 0 0 ui CE 0 w < me 0 U) 0-' UJ 0 11-- Lij Uj rn 0 0 uj 171- >_ I-_ co (o w Lu >< 0 111 cf) 0 I-- cf) <1 z LO 0 cn0 n UJ co =D 0 0 0 uj UJ co cf) del 0 < z LLJ Or_ o Cf) Lu A Kim A 1 SHEET NO. ..... . - -- ---- ----- A Kim A 1 SHEET NO. ..... . - -- ---- ----- i i i -- -- -- -- i I I I i I i j' i i I I i I i � I L I III � -- - -----. _ - - -- - ----- - -- _-_ ___ _ _-------- --�.�_ --_ —_.�_��._ _,.�.___ I _.._�.� � ..��..� n �.�_� w � � �..__----.._.. � _,_ _�_�.:�:;...LWa.�.LL.�.��� — � __�..w._..._^ �I � i _�._ _ IWC_ _. r ......,�.�...�4.,v.. ___ .� a �, (D C`� I j j 12'-0" A, F 124- A.F.F.`� CODED NOTES: 400. ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE IN SUSPENDED METAL CEILING T -GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING; SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 402. EXPOSED STRUCTURE. PAINT PER SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH. ALL WIRES TO BE TUCKED TIGHT TO STRUCTURE (MUST NOT BE VISIBLE FROM BELOW) 403, SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. ALL SALES FLOOR LIGHTING IN ROWS TO HAVE STRUTS INSTALLED TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT 404: RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 405. NOT USED 406. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURES THROUGHOUT SALES TO BE LOCATED 2'-6" FROM FACE OF WALL TO CENTER OF FIXTURE U.N.O. COORDINATE WITH BCF GRAPHICS PLAN FOR SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. 407. BULK HEAD. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS & DETAIL B/A1:6 408. PVM MONITOR. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 409. NOT USED. 410. NOT USED. 411. EXISTING TO REMAIN. RELAMP ALL REMAINING FIXTURES. 412. INFILL CEILING GRID AND PANELS TO MATCH EXISTING. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. REPLACE ALL CEILING TILES. 413. NEW GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. PAINT P-5. 414. EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING / SOFFIT. PAINT P-5. LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION a SEE SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS ° NEW 18 CELL 4 LAMP 2x4 FLANGED PARABOLIC - Aix,# _o SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS r, NEW 2x4 FLANGED PRISMATIC - T SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS L ® NEW 2x2 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE f' xWN SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW 8' INDUSTRIAL FLUORESCENT FIXTURE (2 LAMPS PER CROSS 1 SECTION) - E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS C Cl Pli Cl O> CD NEW (3 LAMP) 8' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'4" A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS A NEW (2 LAMP) 8' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" Al A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW 4'(2 LAMP) FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" A2 A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW (3 LAMP) 4' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" C A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS u NEW 15/16" 2x4 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON a DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2x45/8" ACOUSTICAL TILE (ACT -1) uj NEW 15/16" 2x2 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2x2x5/8" ACOUSTICAL TILE (ACT -1) NEW 15/16" 2x2 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON a a NEW GYPSUM BOARD CEILING o �m i i i REFLECTED CEILING L OTE CODED NOTES: 400. ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE IN SUSPENDED METAL CEILING T -GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING; SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 402. EXPOSED STRUCTURE. PAINT PER SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH. ALL WIRES TO BE TUCKED TIGHT TO STRUCTURE (MUST NOT BE VISIBLE FROM BELOW) 403, SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. ALL SALES FLOOR LIGHTING IN ROWS TO HAVE STRUTS INSTALLED TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT 404: RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 405. NOT USED 406. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURES THROUGHOUT SALES TO BE LOCATED 2'-6" FROM FACE OF WALL TO CENTER OF FIXTURE U.N.O. COORDINATE WITH BCF GRAPHICS PLAN FOR SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. 407. BULK HEAD. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS & DETAIL B/A1:6 408. PVM MONITOR. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 409. NOT USED. 410. NOT USED. 411. EXISTING TO REMAIN. RELAMP ALL REMAINING FIXTURES. 412. INFILL CEILING GRID AND PANELS TO MATCH EXISTING. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. REPLACE ALL CEILING TILES. 413. NEW GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. PAINT P-5. 414. EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING / SOFFIT. PAINT P-5. LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION a SEE SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS ° NEW 18 CELL 4 LAMP 2x4 FLANGED PARABOLIC - Aix,# _o SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS r, REFLECTED CEILING L OTE CODED NOTES: 400. ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE IN SUSPENDED METAL CEILING T -GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING; SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS 402. EXPOSED STRUCTURE. PAINT PER SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH. ALL WIRES TO BE TUCKED TIGHT TO STRUCTURE (MUST NOT BE VISIBLE FROM BELOW) 403, SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. ALL SALES FLOOR LIGHTING IN ROWS TO HAVE STRUTS INSTALLED TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT 404: RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 405. NOT USED 406. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURES THROUGHOUT SALES TO BE LOCATED 2'-6" FROM FACE OF WALL TO CENTER OF FIXTURE U.N.O. COORDINATE WITH BCF GRAPHICS PLAN FOR SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. 407. BULK HEAD. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS & DETAIL B/A1:6 408. PVM MONITOR. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 409. NOT USED. 410. NOT USED. 411. EXISTING TO REMAIN. RELAMP ALL REMAINING FIXTURES. 412. INFILL CEILING GRID AND PANELS TO MATCH EXISTING. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. REPLACE ALL CEILING TILES. 413. NEW GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT TO MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. PAINT P-5. 414. EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING / SOFFIT. PAINT P-5. LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NEW 18 CELL'3 LAMP 2x4 LAY -1N PARABOLIC- ARABOLIC- SEE SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS ° NEW 18 CELL 4 LAMP 2x4 FLANGED PARABOLIC - Aix,# _o SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS r, NEW 2x4 FLANGED PRISMATIC - T SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS L ® NEW 2x2 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE f' xWN SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW 8' INDUSTRIAL FLUORESCENT FIXTURE (2 LAMPS PER CROSS 1 SECTION) - E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS C Cl NEW 4' INDUSTRIAL FLUORESCENT FIXTURE (2 LAMPS PER CROSS SECTION) Cl O> CD NEW (3 LAMP) 8' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'4" A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS A NEW (2 LAMP) 8' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" Al A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW 4'(2 LAMP) FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" A2 A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW (3 LAMP) 4' FLUORESCENT HIGH -BAY FIXTURE, MOUNT @ 13'-0" A3 A.F.F. - SEE E5.0 FOR SPECIFICATIONS NEW 15/16" 2x4 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2x45/8" ACOUSTICAL TILE (ACT -1) NEW 15/16" 2x2 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2x2x5/8" ACOUSTICAL TILE (ACT -1) NEW 15/16" 2x2 SUSPENDED GRID CEILING (ACT -2) W/ NEW NON DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2x&5/8" ACOUSTICAL TILE (ACT -1) NEW GYPSUM BOARD CEILING o �m SEE SCHEDULES ON A4,0 UNDERSIDE OF —SEE 21/A4.1 FOR SLIP STRUCTURAL ROOF DECK TRACK DETAIL 518" DRYWALL BOTH SUSPENDED CEILING IN SIDES, FULL HEIGHT TO HALLWAY @ 10'4" A.F.F. UNDERSIDE OF DECK BLOCKING3-518" 20 GA. METAL STUD @ 16" O.C. BOTTOM OF BULKHEAD WIDTH OF WALL SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHT 3 IL; 1.6 SCALE: 112" = V-0'° EXTERIOR WALL FASTEN TO CEILING W/ CLIPS / BRACKETS PER LIGHT MANUF. SPECS. A FIXTURE EQ. 6'4" EQ. 2'-6" Al FIXTURE FITTTING ROOMS FINISH FLOOR FIT T TTI L.Iuo"HT FIXTURES— L6 I T0 ; SCALE: 1/8" =1'4' m c-� 0 U- 0 U– U) LAJ Ljj i I Lu 0 L II � 0 C) Lo CIO ui w 0 U) ° ) Aix,# _o r, +,Sna I t�iz4r Na,Frt`f6 �3 nz f' xWN 8e N M W) t9 ice- co O> CD c-� 0 U- 0 U– U) LAJ Ljj i I Lu 0 L II � 0 C) Lo CIO ui w 0 U) k N M W) t9 ice- co O> CD I i ITEM MFR./ MODEL REMARKS r-- -19- 538. SURFACE MOUNTED MIRROR - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES 22 GAL. ROUND GRAY PLASTIC A TRASH RECEPTACLE UNTOUCHABLE TRASH CAN ( RUB3546GRAY) ORDER FROM SID TOOLS L 540. TV & MOUNTING BRACKET ABOVE. CONFIRM LOCATION WITH BCF PROJECT MANAGER. COORDINATE W/ W/ FUNNEL LID (RUB3548GRAY) DESCRIPTION B BABY CHANGER AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (MODEL # 9012) o C TOILET SEAT COVER 0 SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0,2 o DISPENSER 0477 -SM) SHEET ON A4.0) D HI 1 LO WATER COOLER REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS (D F TOILET PAPER DISPENSER 0 SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 G GRAB BAR AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (SERIES # 3700) ALL FASTENERS TO BE CONCEALED H HAND DRYER XLERATOR (MODEL # XL -SB), SURFACE 208 VOLTS, 9-10 AMPS ELECTRIC UNIT FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: MOUNTED J WALL MOUNT SINK REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0,2 K WALL SHIELD '14" x 14" x 1/8" THICK STAINLESS STEEL ATTACHED TO CERAMIC TILE BELOW 525, ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM BENCH (2'-0"x5'-0") @ 17"-19" A.F.F. - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK SHIELD W/ 1" RADIUS ROUNDED EDGES "H" AND "J" W/ HEAVY DUTY ADHESIVE - -'LL _tea ,_I SALES/STOCK r6_ L L A2.0 SCALE: 114" =1'-0" TYP. RECEIVING 123 TOILET ROOM SCHEDULE NOTE: 1. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED PER LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS & GUIDELINES SEE A0:2 FOR DETAILS. 2. ALL ACCESSORIES TO BE STAINLESS, STEEL FINISH W/ ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING, U.N.O. STORAGE w2 L L A�.� SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" 101 FITTING 3ENLARGED PLAN SCALE: 1/4" - V-0" MATCHLINE f ROOM ACCESSORY NOTES ULE FOR LIST OF ALL ACCESSORIES. v G v ENLARGED FLOOR.PL,AN NOTES _CODED NOTES:a 500. SEE A4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES 501. HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME - 502. NEW ELIASON DOOR & FRAME. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE A4.0 FOR SIZE AND DETAILS 503, COUNTER @ 32" A.F.F. t 504. COUNTER C 42" A.F.F. -_ 505. SHELVING ABOVE COUNTER. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS 506. NOT USED. - - 507. INSTALL 1/2" PLYWOOD FULL HEIGHT DIRECT TO STUDS ON WALL TO RECEIVE COUNTER FOR TV MONITOR BRACKETS (GYPSUM BOARD TO BE INSTALLED OVER PLYWOOD) 508: SAFE N:LC. 509. PASS THRU WINDOW. SEE A4.1 FOR DETAILS 510. FURNITURE 511: BREAK ROOM BASE & WALL CABINETS W/ SINK. SEE ELEVATIONS AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS 512. FRIDGE / FREEZER, TYP: OF 2 513. VENDING MACHINE, TYP. OF 3 ITEM MFR./ MODEL REMARKS r-- -19- 538. SURFACE MOUNTED MIRROR - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES 22 GAL. ROUND GRAY PLASTIC A TRASH RECEPTACLE UNTOUCHABLE TRASH CAN ( RUB3546GRAY) ORDER FROM SID TOOLS L 540. TV & MOUNTING BRACKET ABOVE. CONFIRM LOCATION WITH BCF PROJECT MANAGER. COORDINATE W/ W/ FUNNEL LID (RUB3548GRAY) DESCRIPTION B BABY CHANGER AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (MODEL # 9012) o C TOILET SEAT COVER AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (MODEL # SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0,2 o DISPENSER 0477 -SM) SHEET ON A4.0) D HI 1 LO WATER COOLER REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 F TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (MODEL # 0040) SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 G GRAB BAR AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. (SERIES # 3700) ALL FASTENERS TO BE CONCEALED H HAND DRYER XLERATOR (MODEL # XL -SB), SURFACE 208 VOLTS, 9-10 AMPS ELECTRIC UNIT FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: MOUNTED J WALL MOUNT SINK REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0,2 K WALL SHIELD '14" x 14" x 1/8" THICK STAINLESS STEEL ATTACHED TO CERAMIC TILE BELOW 525, ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM BENCH (2'-0"x5'-0") @ 17"-19" A.F.F. - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK SHIELD W/ 1" RADIUS ROUNDED EDGES "H" AND "J" W/ HEAVY DUTY ADHESIVE ALL EDGES FORMICA SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP & 4" TOILET ACCESSORY (SEE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A2.0) L LAVATORY & COUNTER BACKSPLASH (COLOR: BASILICA 503) WI SEE DETAILS ON A4.1 OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) INTEGRAL SINK BASINS (COLOR: ARCTIC 102) 527. MIRROR & PLATFORM. NO CAULK TO BE USED 4. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PARTITION TYPES. 42" HIGH FULL LENGTH STAINLESS STEEL O M MIRROR, FULL LENGTH CHANNEL FRAMED MIRROR W/ MITERED SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, CORNERS & BRIGHT FINISH ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. 18`' x 36" STAINLESS STEEL CHANNEL FRAMED M1 MIRROR, SINGLE MIRROR W/ MITERED CORNERS & BRIGHT SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 6, ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND FINISH (ANGLED IF REQ'D BY CODE) N SANITARY NAPKIN AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 RECEPTACLE (MODEL # 8523A) P PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AMERICAN SPECIALTIES; INC. SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION "f0 ORIGINAL CONDITION. (MODEL # 8523A) 534. EMPLOYEE LOCKERS S SOAP DISPENSER DIAL (DIA00402 - SMOKE) NOT STAINLESS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 T TOILET PARTITION AMPCO (STAINLESS STEEL) U URINAL REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.2 W WATER CLOSET REFER TO P1.1 FOR SPECS SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0:2 NOTE: 1. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED PER LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS & GUIDELINES SEE A0:2 FOR DETAILS. 2. ALL ACCESSORIES TO BE STAINLESS, STEEL FINISH W/ ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING, U.N.O. STORAGE w2 L L A�.� SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" 101 FITTING 3ENLARGED PLAN SCALE: 1/4" - V-0" MATCHLINE f ROOM ACCESSORY NOTES ULE FOR LIST OF ALL ACCESSORIES. v G v ENLARGED FLOOR.PL,AN NOTES _CODED NOTES:a 500. SEE A4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES 501. HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME - 502. NEW ELIASON DOOR & FRAME. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE A4.0 FOR SIZE AND DETAILS 503, COUNTER @ 32" A.F.F. t 504. COUNTER C 42" A.F.F. -_ 505. SHELVING ABOVE COUNTER. SEE ELEVATIONS FOR DETAILS 506. NOT USED. - - 507. INSTALL 1/2" PLYWOOD FULL HEIGHT DIRECT TO STUDS ON WALL TO RECEIVE COUNTER FOR TV MONITOR BRACKETS (GYPSUM BOARD TO BE INSTALLED OVER PLYWOOD) 508: SAFE N:LC. 509. PASS THRU WINDOW. SEE A4.1 FOR DETAILS 510. FURNITURE 511: BREAK ROOM BASE & WALL CABINETS W/ SINK. SEE ELEVATIONS AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS 512. FRIDGE / FREEZER, TYP: OF 2 513. VENDING MACHINE, TYP. OF 3 MATCHLINE 514. GENDER SIGN REFER TO SHEET A4.0 r-- -19- 538. SURFACE MOUNTED MIRROR - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES 515: BRAILLE SIGN 539. PARTITION MOUNTED DOOR STOP - INSTALL SO AS NOT TO LOCK DOOR WHEN OPENED 516. NOT USED. L 540. TV & MOUNTING BRACKET ABOVE. CONFIRM LOCATION WITH BCF PROJECT MANAGER. COORDINATE W/ SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 517. MOP SINK W/ HOT WATER TANK ABOVE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS ELECTRICAL o # 518. NOT USED. o 542. FINISH FACES TO ALIGN. 519. 5" WIDE FIM FRAME (PTD) CASED OPENING AROUND FITTING ROOM ENTRANCE SHEET ON A4.0) uj 543. INFILL WITH SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION. FINISH FACES TO ALIGN. 520. BOTTOM OF SOFFIT @ T-0" A.F.F. 544, EXTEND GYPSUM BD./MTL STUDS UP TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ON EXISTING WALL TO BOARDER CASH 0c X 521. NOT USED. OFFICE. ROOM 522, PMV MONITOR ABOVE SOFFIT FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 523. FITTING ROOM PARTITION - TYP. USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING C=> -/CODED 524. FITTING ROOM BENCH @ V-8 1/2" A.F.F. - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES 2. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS THROUGHOUT ENTIRE BCF SPACE. CG -1 Tr 525, ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM BENCH (2'-0"x5'-0") @ 17"-19" A.F.F. - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK ALL EDGES X TOILET ACCESSORY (SEE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A2.0) � e 3. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED 526. ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM MIRROR - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES. OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 527. MIRROR & PLATFORM. NO CAULK TO BE USED 4. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PARTITION TYPES. O 528. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -1) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS IN SALES & OFFICE AREA, TYP. 5. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P: DRAWINGS _ WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. 529. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -2) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS IN STOCK 1 RECEIVING AREA, TYP. n LLJi 530. NOT USED. 6, ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND CD 531: NOT USED. ORDINANCES iN THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 0 532, BCF EQUIP. ONLY MOUNTED ON 44 3/4" F.T. PLYD. PANEL ©- 8, WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, 533. BURGLAR & FIRE ALARM PANELS MOUNTED ON 8x4 3/4" F.T. PLYD. PANEL MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION "f0 ORIGINAL CONDITION. 534. EMPLOYEE LOCKERS 9: SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 535. DASHED LINE INDICATES FRP-1 TO BE INSTALLED UP TO 48" A.F.F. 10. LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED ON ALL OFFICE WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING AND ALL SALES FLOOR 536. WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3 Z MATCHLINE 537. CLOTHING HOOK MOUNTED Co) 60" A.F.F. MOUNT @ 40" A.F.F. IN ACCESSIBLE STALL. REFER TO SHEET A4.0 538. SURFACE MOUNTED MIRROR - USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES e�9 co 539. PARTITION MOUNTED DOOR STOP - INSTALL SO AS NOT TO LOCK DOOR WHEN OPENED L 540. TV & MOUNTING BRACKET ABOVE. CONFIRM LOCATION WITH BCF PROJECT MANAGER. COORDINATE W/ SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL # 541. NOT USED. 542. FINISH FACES TO ALIGN. SHEET ON A4.0) 543. INFILL WITH SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION. FINISH FACES TO ALIGN. 544, EXTEND GYPSUM BD./MTL STUDS UP TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ON EXISTING WALL TO BOARDER CASH OFFICE. ROOM 545, EXTEND EXISTING GYPSUM BD/MTL STUDS TO V-0" ABOVE FINISHED CEILINGS. FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING C=> -/CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) 2. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS THROUGHOUT ENTIRE BCF SPACE. CG -1 TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK AREAS. X TOILET ACCESSORY (SEE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A2.0) 3. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 4. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PARTITION TYPES. O 5. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P: DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. LLJi 6, ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND a C ORDINANCES iN THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. ui 7. APPROVED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL BE LOCATED AS PER THE FIRE MARSHALL. 8, WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION "f0 ORIGINAL CONDITION. 0 w 9: SEE SCHEDULE SHEET FOR ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 10. LEVEL 5 FINISH REQUIRED ON ALL OFFICE WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF CEILING AND ALL SALES FLOOR WALLS TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK (OR CEILING). LEVEL 4 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH REQUIRED ALL OTHER Z AREAS THROUGHOUT TENANT SPACE. Lijd 11. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) Lu PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR 2 X INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 0 TOTI L co Z s SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Q NEW FULL HEIGHT PARTITION, Lo REFER TO SHEET A4.0 F_L. NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION, WEE MATCHLINE REFER TO SHEET A4.0 e�9 co SYMBOLLEGEND L SYMBOL DESCRIPTION # PARTITION TYPES (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4,0) SHEET ON A4.0) DOOR NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ROOM ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE SHEET ON A4.0) C=> -/CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) X TOILET ACCESSORY (SEE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A2.0) Lu r� e�9 co L P- ori O ryui Lu rr Lu O LJJ0 LLJi A a C ui n 0 w w C Z Lijd Lu 2 X w © UJ 0 co Z s Q Lo F_L. ®o u U) a 1_0 LLI Cil C�.7 F�- q O W W co LU r� 0 `r F-� Ll� CK 0 E_��_J_�1�-1 0 0. cs� ............... DIVISION 1 - GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION 2, Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. SECTION 01100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 5 - USE OF SITE PART I - GENERAL A. Tire Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, the Contract Documents and BCF. Open 1.1 Store Construction: Contractor shall develop and present to Owner an appropriate written plan of action for those Instance$ where construction is 1.1 THE CONTRACT undertaken in an operating store. Such plan of action shall include, without limitation, the method of identifying superintendents who can alarrage The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or open store projects, options for partial closure, complete closure, off peak construction and other steps designed to mitigate the Impact of agreements, either written or oral. The Contract rhay be amended or modified only by a written modification. The contract documents include, but construction on the operating store and its custorners. are not limited to, the bidding documents, the drawings, the specifications, the schedule and the addenda. The contract shall be executed no less B. Temporary services and facilities: the contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain (including necessary repairs and replacements) than in duplicate. teff1porary water facilities for its use and the use of all subcontractors and any other contractor performing separate work for the projects. 1.2 THE WORK Contractors facilities shall include a service line and all necessary fittings to bring the water to one or more convenient terminal points. A. The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment C. The contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain (including necessary repairs and replacernents) temporary electric service adequate and services provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. for the fighting and power requirements of contractor, all subcontractors, and owners contractors. Stairs and other enclosed areas shall have 1.3 INTENT 'I adequate lighting. All such facilities shall conform to all requirements of the NEC, the local utility, and any AI A. fie intent of the Contract Documents is to include all iteris necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. 0. Contractor shall be responsible for rinothods of operation and the loads imposed by all users of the freight elevator. Contractor shall hot The Contract Documents are complementary, arid what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. permit any method of operation or load which would damage or endanger the equipment or create any safety hazard. 1.4 Owner reserves the right to withhold award of the contract for a period of 90 days from bid date, at their sole discretion. Contractor's price is to rernain E. The General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting ALL porcelain ceramic tile, ceramic tile and I during construction and maintining firm and unchanged for this 90 day period. the protection until Substantial Completion, as noted in Section 09310. 1.5 Contractor is to submit a proposed subcontractor list within 10 days of bid award. No subcontractors will be allowed who are not approved by local F. The contractor (fixtuire installer) shall be responsible for maintaining the protection of ALL porcelain cerarnic tile, ceramic tile and LVT during the mall management locations. If requested by the local mall that specific contractors for any portion of work be used, Contractor shall comply. fixture delivery and installation. The contractor will be fined $1,000 for every tile area damaged due to the transportation of pallets arid fixtures across the tile aisles and/or due to the installation of the fixtures. PART 2 - OWNER action. PART 6 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Submittals Schedule: Cornply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." A. Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, BCF shall obtain and pay for other A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. The necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges. Contractor shall endeavor not to damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractor or any B. The terrin "Project Manager" means the employee or representative of the Owner designated by the Owner to provide management arid existing structure by cutting, patching, fitting, or otherwise altering any work or by excavation. If the contractor shall damage any such work, the supervisory services for the Project. All communications to the Contractor shall be through the PM. The PM is not responsible for the acts or Contractor shall promptly and completely restore the saryie to its original condition. Special care and precaution shall be taken with respect to all orrissions of the Contractor, nor is the Project Manager responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences procedures or safety exposed final finish surfaces, whether new or existing- Do not cut nd patch structural elerhents in a manner that could change their load carrying precautions at the site. The Project Manager shall render interpretations of the Contract Documents and shall, in the first instance, be thejudge of capacity or load deflection ratio, the performance thereunder by the Contractor. No oral interpretation shall be binding on the Owner. At any stage in the construction of the arid union jurisdictions. Project the PM may conduct inspections in the work. PART 7 - CLEANING UP C. Owner shall provide to the Contractor the Drawings free of charge. Said drawings are diagrammatic, and shall be followed as closely as actual 7. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, I and UL standards and regulations for ternporary electric service. Install service to comply with construction and work of individual trades will permit. Where, because of a minor error or omission in the Drawings, something manifestly A. The Contra6torshall keep the promises and surrounding@rea free frorn accumulation of debris and trash related to the Work daily basis. necessary to the completion of the Work is riot shown on the Drawings, it is agreed that the Intent of the Owner and the Contractor is such that such Overall jobste cleaning shall be conducted an a weekly basis. Contractor shall maintain orderly housekeeping during the progress of construction, omitted material or Work shall be supplied by the Contractor as part of the Work and without additional compensations. arid upon completion shall thoroughly clean all areas, both indoors arid outdoors. In addition to clean up operations, final clean up shall include the D. Owner reserves tire right to search all personnel, packages, toolboxes, material shipments, etc, on anyone entering or leaving the sitelstore at following operations wherever they can be adapted to the Project: any time, Contractor shall coordinate its working hours with the store operation schedule and will cooperate with owner to meet security I . All floors shall be dry swept, followed by another sweeping with damp sawdust. requirements (on a remodel project). Owner will provide security service for work which reasonably.must be performed during off store hours, 2. Dust, dirt, mortar drops, paint drippings, oil, grease arid other blemishes shall be removed from all surfaces, including pipe and provided contractor shall use all reasonable efforts to minimize the number of occasions requiring off hours work. equipment. E. Owner shall make available for contractors use the existing loading dock and freight elevator within the store. 3. Windows, glass lights, and glass doors shall be washed on both sides. Paint overruns and putty smears shall be removed. F. Contractor is to contact BOF PM for the release of all Owner supplied items. All BCF supplied construction material must be counted and 4. Hardware shall be rubbed clean with flannel cloths. checked for damage and/or shortages upon delivery. Any damage and/or shortage must be noted on the packing slip at the time of delivery and 5. Exterior pavings shall be swept and hosed down. BCF must be notified. Any damages or shortages not duly noted and reported will be replaced at the Contractors expense, in the event that 6. Contractor shall remove all construction rubbish, scaffolding, equipment, temp protection, temp field structures, arid anything else that property, Materials, or articles of any type are furnished by the Owner to the Contractor, the Contractor assumes complete liability therefore, was required in connection with the construction of the work, but not a permanent part thereof. including responsibility for on site or off site storage. (Optional) G. Do not demolish any existing fire alarm panels, wiring or devices, without first contacting the BCF project manager. Do not demolish any 7. Contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain temporary heating and ventilating as required for maintaining the work schedule existing HVAC or energy management controls, wiring, or devices, without first contacting the BCF project Manager. Do not demolish any arid proper placing, protection, and drying of work, including the Work and all work of other contractors performing separate work for the telephone D -mark or incorning phone lines without first contacting the BCF project manager. Projects. In all enclosed work areas, there shall be sufficient ternporary treating facilities to Maintain a minimum temperate of 65 degrees 1-1. A BCF top will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality ofthe f. heaters shall be located a safe distance from combustible Materials, and they shall have guards to protect against accidental contact. work. At the Owners sole option, it may accept defective or non conforming work. The Owner may do so instead of requiring the removal and Contractor shall provide, at its expense, all necessary accessories, including tarpaulins, or other teimporary enclosures necessary to correction of such work, in which case a change order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the contract sum. BCF HAS the authority retain heat and provide protection from the effects of inclernent weather. to reject work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. If the contractors fail to correct defective or non conforming work, tile Owner may Water: Potable. correct it at the expense of the Contractor. PART 8 - INDEMNIFICATION 1. BCF will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, Lumber arid Plywood: or for safety precautions arid programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractors responsibility. BCF will not be A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless BCF, the Architect, the Engineer, tile Architect's responsible for the Contractors failure to carry out the Work in accordbrice with the Contract Documents, Observation or inspections, including consultants and agents and employees of any of them and its respective divisions, subsidiaries, successors, assigns, and their respective agents reexamination, by Owner shall not be construed as a waiver of any portion of Owners rights under the Contract or as acceptance of any portion of and employees frorn and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but riot firrited to attorneys� fees, arising out of or resulting from the work, nor shall such observations or inspections diminish to any extent contractor's duty to perform the work in accordance with the perforrilanGe(fiegligent or otherwise) of the Work, provided that such Claim, clarnage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, contract documents and code. disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to J. Based on his observations and evaluations of the Contractor applications for payment, BCF will review arid certify the amounts due the the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissioris of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by Contractor. them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party K. BCF is to receive copies of all test reports. BCF will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the work. indemnified hereunder. If any legal action is threatened or brought again Owner or contractor or both of thern I of any of the foregoing F. matters, Contractor shall, at Contractors expense, settle or defend such action, paying all costs, expenses, and attorneys foes incurred by PAU 3 - OWNER'S RIGHTS Owners, and shall pay any amount agreed to in settlement and any judgment which may be rendered therein, arid Owner shall 1.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK PART 9 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Correction of work: The Contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the BCF Project Manager as failing to conform to the requirements General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. of the contract Documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting such rejected work. A. Project Meetings are to be held weekly at the Jobsite, for the purpose of discussing schedule, deliveries, coordination, and I They shall be B. If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, BCF may direct the Contractor in writing to stop attended by the major subcontractors on the project, The BCF manager will, if unable to attend, be tele-conferenced in to this meeting, and will the Work until the correction is made. In no event shall the Owners right to stop the Work obligate the Owner to do so for the benefit of the receive meeting notes published by the GC. Contractor or any other entity or person and the Contractor shall have no claim for damage by reason thereof. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain his own suitable office on the jobsite, for use by Owner, Architect and subcontractors, in which he will 1.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK keep the latest editions of all drawings, specs, addenda, change orders, approved shop drawings, product data, and other construction documents. A. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including the failure to man the job due C. Contractor shall be responsible for developing implementing, maintaining and supervising all safety programs in connection with the work and to labor disputes of any type, Or fail to perform any provision of the Contract Documents, including unauthorized Schedule Delay, and fails within a the project site. The contractor is responsible for taking all safety precautions to prevent injury or death to persons or damage to property. seven day period after receipt of written notice from BCF to correct such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, BCF may, without D. Landlords rules and regulations: Contractor shall farnfiarize itself with, and shall at all times abide by, all rules and regulations Of the Landlord prejudice to other remedies, correct such deficiencies. In such case, a Change Order shall be issued deducting the cost of correction frorn governing the Work and the Project, including, but not limited to, Landlord's security and emergency procedures. payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. E, Contractor aggress to pay Wages and benefits in total for 811 work performed on this project, which will be sufficient to ensure that the Project 1.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS will be free from business disruptions, labor disruptions or work stoppages, including, but riot firnited to, area standards picketing and/or hand billing A. BCF reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the project with BCF's own forces, and to award separate contracts in of the general public. connection with other portions of the project. Any such performance by the Owner or a separate contractor contracted with by the Owner shall not, F. Contractor is responsible for complying with any local labor regulations covering the Work. Should any dispute arise, the Contractor will be in and of itself, be grounds for a claim for delay or additional cost by the Contractor. required to settle same without claim or additional cost to the Owner. This applies to all subcontractors, matorial men, suppliers and all others B. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with separate contractors employed by BCF., including tire work of utility companies. The employed by the Contractor. Shop labels shall be affixed to all components if required by local regulations. Owner, the Contractor, and each of the Owners Separate contractors shall cooperate with one another in the use of the site, storage of their as required. materials and equipment and the execution of their work and shall connect and coordinate their work as required by the Contract Documents. The PART 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK Contractor, the Owner, and all separate contractors shall diligently endeavor not to damage the work of others. If any such damage takes place it Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and ryladify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or shall be promptly corrected at the expense of the party causing the damage. A, After execution of the Contract, changes in the Work may be accomplished by Change Order or by order for a Ininor change in the Work. BCF, C. Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefore. If the without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other contractor damages the work of a separate contractor, then the Contractor shall promptly settle the matter directly with the other Contractor and revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Any and all claims for extra compensation or changed work/scope must shall hold the Owner harmless from any and all effects of such damage. Contractor shall notify Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective be submitted within 30 days of their occurrence to BCF, or the will not be honored for review or compensation. Extra work that has been performed workmanship on the part of other contractors performing separate work, including utility companies, where the same will interfere with Contractors without authorization from BCF will not be considered for payment. Own operations. B� Change Order shall be a written order to the Contractor signed by BCF to change the Work, Contract Sum or Contract Tillie. Change order M. pricing is to include quantities, unit costs, labor costs, taxes, equipment rent, and be in sufficient detail. Change orders trust be accompanied by PART 4 - CONTRACTOR appropriate back up information: including, but riot limited to: Labor costs, material breakdown, quantities, taxes, equipment rates, and any other information that may be requested by BCF 1.1 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT C. All changes must be submitted timely for consideration. Any and all claims for extra compensation niust be Wbmitted within 30 days of their A. Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, becorne familiar with local conditions Occurrence, or they will not be honored for review or compensation. I . xtra work that has been performed without authorization from BCF will not be under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. Before submitting considered for payment. its proposal, contractor shall make all field surveys and examinations to determine existing Conditions at the site and ascertain any conditions and D. The BCF Project Manager will have authority to order tinorchanges in the Work not involving changes in the Contract Sum orthe Contract problems that will affect the work. Contractor shall also investigate requirements of the community With respect to required licenses, operating Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be written orders and shall be binding on the Contractor. conditions, trucking, disposal of refuse, available materials arid employment, etc, All costs necessary to overcome existing conditions and to The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. conform to such requirements shall be reflected in Contractors proposal, I If concealed or unknown p hysical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or B. Quality Assurance: Contractor to provide quality control services, from an independent qualified inspection firm, for, at a minimum, the from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be subject to equitable adjustment. following work: Soil Compaction, Concrete strength, air entrainment, slump, Masonry inspection, steel inspection, special inspections required by F6 If the Owner and the contractor cannot resolve the cost of the change by a lump surn agreement or a cost plus mutually acceptable fixed fee; AHJ. BCF is to be an the distribution of these reports. The agency to be used must have the experience and capability to conduct testing and the cantraCtor, upon receiving a written order signed by the owner, shall promptly proceed with the work involved (the "change" work). Thereafter, inspection required, as documented by ASTM . e548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. Costs for testing and the pen shall determine the cost of the change work on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the change work re -testing, if necessary, are to be borne by the Contractor. Testing agency is to promptly notify BCF if any irregularities or deficiencies are and attributable to the change. The contractor shall keep an iternized accounting together with appropriate supporting data for inclusion in observed in the work. a change order. Cost of the change work is limited to: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery, cost of labor, workers comp 1.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR insurance, bond premiums, rental value of equiphient and machinery, and the additional cost of I supervision directly attributable to the change. A, The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by BCF. Before G. In the event a dispute between the Owner and the contactor arises, the matter shall be resolved by negotiation between the Owners Project commencing activities, the Contractor shall: Manager and the Project Superriterident. If these people are unable to resolve the matter, it shall be refereed to negotiation between the Director of I . Take field measurements and verify field conditions; Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of verification of all conditions and Construction of the Owner and the Chief Exec. Officer of the Contractor. THERE WILL BE NO ARBITRATION ALLOWED. dimensions at the site, No extra charge or adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be I on account of differences or discrepancies SUMMARY between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. PART I I - TIME 2. Carefully compare this and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting arid patching. 3. Promptly report errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered to BCF performance of any portion of the work without having reviewed all of A. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. the contract documents, without reporting errors, inconsistencies, omissions, etc, or without having, where required, approved shop drawings, B. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in product data, or samples, shall be done at the Contractors sole risk. deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contract Time shall be extended I by Charige Order for such 4. The Contractor is to establish Control lines on the floor, two feet from center of column, every column, each way. These lines must be reasonable time as BCF may determine. The contractors claims, if any, for extension of time must be made in writing to the Project Manager not protected by cutting into the concrete and painting, snapping chalk lines, and spraying clear lacquer or another means that will ensure control more than five working days after the Contractor has notico of the delay. lines remain until project is completed or floor covering is in place. The contractor is to transfer the established control lines to each floor to C. In the event that the contractor has riot completed the work timely, liquidated DAMAGES IN THE AMOUNT OF $500.00 per day will accrue. maintain a uniform control line on each floor to ensure all ceiling grids correspond and escalators and elevators are square and true on each CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW floor. PART 12 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. Tire Contractor shall be solely responsible 1.1 CONTRACTSUM for and have control over Construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work. The A. The Contract Sum stated in the Agreement, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by BCF to the Contractor for contractor is solely responsible to the Owner for the acts, omission s, and defaults of its employees, subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, Material performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. men and any other person or entity involved in or performing any of the Work. Inspection of the Work by thee Project Manger or other 12 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT representatives of the Owner, approval of the Work by the PM or other reps of the Owner, and payment for the Work by the Owner shall not relieve A. At least ten days before the date established foreach progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to BCF an itemized Application for the Contractor of any of its obligations to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Documents. The superintendent shall be Payment, use allached formi for operations completed in accordarice with the values stated in the Agreement. Such application shall be supported available for the project and at the promises at all times during regular working hours and all other hours that work is being performed at the by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payrfient as BCF may reasonably require and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere In premises. the Contract Documents. Application and payment must be accompanied by lien waivers from all material men, supplier, and subcontractors for B. The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to BCF the names of subcontractors or suppliers for materials, supplies, and work performed oil the project through the date of which all prior application for permit [lave been ff lade. each portion of the Work. If requested, contractor shall furnish information with respect to past performance and financial status of the B. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to BCF no later than the time of payment. The subcontractors. BCF will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing if BCF, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to the subcontractors Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of on Application for Payment, Oil Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously or suppliers listed. Unskilled Workers shall not be permitted on the site. All work shall be performed under the supervision of an experienced and issued and payrfients received from BCF shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, competerit Project Superintendent. The contractors Project Superintendent in charge of the Work shall represent the Contractor and all directions security interests or other encumbrances adverse to BCF's interests. given to him, or its authorized representatives, by the Owner. 1.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS C, Contractor shall incorporate in all of its contracts with subcontractors the following provisions: Each sub shall be bound to contractor by the A. Payments shall not be made unless progress oil projOct and percentage of completion is in accordance with BCF approved schedule. terms of the contract documents between owner and contractor, and shall assume toward contractor all obligations and responsibilities which B. The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor and material supplier, upon receipt of payment from BCF, out of the amount paid to tile contractor by those documents assumes toward Owner, and shall have the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against contractor. Contractor on account of such entities' portion of the Work. D. Full perforrrI Contractor is liable to Owner for the full, complete and prompt performance of all contracts between contractor and any C. BCF shall not have responsibility for the payment of money to a Subcontractor or material supplier. subcontractor and any contracts assigned to contractor, and nothing in the contract documents shall Infer or cause in any way a waiver by owner of D. A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the project by BCF shall not constitute acceptance of any right against contractor because of breach, default, delay, defect or other acts or omissions for which 8 subcontractor may also be liable. Work not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS E. At any time BCF, may hialke payment directly to subcontractors, material men, and suppliers of contractor whenever in BCF'S sole discretion, A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, utilities, BCF determines there is any danger or likelihood that contractor is unable to pay such subcontractors, material men, and suppliers and such transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. The contractor warrants that all payment shall be credited against payment due under this agreement and/or the contract documents. materials and equipment furnished will be now, and that all Work not done in accordance with this warranty shall be considered grounds for default. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION B. The Contractor shall deliver, handle, store and install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. A. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated porfion thereof is sufficiently complete in C. BCF Supplied Material is enumerated on the drawings. It is the responsibility of the contractor to: accordance with the Contract Documents so BCF can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1) Contact the project manager by fax or email to arrange for release of the BCF supplied materials at the appropriate time for the orderly B. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, BCF will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall sequence of the work. establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish the responsibilities of BCF and Contractor, and shall fix the time within which the 2) Receive all BCF supplied material. Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the 3) Count and check for damage all received materials. Damages or shortages must be noted on the packing slip at the time of delivery and date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. BCF is to be notified by fax or email. Any damages or shortages will be the responsibility of the Contractor if BCF is not notified C. If any governmental authority having jurisdiction requires a "certificate of Occupancy" (including any temporary or partial certificate of immediately. occupancy required due to the project schedule) in connection with the Work, the same shall be secured by Contractor as agent for Owner. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL Contractor shall file all necessary applications, arrange any requited inspections, and advance any required fee. It shall be the Contractors A. Before the work begins, standards of workmanship quality shall be established to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. All equipment, duty and obligation, at its sole cost arid expense and without effect on the Contract Sum, to meet whatever conditions and prerequisites are materials, arid articles incorporated in the Work are to be new, unless specifically addressed otherwise, and of the best grade of their respective required in order to secure the issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy (including any temporary or partial certificate of occupancy) except kind for the purpose. that, upon issuance of the final Certificate of Occupancy, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for the foe required by the governmental authority R Issuing the same. A. The Contractor Warrants to BCF that: (1) materials and equipment furnished Under the Contract will be new and of good quality unless D. The following items are to be complete in order for BCF direct contractors to start their work: otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents; (2) the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permftt�d; I . Entire sprinkler system shall be complete, tested, and operational. and (3) the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish to Owner a minimum of 3 copies of all 2. Walls, partitions, and gyp drywall work shall be completed warranty certificates and guarantees, and all related maintenance manuals, operating instructions, maintenance stocks/and or replacement parts 3. Ceiling shall be completed, list. Contractor shall promptly enforce at its expense and such warranty or guarantee for owners benefit, if Owner shall request contractor to do so, 4. Lighting fixtures shall be installed, wired, lamped, and operating. and reimburse Owner for any costs paid or incureed by Owner in replacing defective, unsound, or improper work, due to the failure of the maker of 5. Electrical outlets shall be installed, wired, and energized, ready for store fixture electrical connections. any such Warranty or guarantee to fulfill its obligations thereunder. E. The area shall be Clean, 1.7 TAXES 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT A. The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes that are legally required When the Contract is executed. Except for the general A. Upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, BCF will inspect the Work. When BCF finds t I he Work acceptable and the Contract fully building permit, Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, taxes, levies, fees, tests and inspections required or imposed by performed, BCF will promptly process a final Application of Payment. any governmental authority having jurisdiction for or in connection with the execution and completion of the work, and contractor shall comply with B. Final payrilent shall not become due until the Contractor submits to BCF releases and waivers of liens, and data establishing payment or all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of any governmental authority in performing the work. satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, claims, security interests or cricumbrarices arising out of the Contract. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES C. Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for the building pennit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. proper execution and completion of the Work. D. Before final payment: B. The Contractor shall comply with arid give notices required by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. If the Contractor performs Work I Submit Final, Unconditional lien waivers from yourself and each subcontractor and supplier.The contractor shall refund to the Owner all knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without notice to BCF, the Contractor shall assume nroMO8 that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging a lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees. full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. The Contractor shall promptly notify BCF in writing of any known 2. Verify that all punch list items have been completed to BCF's satisfaction. The failure to include any items on the Punch List does not inconsistencies in the Contract Documents with such governmental laws, rules and regulations. It is contractor's responsibility to assure thatthe alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors project Work as drawn and specified complies with all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations. if Contractor observes or is informed I by superintendent shall remain at the job site until Punch List work is completed. any governmental authority having jurisdictions, that the Drawings and specs are at variances therewith, contract shall promptly notify Owner in 3. Provide 8 one-year warranty document iron) yourself and each subcontractor. writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted. If contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, 4. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies and equipment installed or incorporated in the work, free arid clear of all liens, rules, Or regulations, and without such notice to Owner, Contractor shall bear all responsibility and costs arising therefrom. claims, security, interest, or encurnbrances. 1.9 SUBMITTALS 5. Ptovide warranty documentation on any hew materials or equipment installed, i.e., I units, roofing, etc. A. The Contractor shall promptly review, approve in writing and submit to BCF Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals 6. Provide complete set of As -Built drawings. All inclications on as -built drawing shall be executed in a legible manner by a competent required by the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are riot Contract Documents. Contractor shall draftsman. If varlations and details cannot be shown clearly thereon, then contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings adequate to make all such submittals within reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. In no event shall Owners review impart the information. and acceptance of submittals relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors Of any sort, nor shall it in any way diminish Contractors obligation to 7. Project Close Out Manual, including, but [lot limited to, guarantees, warranty certificates, maintenance manuals, operating instructions, perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. BCF Requires that submittals be made on all major mechanical and electrical diagrams, maintenance stocks and/or replacement parts list. equipment; roofing system; escalator and elevator, fire sprinkler shop drawings, fire alarm shop drawings. As long as contractor is using specified suppliers/vendors for other divisions of work, no submittals will be necessary. 1.3 B. Contractor shall maintain a submittal register, which lists all the submittal requirements for the project, with a tracking of dates of approval and 1.6 reasons for disapproval or re -submittal. The register (attached in previous section of this) shall be updated weekly. C. C. Any deviations or substitutions made in the submittal process must be clearly arid legibly addressed, and a comparison of the proposed product A. against the specified product must be presented. D. Contractor shall also submit a 2 week look ahead schedule, accompanied by job photographs, on a weekly basis. PART 13 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY i.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs, Including all those required by law in connection with performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property Caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, or by anyone for whose acts the Contractor uray be liable. Contractor shall be solely responsible for maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and prograrns in connection with the work. Contractor shall coriply with all Federal and State OSHA requirements pertaining to the work. B, Workmen shall be confined to areas of construction, grid shall he required to maintain normal good discipline. Contractor shall discharge or require the discharge of those who violate Owners discipline rules or otherwise disturb a peaceful environment. C. Contractor shall not load or perruit any part of any building or other structure to be loaded with a weight which will endanger its safety. I Contractor shall support and maintain in operation all pipes, conduits, lines, hydrants and other facilk Ities of all utilities serving all or any portion of existing buildings of Owner or other property owners which may be encountered during the progress of the Work, and shall promptly repair and restore any such facilities damaged or disrupted by Contractor or any of its subcontractors. I Contractor shall be responsible to guard against fire at all times prior to completion of the work, Contractor acknowledges that the local Fire Marshalls office may exercise its rights to impose arid rnonfor the procedures used for the Project. F. Off hours work: If the contract includes work at or in all existing store building of Owner or adjacent to an existing mall building, portions of the Work which would be disruptive or normal business operations of Owners store or the mall, or which would be dangerous to the store or mall building occupants, shall be performed during hours when the Owners building and any allached buildings are closed for business and not occupied. Examples of such work include, without limitations, saw cutting of concrete, jack hammering, welding, metal cutting, and POUring concrete, erecting steel or hoisting equipment The requirement for such work to be performed off hours shall not operate to cause a change in the Contract Sum. PART 14 - CORRECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the BCF Project Manager as failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall bear the,cost of correcting such rejected Work. B. In addition to the Contractor's other obligations including warranties under the Contract, the Contractor shall, for a period of one year after Substantial Completion, correct work not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, BCF may correct it and the Contractor shall reimburse BCF for the cost of correction. PART 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT A. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. 1.2 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. B. If the Architect requires additional testing, the Contractor shall perform these tests. C. Landlord / General Contractor shall pay for tests. 1.3 GOVERNING LAW A. The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the project is located, and to the latest published editions of all building codes and references. All local energy and seismic code necessitated by the area the project is in are to be included in the contractors proposal. PART 16 - TERMINATION OFTHE CONTRACT 1.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR A. If BCF fails to make payment when due or substantially breaches any other obligation of this Contract, following seven days'wriften notice to BCF, the Contractor may terminate the Contract and recover from BCF payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 12 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER A. BCF may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: Refuses or falls to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; 1 ) Fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 2) Disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or 3) Is otherwise guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. B. When any of the above reasons exist, BCF, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of BCF and after giving the C.ontractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employinient of the Contractor and may: 1) Take possession of the site and of all materials thereon owned by the Contractor; 2) Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method BCF may deem expedient. C. When BCF terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is competed in accordance with the contract. BCF may deduct the costs of completion, any additional cost incurred due to Contractors, failure or omission and any damages resulting from Contractors, breach, from any amount owed to Contractor under this agreement and/or the Contract Documents and hold Contractor liable for any deficiency. D. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to BCF. This obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. END OF SECTION 01100. SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A, Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transarittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordin8tion with other submittals until related submiti[als are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1 . Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing thust be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2; Concurrent Review, Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial revi ew of each submittal. 3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification, I . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: b. Project name. c. Date. d. Name and address of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. f. Name and address of subcontractor. g. Narfle and address of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Unique identifier, including revision number. j� Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1 . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will riot be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually arid appropriately for transmittal and handling, Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 4. Include Contractor's certilication stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents, 5. Trar)smittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information I Project name. n. Date. 0. Destination (To:). p. Source (FronI q. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. r. Category arid type of submittal. s. Submittal purpose and description. t. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. u, Remarks. v. Signature of transmitter. 1, Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 6� Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Docurrient. 7. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit two single copies of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect, will return submittal with options selected. b. Final Submittal: Submit a minimum of three copies, unless copies are required for operation and Maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 8. If information most be specially prepared for subirnittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, riot as 0 1 +n 4 - .1 . - 9. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 10. Include the following information, as applicable: c. Manufacturers written recommendations. d. Manufacturers product specifications. e. Manufacturers installation instructions. E Standard color charts, g. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 11. Printed . performance curves. I. Operational range diagrarns. j. Mill reports. k. Standard product operating and maintenance Manuals. 1. Compliance with recogniZed trade association standards. I Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. n. Application of testing agency labels and seals. o. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1, Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: fi� Dimensions. q. Identification of products. r. Fabrication and installation drawings, s, Roughing -in and setting diagrams. t. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. u. Templates and patterns. v. Schedules. w. Design calculations. x. Compliance with specified standards. y. Notation of coordination requirements. z. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. W 2, Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ee� 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger 1.1 SUMMARY than 24 by 36 Inches. A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security arid protection 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: facilities. 4 a. Initial Submittal: Submit two blue- or black -line prints. Architect will return one print. B. Support facilities include, but are riot limited to, tire following: b. Final Submittal: Submit three blue- or black -line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit prints 1 . Waste disposal facilities. where prints Ore required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up arid 2� Field offices. retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. 3. Storage and fabrication sheds. A. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Security and protection facilities include, but are not hinited to, the following: B. Contractors Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's 4. Barricades, warning signs, and liglits. action. 5. Temporary enclosures. C. Submittals Schedule: Cornply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 'I Section "Payrrent Procedures," D. Standards: Comply with AN81 A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. E. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 6. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere With trade regulations F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish arid union jurisdictions. products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 7. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, I and UL standards and regulations for ternporary electric service. Install service to comply with I . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. NFPA 70. 2. Number and title of related Specification Sectiori covered by subcontract. 13� Tests and Inspections: Obtain required certifications and permits. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS C. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parfies engaged in the Work: A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections, 1. Keep ternporary services arid facilities clean and neat. 4. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 5. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that Includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates 1.4 MATERIALS and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide 6. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirernents in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." materials suitable for use intended. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requireirrients in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." B. Water: Potable. C. Qualification Data: Prepare written infonflation that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with C. Lumber arid Plywood: project names and addresses, nanies and addresses of architects and owners, arid other information specified, I . For barriers, sidewalkitrack protection and similar uses provide minimum 3/4" t[iick exterior grade plywood. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. D. Portable Chain-link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 9 gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements arid, where required, is innimurn 2 3/8" OD line posts and 2 7/8" OD corner and pull posts, with 15/8" OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting authorized for this specific Project. posts. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statenrents on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer corfifilies with requirements. Include 1.5 EQUIPMENT evidence of manufacturing experience where required. I General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. G, Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. F. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of N FPA-recom mended classes for exposures. Material for compliance with requirements. 1 . Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. 1. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results G� Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. glass -fiber -rein forced polyester shell or similar nbriabsorbent material. J. Compatibility 'rest Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of 1.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in mininiurn interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results offield as required. tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and ryladify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or I Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing 1;7 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION agency. A. General: Comply with the following: M. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply 1. Arrange storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction arid support facilities for easy access. with requirements in Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 1.8 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, arid similar violations of security. following, as applicable: C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with 1 . Preparation of substrates. appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, 2. Required substrate tolerances. including flashing red or ariber lights. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. END OF S :CTION 01500 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. 1.1 SUMMARY 0. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting arid patching. covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 13� Related Sections include the following: I Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. with no action taken. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW a. Requirements in this Section apply to electrical installations. Refer to Division 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before cutting and patching electrical Installations. submitting to Architect. 1.2 DEFINITIONS B. Approval Stamp: Starrip each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 ARCHITECT'S ACTION C. Structural Elements: Do riot cut and patch structural elements in a manner that coul d change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do riot bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 1 . Stair Stringers Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp 2. Structural Fraryling in areas related to the Work without approval of Architect. each submittal with an action stamp arid will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 3. Exterior Masonry Walls without approval of Architect. 7. Approved (Without Cornment). B. Operational Elements: Do not cut, patch, or disturb the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their 8. Approved as Noted (Re -submission Not Required) capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 9. Not Approved, Re -submit with Corrections 4. Primary operational systems and equipment. 10. Not Approved 5. Fire-fimtection systems. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. 6. Control systems. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. 7. Communication systems. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. 8. Computer systems. .END OF SECTION 01330 9. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut, patch, or disturb the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. This Section uses the term "Architect." Change this term to match that used to identify the design professional as defined in the General and Supplementary 10. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Conditions. 11. Exterior wall construction. Verify that Section titles referenced in this Section are correct for this Project's Specifications; Section titles may have changed. 12. Equipment supports. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 13. Piping, ductwork, conduit, vessels, and equipment. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in 8 manner that results in Visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch this Section. construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. 1.2 SUMMARY Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirelflents for quality assurance and quality control. 1.4 WARRANTY B. Testing and inspecting services are required to Verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated, These services do not relieve Contractor of E. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patcti, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting arid patching operations, by methods and responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. with materials so as not to void existing warranties. I . Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in 11�5 MATERIALS those Sections may also cover production of standard products. A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specilications. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to Document requirements. the fullest extent possible. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by 1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of provisions of this Section. existing materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.6 EXAMINATION C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed, settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including Compatibility with existing finishes or primers. and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 PREPARATION D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work sirnilar in material, design, and extent to that indicated A. Temporary Support: Provide ternporary support of Work to be cut. for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful ifi-service performance. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent clarnage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions E. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of . of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. successful in-service performance. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid F. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. interruption of services to occupied areas. 4. Where services are indicated as Contractors responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. 1.8 PERFORMANCE a. Contractor shall riot employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. A� General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, arid complete without 5. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed, delay. 6. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control 1 . Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to service. restore surfaces to their original condition. 7. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely 8. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original installer; comply with original Installers G. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and written recommendations. equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as H. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. retesting arid roinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that filled to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 1.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes, 4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 1 , Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, arid similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of pitching. seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. 1 . Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. C. -Repair and protection are Contractors responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a mannerthat will .END OF SECTION 01400 eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. END OF SECTION 01731 W ee� 4 W ee� (Y') _J L1_ 0 I 7D Lu 0 0 0 DI of n n Z 0 CO (0 LLI >< 0 LU LL_ Z cl) 2: LU 0 0 LU UJI CUO) Q 0 0 0 LU Uj (0 U) LU Z) 7 - LU ry 0 :D UA ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DATE 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A7wO SHEET NO. L DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Structural and architecturally exposed structural -steel framing, B. Prefabricated building columns. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricator to select or complete simple shear connections to withstand design loads. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd. B. Quality Standard: AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" arid "Specification for Structural Steel Buildirigs--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Mockups for each form of architecturally exposed structural steel. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Structural -Steel Shapes: W -shapes, channels, angles, M -shapes, S -shapes, plate and bar, cold-forined hollow structural sections arid steel pipe. B. Castings: High-strength steel. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: High strength. D. Anchor Rods: Headed rods, nuts, plate washers, and washers. E. Connectors: Shear connectors, threaded rods, eye bolts and nuts and sleeve nuts. F. Primer: Zinc oxide. G. Grout: Nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Connections: Slip -critical high-strength bolts and welded connections. B, Surface Preparation' SSPC-SP 2. C. Galvanizing: Hot dip. 1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Field Connections: Slip -critical high-strength lbo6 and welded connections. 1.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. END OF SECTION 05120 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Open -web K -series steel joists for roof framing. B. K -series steel joist substitutes for roof framing. C. LH -series long -span steel joists for roof framing. D. DLH-series deep long -span steel joists for roof frarning. E. Joist girders for roof framing. F. Special joists for roof framing, designed by manufacturer, G. Joist accessories, including permanent bridging. 1.2 MATERIALS A. Bolts: High-strength carbon steel. 1 . Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating. B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15. C. Open -Web K -Series Steel Joists: With top -chord extensions. D. Long -Span Steel Joists: I � End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel. E. Joist Girders: 1 . End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel, 1.3 ERECTION A. Place And secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop drawings, arid as herein specified. B. Placing joists: do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place arid secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. C. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction, D. Bridging: install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at beams, masonry walls, and/or concrete walls. Coordinate bridging with mechanical duct locations. Where new framing interrupts existing bridging, provide new bridging to maintain continuity. E. Fastening Joists: 1 . Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications" and as indicated on the drawings, for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 2. Field boltjoists to supporting Columns which are not frarned in at least two directions with structural steel members and at other locations indicated on the drawings. F. Touch-up painting: after joist Installation, paint field bolt heads and huts, arid welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting. G. Supplemental reinforcing: reinforcing of top and bottom chords of joists for loads which are not applied at joist panel points shall be as shown on the drawings and will be provided under specitication section 05120 "Structural Steel". 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Qualification of field welding: qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code," AWS DIA, 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage testing agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections. END OF SECTION 05210 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK 1.1 SUMMARY A. Roof deck. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Raceway Units: UL labeled. B. FIVIG Listing: Steel roof deck. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: A8TM A 611, grade as required to comply with QIDI specifications. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTIM A 36. C. Shear Connectors: Strap type, ASTIA A 570, Grade D, Hot - rolled carbon steel. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTIM A 526, Commercial quality, galvanized. E. Paint: Manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to rnetal surfaces that have been chernically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed cell, synthetic rubber. 1.4 FABRICATION A. General: Form Deck units in length to span three or more supports, with flush telescoped, or nested 2 -inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated on the structural drawings. B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck." C. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for opening between decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045 -inch min. (18 gauge) sheet steel. Form to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. D. Open bearn composite Units: Fabricate deck units with integral embossing or raised pattern to furnish mechanical bond with concrete slabs. Fabricate open beam deck units with fluted section having interlocking side laps of metal thickness, depth and width as shown. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. F. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. G. Fastening Deck Units: I - Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 1/4" diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength spaced not more than 12" on center with a minimurn of two welds per unit at each support. Tack weld or use self tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws at 4'4' on center for fastening end closures. 2. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 6/8 -inch -diameter puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12 inches at every support, and at closer spacing where indicated. In addition, secure deck to each supporting mernber in ribs where side lop occur. 3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance arid quality of welds, arid methods used in correcting welding Work. a. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer. 4. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches o.c. and at closer spacing where indicated, using self -tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws, unless otherwise noted. H. Cutting and Fitting' Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. I. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide Additional metal reinforcements and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support ofother wokshown. J. Closure Strips: Provide metal Closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. 1 . Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever their use will ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K. Touch -Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds, arid rust spots on top and bottorn surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. 1 . Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop point used on adjacent surfaces. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged, END OF SECTION 05310., SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 11A SUMMARY A. Exterior and interior load-bearing wall framing. '1 .2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering design of cold -formed metal framing by Contractor. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Design Standard: AISI's "North Arnerican Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1.4 MATERIALS A. Studs for exterior walls shall be 16 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top and bottorri runners of the same gauge. B. Studs for interior walls shall be 20 gauge (unless otherwise noted . ), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top arid bottom runners of the same gauge. 0, Channels for bridgi ng of studs shall be 18 gauge, D. Furring channels on exterior walls, where shown on the Drawings, shall be I " deep, "Z" shaped and at Z -O" o,c. to allow for installation of rigid insulation. E. Furring chtinhels; for interior work shall be hat -type design 25 gauge minimum by 7/8" high. F. -Screws for installation of the various systems shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer, sized as required. G. Materials and Finishes: I - For 18_gage and lighter units, fabricate metal frarning cornponents of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. For 16 -gage and heavier use 50,000 psi sheet steel. 2. Provide galvanized finish on metal framing components complying with ASTIVI A 653, G-60. a. Finish of installation accessories to match that of Main framing components, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 4. Galvanizing Repair: Whore galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures ified in ASTIM A 780. sped Fl. Accessories: 1 . Bracing, Furring Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 2. Plates, Gussets, Clips: F ormed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 3. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. I. Fasteners�. 1 . Self -drilling, self -topping screws, bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM Al 23, hot -dipped galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq.ft. 2. Anchorage devices: Powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, screws and sleeves. 3. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.3. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure frocks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power driven fasteners or '16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. D. Set studs plumb, except as needed foe diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. E. Where stud systerin abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. F. Install supplennentary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiting attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud I at each jarnle of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by Welding, and space jack studs same as full_height studs of wall. Secure stud system Wall opening frarne in manner indicated. H. Franne both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joinf with components of stud system. I . Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 54 inches o.c, Weld at each intersection. J . Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and verti cal junctures) to produce flush, even, true to line joints. 1 - Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch. K. Field Painting: Touch_up damaged shop_applied protective coatings. Use compatible primer for prime - coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces. All welds shall be cleaned and coated with galvanizing repair system. L. Construct corners using a minimurfi of three studs. Double studs at wall openings, i.e. door and window jambs. M. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. N. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinfon�e to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. C. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non -load bearing framing. P. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. Q. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing� By Owner -engaged agency. END OF SECTION 05400 1.17 PLACING CONCRETE (ACI 301: 5,326) DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION V; A. Deposit concrete into file final position at the specified slurups without segregation by re -handling or flowing. Deposit concrete at a rate that concrete SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING 2.8 VALVE BOX: Precast concrete. remains plastic and flow -able into the spaces between the reinforcing bars, Do riot deposit partially hardened concrete or concrete that has been 1.1 SUMMARY 1.1 SUMMARY 2.9 VALVE COVER AND FRAME: Cast iron with provision for locking. contaminated by foreign inaterials Do riot re -temper concrete. A. This Section includes demolition and rernoval of the following: A. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass. 2.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM B. Schedule concreting that once started, remains a continuous operation until the particular section or panel has been completed. Do riot deposit fresh 1 . Selected portions of a building or structure. B. Clearing an(] grubbing obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation including grinding sturups and removing roots arid debris. A- General: Furnish low voltage systern manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground irrigation systerns. concrete on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seauis or planes of weakness within the section or panel. Provide construction 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP C. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil and disposing of excess topsoil. Provide unit of joints as specified. A, Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall D. Removing existing above- and below -grade site i in prove me rits. capacity to suit number of circuits as indicated. C. Thoroughly compact concrete by nieatis of Inechanical vibrators supervised by experienced personnel. Provide sufficie6t vibration intensity to cause become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. E. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing site utilities. B. Exterior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard weatherproofing enclosure with locking cover, complying with NEC (National Electric flow or settlement around reinforcernent, embedded items, and corners of the forms; but not long enough to cause segregation of the Mix Follow 1.3 SUBMITTALS F. Providing temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. Code). -I- ACI 309R for use of vibrators and type of vibrators. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert arid withdraw vibrators vertically at A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their 00 C. Interior control Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70. uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches operation. Identify options if proposed measures Are later determined to be inadequate, Include measures for the following: END OF SECTION 02230 D. Transformer: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts. into receding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time 1 . Dust control. 2. Noise E. Circuit Control: Each circuit Variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes, Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each Circuit. necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. control. SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK F. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24 hour and 7 to 14 -day period. D, Cold -Weather Placement: Protect concrete work froni physical damage or reduced strength that Could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.1 SUMMARY temperatures. Comply with provisions of ACI 306.1 and ACI 306R and as follows: A. Contractor Qualifications: An experienced contractor that has specialized in demolition work similar in ruaterial and extent to that indicated for this A. Preparing subgraces for slabs -on -grade, 1 . When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 -degrees Fahrenheit (4 -degrees Celsius), uniformly heat water and aggregates Project. B. Dowatering to protect excavated sulbgrades� 3.1 EXAMINATION before rnixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 -degrees Fahrenheit (1 0 -degrees Celsius) and not more than B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal A. Investigate and determine available water supply, water pressure and flow characteristics. 80 -degrees Fahrenheit (27 -degrees Celsius) at point of placement. regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Excavating and backfilling or filling for buildings and structures, including footings and foundations. 3.2 PREPARATION 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do riot place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10,6 and NFPA 241. D. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. A. Set stakes to identify proposed sprinkler locations. Obtain RAG/A's approval before excavation. materials, 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS E. Excavation: Unclassified. 3.4 INSTALLATION 3. Use only the specified non -chloride, non -corrosive accelerator. Calcium chloride or thiocyanates are not permitted. A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be F. Grading. A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code. E. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality or strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305R disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. G. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. B. Connection to MairI Connect to building dornestic piping in location approved by RAC. and as specified: B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. H. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 1 - As a miniMUrn, install tee, Valve, Union arid other fittings as needed to provide a complete connection. 1 . Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placernent to below 90 -degrees Fahrenheit (32 -degrees Celsius). 1 . Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Subbase and base course for hot -mix asphalt pavement. C. Backflow Preventer: Provide union on downstream side. Install minimum 6" above highest ground level sprinkler head. Mixing water may be chilled - or chopped ice may be used to control temperature - provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to equal total C. Owner assurnes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. J. Drainage course for cast -in-place concrete slabs -on -grade. D. Water Harnmer Arrester: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves, inside building or in valve box. amount of mixing water. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1.2 MATERIALS E. Circuit Valves: Install in valve box, arranged for easy Adjustment and removal. 2. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to 1 . If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb. Immediately notify Architect and Owner. A. Soil Materials: the Architect/Engineer. E. Storage or sale of removed iterns or materials on-site will not be permitted. 1. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups. 1. Provide union on downstream side. 1.18 Monolithic slab finishes F. Utility Service' Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect thern against damage during selective dernolition operations. 2. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTIM D 2487 soil classification groups. 2. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces. 1 . Maintain fre-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 3. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. F. Piping: Lay pipe on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 1 . After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do riot work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or neat 1.6 WARRANTY 4. Subbase and Base Course: Natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand. 1 ' For circuit piping, slope to drain valve at least !�" in 10'of run shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with 2. At wall penetrations, pack the opening around pipe with non -shrink grout. At exterior face, leave a perimeter slot approximately V�` wido Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Cut down high spots and fill low materials so as not to void existing warranties. 5� Engineered Fill: Natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand. by deep. spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, re -float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1.7 REPAIR MATERIALS 6. Bedding Course: Natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, arid natural or crushed sand. Fill this slot with backer rod and an acceptable elastomeric sealant. Repair below grade waterproofing disturbed by this work and make B. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view. A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 7. Drainage Course: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel. penetration 1 . After floating, begin first trowel -finish operation using a trowel of the Contractor's choice. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing 1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the 8. Filter Material: Natural or Crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand. watertight. sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture arid fullest extent possible. 9. Sand: Natural or manufactured. 3. Inst . all PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 40 degrees F. (4 degrees C) before testing, Unless otherwise recommended appearance, Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. 10. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture. by C. Slip-Re5istant Broom Finish: Apply a slip -resistant broorn finish to exterior concrete platforms, slabs, walks, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as 1.8 EXAMINATION B. Geotextiles: Subsurface drainage and separation geoteXtile. manufacturer. indicated. A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected Arid capped. C. Controlled low -strength material. G. Sprinkler Heads: Flush circuit lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is complete 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristie broom perpendicular to main traffic route. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required, D. Warning Tape: Polyethylene film. 1 � Install lawn heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect/Engineer before application. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. 1.3 EXCAVATION 1.19 CURING AND PROTECTION (ACI 301: 5,3.6) (ACI 302.1 R: 9) (ACI 308.1) D. When unanticipated Mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure A. Explosives: Not permitted. 2. Install shrubbery heads at heights indicated. A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures - and maintain with mirrmal moisture loss at a the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. B. Disposal of Surplus arid Waste Materials: Off Owner's property. 3. Locate part -circle to maintain a minimum distance of 4" from walls arid 2" frorn other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. relatively constant temperature - for the period of time necessary for early hydration of the cement and the proper hardening of the concrete. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or 1.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL B. Cure exposed surfaces of concrete directly after finishing operations. Accomplish curing by one of the following approved methods. unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective derriolition operations. A. Testing: Perform hydrostatic testing of piping and vaIves before backfilling trenches. Piping may be tested it) sections to expedite work. 1 . Water curing consisting of pending, fogging, or absorptive mat. 1.9 UTILITY SERVICES A. Geotechnical Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above the operating pressure Without exceeding 2. Sheet materials consisting of placing an approved waterproof cover on the exposed surfaces. Provide sheet materials meeting the requirements of A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. pressure rating of ASTM C- 171. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide END OF SECTION 02300 piping system rtiaterials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must 3. Curing Compounds. temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. be repaired. C. Cure concrete continuously for a minimum duration of seven days when the ambient temperature exceeds 50 -degrees Fahrenheit. Do not permit I . Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner it shutdown of service is required during changeover. SECTION 02741 - ASPHALT PAVING 2. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. concrete to dry out prernaturely. Reapply water as required to maintain a wet mat or sheet. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 1.20 CLEANING C. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people arid damage to Adjacent buildings and 1.1 SUMMARY A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. A. General: facilities to reinain. A. Provide bituminous paving work and lines painting complete, in place for drives and parking areas, as shown on the drawings and specified B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. 1 . Upon completion of the Work, remove: D. Temporary Partitions' Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes herein. C. Carefully adjust lawn sprinklers so they will be flush with, or riot rhore than 1/2 inch (13 trim) above, finish grade after completion of landscape a. Debris resulting from the Work of this Section. and noise. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE work. b. Excess materials, tools, and equipment. . E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or A. Qualifications of Work force: Z Leave the Site in a clean and neat condition acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Provide at least one person trained and experienced in the skills required, familiar with the design and application of work described for D. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves. END OF SECTION 03300 1.11 POLLUTION CONTROLS this section, F. Dust ControI7 Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust arid dirt. Comply with governing and present during progress of the work. ENO OF SECTION 02810 environmental -protection regulations. 2. For finishing of bituminous surfaces, and operation of the required equipment, use personnel trained and experienced in the skills DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. required, G. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. I DIVISION 37 CONCRETE SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Cleaning: Clean Adjacent structures and improvernents of dust� dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to 13 PRODU CT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and 1.1 A. SUMMARY Masonry Constr uction: SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK condition existing before selective demolition operations began. materials of 1.01 Summary , 1 . Single-wythe masonry. 1.12 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION all other trades. A. Section Includes: 2. Composite masonry. A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction And as indicated. Use methods required to B. Replacements: In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the AIE, at no additional cost to the 1. Formwork, complete with required shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Cavity walls. complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations. Owner. . 2. Concrete reinforcing, complete with required supports, spacers and related accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS 3. Cast -in-place concrete, including finishing and curing. 1.02 REFERENCES B. Net -Area Compressive Strengths (rm) of Structural Unit Masonry: As indicated. or adjoining construction. A. Federal Specifications and Standards, A -A -2886A Paint, Traffic, Solvent Based (supersede FS TT -P -85E and FS TT -P-1 15F, Type 1) A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): C. Determine net -area compressive strength (fm) of masonry by unit -strength method. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASH-ro), AASHTO M248 Ready -Mixed White, Blue and Yellow Traffic B. ASTM International: PART2- PRODUCTS B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and Paints C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 21 MATERIALS other building facilities during selective demolition operations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.0 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMUs): C, Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, A. Product Data: 1. Units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after and warning 1. General -Submit Product Data for proprietary materials and items, including - but not limited to - the following: 2. Concrete Masonry Units: Normal weight. selective demolition operations are complete. lights as.required. a. Reinforcemerit and Forming Accessories. 3. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: Normal -weight units with finish indicated on drawings. 1.13 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS b. Admixtures. B. Brick: Face brick as indicated on drawings. A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. "Cutting A. Patch, repair or replace all now and existing bituminous paving, concrete walkways, and curbing, damaged by the operations of the work for C. Aggregate Sizes and Usage (for each class of concrete). C. D. Reinforcing Steel: Uncoated steel bars. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: B. C. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section and Patching." Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. bituminous d. Curing Compounds. 1. Interior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 1, Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an Approved Masonry patching material applied according to paving. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit concrete mix design for each type of concrete. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Protect adjacent work from splashing of paved materials. E. Ties and Anchors: Galvanized steel. Mill galvanized in interior walls. D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching C. Protect paving against traffic until surface has properly cured, 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: I . Corrugated Metal ties. and refinishing. D� Provide temporary barriers, warning lights and other protection as necessary. Remove when no longer required. 1 . Unless specified otherwise in this Section, furnish and install cast -in-place concrete per: 2. Individual wire ties. E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch And repair floor and wall surfaces in the E. Work on public property shall conform to all applicable ordinances and highway department regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits a. ACI 301: Passages frorn ACI 301 cited in this Section are hereby incorporated into the requirements of this Section. Where differences occur 3. Adjustable anchors for corinecting to structure. new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new and between the requirements of ACI 301 and this Section, the latter shall govern. 4. Partition top Anchors. F materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. inspections. 1.7 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 2. Evaluation and Acceptance Criteria: Evaluation arid acceptance ofthe Work of this Section will be per the provisions ofACI 117 and ACI 301. 5. Rigid Anchors. 6. Stone Anchors: Stainless steel. 1.14 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Before placing subbase material on paved areas, inspect subgrade and perform necessary excavating, filling, rolling and Compacting to 1.05 CEMENT (ACI 301: 4.2.1.1) A. Cement: Conform to ASTM C-1 50, Type 1. 7. Adjustable Masoury-Veneor Anchors: slip -in and seismic, A. General: Promptly dispose of dernolished materials. Do riot allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. obtain a true, 1. Use one brand and type of cement throughout the Project. F. Embedded Flashing: B. Burning: Do riot burn demolished materials. even firm surface. Fill and compact traces of dented or depressed areas. Remove boulders or ledge rock to depth of 8 inches below B. Aggregates: 1 . All Flashing: Copper. 2. Partially Exposed Flashing: Copper. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of thew END OF SECTION 01732 subgrade. 1 Fine: Sand aggregate conforming to ASTM C-33, consisting of clean, sharp uncoated grains of strong material. 3. Concealed (Flexible) Flashing: elastomeric, thermoplastic or EPDM. B. After preparation of subgrade as specified in Section 02200, thoroughly scarify and sprinkle the area to be paved, compact by rolling to a 2. Coarse: Gravel or crushed stone conforming to ASTIA C-33, consisting of clean, sharp uncoated grains of strong material. In general, provide a. Used with copper. SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES sthooth, hard, coarse aggregates with the following maximum sizes: 4. Single -Wythe CMU Flashing System: High-density polyethylene cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers. 1.1 SUMMARY even surface of 95% compaction. Finish to the required grades, with due allowance for the thickness of base course and finished surfacing A. No larger than one fifth of the narrowest dimehsion between the sides of the forms in which concrete is to be placed, and G. Weep/Vent Holes: round plastic tubing. A. Inspection procedures, to be placed. b. No larger than three quarters of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. H. Cavity drainage material. B, Warranties. 1.8 BASE 3. Slightly larger aggregate may be used where it is apparent that placing can be accomplished without hazard to the finish. 1. Reinforcing bar positioners. C. Final cleaning. A. Base thickness as shown on the drawings, minimum 6" modified aggregate base course. 4. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be between eight and 18 percent for large top size aggregates J. Masonry -Cell Insulation: Loose -granular perlite or molded -polystyrene units. 1.9 BASE BINDER COURSE (11 112 inch) or between eight and 22 percent for smaller top size aggregates (1 inch or 3/4 inch) retained on each sieve below the top size and K. Cavity -Wall Insulation: Extruded -polystyrene board. A. Substantial Completion: Before inspection by Architect: A. Base course thickness as detailed on the drawings, minimum 31/2' bituminous binder course. above the No. 100. D. Water: Potable and clean, free from oils, acids, organic materials, or other deleterious substances. L, Mortar: Natural color. 1. List of incomplete items (punch list) prepared. 2. Owner advised of insurance changeover. 1.10 WEARING COURSE " I 1.06 ADMIXTURES (ACI 301: 42.1.4) t(ACI 302AR: 5.6)] PART3- 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION, GENERAL 3. Warranties submitted, A. Wearing course thickness as shown on the drawings, minimum 1% bituminous wearing course. B. Provide a smooth, true and even finish, free of low spots or humps. Drain all areas to establish drainage points. A. General: Use of concrete admixtures shall have prior approval of the ArchitectiEngineer and shall be used 10 strict conformance with the Admixture A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with rriotor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units 4. Releases, occupancy permits, And operating certificates obtained. G. Sealant: Manufacturer's Instructions and recommendations. to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed, 5. Project Record Documents submitted. B. Water Reducing Admixtures: All concrete shall contain a high -range Water -reducing Admixture / superplasticizer, a mid-range water reducing admixture, B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit rnasonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 6. Spare parts and extra materials delivered. 1.11 JOINT SEAL COAT (JOINT BETWEEN ASPHALT & CONCRETE) or water -reducing admixture. Water reducing admixtures shall contain no more chloride ions ttiari are present in municipal drinking water. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to T Final Changeover of locks performed. A. Apply class BM -1 asphalt after completion of bituminous paving to seal joint. 1 . High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture / Superplasticizer: absorb water so tliey are damp but not wet at time of laying. 8. Startup testing completed. B. Minimum application width is 12 inches. a. Conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type F or G: D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530. I/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with tho following: 9. Test1adjust/balance records submitted. 1.12 LINE PAINTING 1) EUCON 37 or 537 by EUCO. 1 . For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more 10, Temporary facilities mrioved. A. 15 -Minute Dry Pavement Marking Paint; this 15 -Minute dry white, blue and yellow pavement marking paint shall be Sherwin Williams 2) Rheobuild 1000 by DeGussa Admixtures. than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch rnaximurn. 11. Owner advised of utility Changeover. "Promar Alkyd Fast 3) Sikament 300 by Sika. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 12. Final cleaning performed. Dry Zone Marking" or approved equal. b. Use "flowing" concrete containing the specified high -range water -reducing admixture where: feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 13. Touchup performed. 1.18 INSPECTION 1) Conditions make consolidation difficult. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 14. Turnover assessment survey submitted. A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Correct Conditions detrimental to proper and timely 2) Reinforcement is congested. A, Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, B. Final Completion: Before final inspection by Architect: completion of the 2. Other concrete with a mter/cement ratio between 0.45 arid 0.50, shall contain either a high -range water -reducing admixture/superplasticizer inovement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 1 . Final A pplication for Payment submitted. work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. (specified above) - or a mid-range water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTIVI C-494 / C -494M, Type A: B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do riot use units with less than nominal 4 -inch . 2. List of incomplete items (punch list) endorsed by Architect as completed. B� Receipt Of Materials: a. EUGON MR by EUCO, b. Sikament HP by Sika. horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 3. Evidence of continuing insurance coverage submitted. 1. Do riot accept materials unless it is covered with tarpaulins until unloaded, unless it has a temperature of at least 280 deg. F. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 4. Final pest -control inspection report and warranty submitted. 5. Owner's personnel instructed in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems. 2. Do not place bituminous Materials when the atmospheric temperature is below 50 deg. F., nor during fog, rain, or other unsuitable 3. Remaining concrete shall contain the specified water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type A: D. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, fintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. C. Warrant ies' Submitted within 16 days for areas of partial occupancy. conditions. a. EUCON WR -75 or WR -91 by EUCO. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING I 1 . Organized and bound in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, with paper dividers. Binder front and spine identified with title, C. Rolling: b, Plastocrete 160 by Sika. F. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: Project name, and narne of Contractor. I . After the material has been. spread to the proper depth, roll with the specified equipment Until the surface is hard, smooth unyielding, and C. Non -Corrosive, Non -Chloride Accelerator: Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50 -degrees Fahrenheit shall contain a non -corrosive, - I . With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. D. Final Cleaning: Each surface or unit cleaned to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program, true to the non-Ghloride accelerator conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type C or E, and containing no more Chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 1 . Clean ducts, blowers, arid coils for units operated without filters during construction. thickness and elevations shown on the drawings. water. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. END OF SECTION 01770 2. Roll the surface until no roller marks are visible. 1 . AcceIguard 80 by EUCO. 4. With entire units, includ . ing areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 3. Finished surfaces shall be free from depressions, and shall show no variation from the designed grades greater than 1/8" over any 6,4, 2. Rapid -1 by Sika. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS length. D. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Conforming to ASTIVI C-494 / C -494M, Type D and containing no more chloride ions than Are present in H. Got joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.14 LINE PAINTING municipal drinking water. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Record Drawings and Record Specifications. A. Lines to be 3 inches wide. 1. EUCON Retafder-75 by EUCO. A. General: Install in mortar with a ruinlinum cover of 518 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a mininium of 6 inches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Utilize line painting equipment specifically for that purpose, subject to the inspection and Approval of the RAC/A. 2. Plastiment by Sika. E. Air Entraining Admixture: Concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an air -entraining admixture approved by the ArchitectiEngineer and B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. A. Record Drawings: C. Striping: Thoroughly Clean areas where striping will be applied. conforming to ASTM C-260. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. , 1. 3 sets of marked -up Record Prints. D. Painting: Apply the striping paint in strict accordance With the Manufacture's published recommendations, using all means necessary to F. Prohibited Admixtures: When used at the Admixture Manufacturer's recommended dosage, thiocyanate ions contributed by the proposed admixture D. 3.5 Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS B. 1.3 Record Specifications' 3 copies. PRODUCTS protect the shall not exceed 0.30 percent by weight of cement. Proposed admixture shall riot cause an increase in shrinkage when tested per ASTIA C-494 A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: A. Record Prints, Blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings, marked to show actual installation. painted surfaces until dry. C -494M and ASTM C-157. 1.07 CONCRETE MIX 1 . Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry And structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2, Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. END OF SECTION 02500 A. Proportion concrete to be homogeneous, readily place -able, uniformly workable, conforming to required setting time, and designed to attain the specified 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. END OF SECTION 01781 properties of strength, slump, entrained air, and water/cement ratio. 3.6 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS SECTION 02810 - UNDERGROUND IMIGATION SYSTEM B. Establish, based on mix designs from independent testing laboratories, minimum standards of proportions for all types of concrete to be Used on the B. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, Intels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and I SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Project prior to concreting operations. where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, Ind where indicated. 1.1 SUMMARY C. If, at any time, tests indicate failure to meet strength, slump, or water/cement ratio, change the standard proportions to meet the requirements. C. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Valves, piping, sprinklers, specialties, accessories, controls, and wiring for lawn and shrubbery irrigation systems. D. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods per ACI 301. Minimum 1 . Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place A. Emergency operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS requirements for each class of concrete are listed in the Concrete Schedule (below). through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with Mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended A. Location of Sprinklers and Devices- Design location approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions E. Concrete rhay be inixed to a moderate slump to enable the proper placing and finishing of slab areas but added care shall be taken in the placing. by flashing manufacturer. such as signs F. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall arrange for an approved independent testing laboratory to prepare the mix designs for the 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a Minimum of 6 inches into rnasonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends 1.2 PRODUCTS and light standards, classes of concrete scheduled to be used. and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. A. Manuals: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, 3 copies. B. Minimum Water coverage: Not loss than' I , Design concrete mixes per ACI 211.1 to produce the strength for each class of concrete required on the Drawings or specified herein. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere 1. Turf Areas: 95 percent 2. Design the Concrete so that the concrete materials do not segregate, flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. B. Emergency Manuals: Types of emergencies, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. 2. Other Planting Areas: 85 percent. G. Laboratory Test Reports� For concrete materials and mix designs, test as follows: D� Install weep lioles in head joints exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1 . Mix designs shall beaccompanied by complete standard deviation analysis or trial mixture test reports. If trial batches are used, the mix designs 1 . Use open head joints to form weep holes, C. Operation Manuals: System and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, wiring diagrarns, control diagrams and sequence of operation, and piped C. I Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings except where shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve an average compressive strength that is i200 PSI higher than the strength 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. system diagrams. indicated specified. 3. Cover cavity bide of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose -fill insulation. D. Product Maintenance Manuals: Source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties And otherwise. 1. Pressure Piping: 160 psig. a. increase this over -design to 1400 PSI when concrete strengths over 5000 PSI are used. 2z Prepare trial mixes and cylinders in sufficient time to demonstrate the reliability of the mix designs prior to the placing of any concrete. 3.7 CLEANING , bonds. 2. Circuit and Drain Piping: 100 psig. . . 1.08 STRENGTH (ACI 301: 4.2.2.8.C) A. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: E. System and Equipment Maintenance Marivals� Source inforniati on, niandfacturers' maintenance docomentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance 1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compressive strength at 28 days: 1 40 1 00 PSI. 1. Test Cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. . and service schedules, spare parts list arid source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds. A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water for prevention of backflow and back -siphonage. 'I �09 AIR -ENTRAINMENT (ACI 301: 4.224) (ACI 302.1k: 5.6.1) 2L Protect adjacent surfaces fron! contact with cleaner. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Add five percent plus or minus 1.0 percent air -entrainment to concrete. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before Applying cleaners; retrieve cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. END OF SECTION 01182 A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Verify that irrigation system piping may be installed in 1.10 SLUMP (ACI 301:4 22.2) 4, Clean brick by bUcket-and-brush hand -cleaning method described in BIATechnical Notes 20. compliance A. Upon arrival at the Site, maximum sluirip for conventional concrete shall be 4 inches. 5. Clean Masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. with original design and referenced standards. B. In concrete containing the high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) conforming to ASTM C-1017 / C -1017M - or when a Type F or G 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMATEK8 -2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. high -range water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -404M is permitted - provide concrete with: 18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. A water slump of between 2 and 3 inches before the admixture is added. This initial slump is increased to between 3 and 4 inches for concrete C. Remove all excess masonry wa . ste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property, A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: receiving a dry -shake hardener or for lightweight concrete. 2. A maximum slump of 9 inches at the point of delivery after the admixture is added. 19 INSTALLATION 1. Muellennist Irrigation Go. C. Concrete containing the mid-range water -reducing admixture shall have a maximum slurrip of 5 to 6 inches. A. B� Match existing masonry coursing, bonding, color, and texture. Bond Pattern: As indicated. 2. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Co. 1.11 REINFORCING STEEL (ACI 301: 3) C. Cavity face of backup wythe parged. 3. The TORO Co., Irrigation Div. A, Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A-615 / 615M, 60 K81 yield grade, deformed billet steel bars. Provide the following finish: D. Clean masonry waste recycled as fill material. 4. Weather -Matic Div./Teisco Industries 1 . Plain. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 22 PRESSURE PIPE: Comply with the following: B. Include spacers, chairs, bolstefs, ties, and other devices necessary for proper placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place. A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged, with payment by Owner, A. 3" and larger, galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40. Hooking of wire mesh will be grounds for rejection of the installation. END OF SECTION 04810 B. Under 3", galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40. 1,12 CURING COMPOUNDS C. Under 3", seamess copper water tube, ASTM B 88, Typo "K", drawn temper, A. Liquid Membrane -Forming Non -Wax Curing Compound: Dissipating resin type conforming to ASTM C-309, Types S- I and D-1, Class B. Minimum 2.3 PIPE FITTINGS: Comply with following-. coverage shall be 300 square feet per gallon per coat. Subject to compatibility with selected fluid -applied flooring material, provide products by one of A. For PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D 2466 socket fittings with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. the following: B. For galvanized steel pipe, AN81 B 16.3 galvanized malleable -iron screwed fittings. 1 . KUREZ DR VOX by EUCO� C. For copper tubing, ANSI B 16,22 Wrought copper or cast brass, recessed solderjoint type fittings. 2. (Or approved equal). 2.4 CIRCUIT PIPE (DOWNSTREAM FROM CIRCUIT VALVES) Comply with the following: 1.13 BONDING AGENTS A. PVC plastic pipe, ASTIVI D 1785, Schedule 40. A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881/C 881 M, Type 11. I . Available Products: Subject to Compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the B. Galvanized steel pipe, ASIM A 53, Schedule 40. following: C. Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B 88, Type "IM", drawn temper. a. ChemCo Systems; CCS Bonder Liquid, LWL or SWIL. 2.5 VALVES: Manufacturer's standard, and as follows: b, Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco #352 Epoxy System Euco #452 Epoxy System or Euco #620 Epoxy System. A. Provide cast bronze bodies, unless otherwise indicated. C, Sika Corporation; Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod LPL Silkadur 35, HI -Mod LV Or Sikaduir 35, Hi -Mod LV LPL. B. Manual Circuit Valves: Globe Valves d. Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex; Epogel or Epogrip. C. Key Operated Valves: Manual valves, fitted for key operation. 2. Thin Film Open Time: Not less than two hours. 1. Furnish 2 valve keys, three feet long with tee handles and key end to fit valves. 1.14 GENERAL 0. Automatic Circuit Valves: Globe valves operated by low-power solenoid, normally closed, manual flow adjustment. A. Excessive honeycombing or the presence of embedded debris will be grounds for rejection of the installation. Notify the ArchitectlEngineer upon E. Automatic brain Valves: Designated to open for drainage when line pressure drops below 3 psi. discovery. 0) 2.6 BACKIFLOW PREVENTERS: Manufacturer's standard, to suit sprinkler systern. B. During hot weather, conform to AC I 305R. 0) 2.7 SPRINKLER HEADS: Manufacturer's standard unit designed to provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray at available water pressure, C. During cold weather, conform to ACI 306.1 and ACI 306R. > as follows: D. Adding water to the concrete mix, while at the Site, is prohibited. Only make field adjustments to the design mix using Ore -approved admixture 0 A. Flush surface: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. materials. 1.15 FORMWORK(AC1301:2) B. Blubber: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. A. Obtain the Architert/Engineer's review for use of earth forms. When using earth forms, hand -trim sides and bottorns, and remove loose dirt prior to (D C. Shrubbery: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. placing concrete. D. Pop -Up Spray: Fixed pattern with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction spring. 1.16 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT E. Pop-up Rotary Sproy� Gear drive, full circle and adjustable part circle type. A. Handle and place reinforcing steel per the recommendations ofACI 318 unless otherwise indicated by the requirements of this Section. F. Pop -Up Rotary Impact: Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated. B. Before placing concrete, verify that reinforcing steel is free from rust arid scale, or other detrimental materials that could destroy or reduce the bond G. Above -Ground Rotary InlpaCt: Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated. placement. -4 HIM IN DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Structural and architecturally exposed structural -steel framing, B. Prefabricated building columns. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricator to select or complete simple shear connections to withstand design loads. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd. B. Quality Standard: AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" arid "Specification for Structural Steel Buildirigs--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Mockups for each form of architecturally exposed structural steel. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Structural -Steel Shapes: W -shapes, channels, angles, M -shapes, S -shapes, plate and bar, cold-forined hollow structural sections arid steel pipe. B. Castings: High-strength steel. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: High strength. D. Anchor Rods: Headed rods, nuts, plate washers, and washers. E. Connectors: Shear connectors, threaded rods, eye bolts and nuts and sleeve nuts. F. Primer: Zinc oxide. G. Grout: Nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Connections: Slip -critical high-strength bolts and welded connections. B, Surface Preparation' SSPC-SP 2. C. Galvanizing: Hot dip. 1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Field Connections: Slip -critical high-strength lbo6 and welded connections. 1.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. END OF SECTION 05120 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Open -web K -series steel joists for roof framing. B. K -series steel joist substitutes for roof framing. C. LH -series long -span steel joists for roof framing. D. DLH-series deep long -span steel joists for roof frarning. E. Joist girders for roof framing. F. Special joists for roof framing, designed by manufacturer, G. Joist accessories, including permanent bridging. 1.2 MATERIALS A. Bolts: High-strength carbon steel. 1 . Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating. B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15. C. Open -Web K -Series Steel Joists: With top -chord extensions. D. Long -Span Steel Joists: I � End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel. E. Joist Girders: 1 . End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel, 1.3 ERECTION A. Place And secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop drawings, arid as herein specified. B. Placing joists: do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place arid secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. C. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction, D. Bridging: install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at beams, masonry walls, and/or concrete walls. Coordinate bridging with mechanical duct locations. Where new framing interrupts existing bridging, provide new bridging to maintain continuity. E. Fastening Joists: 1 . Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications" and as indicated on the drawings, for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 2. Field boltjoists to supporting Columns which are not frarned in at least two directions with structural steel members and at other locations indicated on the drawings. F. Touch-up painting: after joist Installation, paint field bolt heads and huts, arid welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting. G. Supplemental reinforcing: reinforcing of top and bottom chords of joists for loads which are not applied at joist panel points shall be as shown on the drawings and will be provided under specitication section 05120 "Structural Steel". 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Qualification of field welding: qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding Society "Structural Welding Code," AWS DIA, 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage testing agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections. END OF SECTION 05210 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK 1.1 SUMMARY A. Roof deck. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Raceway Units: UL labeled. B. FIVIG Listing: Steel roof deck. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: A8TM A 611, grade as required to comply with QIDI specifications. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTIM A 36. C. Shear Connectors: Strap type, ASTIA A 570, Grade D, Hot - rolled carbon steel. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTIM A 526, Commercial quality, galvanized. E. Paint: Manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to rnetal surfaces that have been chernically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed cell, synthetic rubber. 1.4 FABRICATION A. General: Form Deck units in length to span three or more supports, with flush telescoped, or nested 2 -inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated on the structural drawings. B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck." C. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for opening between decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045 -inch min. (18 gauge) sheet steel. Form to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. D. Open bearn composite Units: Fabricate deck units with integral embossing or raised pattern to furnish mechanical bond with concrete slabs. Fabricate open beam deck units with fluted section having interlocking side laps of metal thickness, depth and width as shown. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. F. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. G. Fastening Deck Units: I - Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 1/4" diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength spaced not more than 12" on center with a minimurn of two welds per unit at each support. Tack weld or use self tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws at 4'4' on center for fastening end closures. 2. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 6/8 -inch -diameter puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12 inches at every support, and at closer spacing where indicated. In addition, secure deck to each supporting mernber in ribs where side lop occur. 3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance arid quality of welds, arid methods used in correcting welding Work. a. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer. 4. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches o.c. and at closer spacing where indicated, using self -tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws, unless otherwise noted. H. Cutting and Fitting' Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. I. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide Additional metal reinforcements and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support ofother wokshown. J. Closure Strips: Provide metal Closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. 1 . Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever their use will ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K. Touch -Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds, arid rust spots on top and bottorn surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. 1 . Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop point used on adjacent surfaces. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged, END OF SECTION 05310., SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 11A SUMMARY A. Exterior and interior load-bearing wall framing. '1 .2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering design of cold -formed metal framing by Contractor. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Design Standard: AISI's "North Arnerican Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1.4 MATERIALS A. Studs for exterior walls shall be 16 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top and bottorri runners of the same gauge. B. Studs for interior walls shall be 20 gauge (unless otherwise noted . ), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top arid bottom runners of the same gauge. 0, Channels for bridgi ng of studs shall be 18 gauge, D. Furring channels on exterior walls, where shown on the Drawings, shall be I " deep, "Z" shaped and at Z -O" o,c. to allow for installation of rigid insulation. E. Furring chtinhels; for interior work shall be hat -type design 25 gauge minimum by 7/8" high. F. -Screws for installation of the various systems shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer, sized as required. G. Materials and Finishes: I - For 18_gage and lighter units, fabricate metal frarning cornponents of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. For 16 -gage and heavier use 50,000 psi sheet steel. 2. Provide galvanized finish on metal framing components complying with ASTIVI A 653, G-60. a. Finish of installation accessories to match that of Main framing components, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 4. Galvanizing Repair: Whore galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures ified in ASTIM A 780. sped Fl. Accessories: 1 . Bracing, Furring Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 2. Plates, Gussets, Clips: F ormed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 3. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. I. Fasteners�. 1 . Self -drilling, self -topping screws, bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM Al 23, hot -dipped galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq.ft. 2. Anchorage devices: Powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, screws and sleeves. 3. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.3. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure frocks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power driven fasteners or '16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. D. Set studs plumb, except as needed foe diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. E. Where stud systerin abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. F. Install supplennentary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiting attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud I at each jarnle of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by Welding, and space jack studs same as full_height studs of wall. Secure stud system Wall opening frarne in manner indicated. H. Franne both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joinf with components of stud system. I . Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 54 inches o.c, Weld at each intersection. J . Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and verti cal junctures) to produce flush, even, true to line joints. 1 - Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch. K. Field Painting: Touch_up damaged shop_applied protective coatings. Use compatible primer for prime - coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces. All welds shall be cleaned and coated with galvanizing repair system. L. Construct corners using a minimurfi of three studs. Double studs at wall openings, i.e. door and window jambs. M. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. N. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinfon�e to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. C. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non -load bearing framing. P. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. Q. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing� By Owner -engaged agency. END OF SECTION 05400 REVISIONS FFF I Iffil id" Cy') _J LL_ ci cr_ 0 LL_ C0 LU _J UJ Il-_ 2-1 U.J 0 UJ 0 LO (y) LU Or_ o I-- 00 E 0 [L Z U) I-_ Z LLJ Z 2 0 =3 0 (-) ci) Q C) LLJ U) LLJ 0 0 0 U_ 0 ILLI Lli L11 Cr_1 0 37- F" =3 uJ V; U REVISIONS FFF I Iffil id" Cy') _J LL_ ci cr_ 0 LL_ C0 LU _J UJ Il-_ 2-1 U.J 0 UJ 0 LO (y) LU Or_ o I-- 00 E 0 [L Z U) I-_ Z LLJ Z 2 0 =3 0 (-) ci) Q C) LLJ U) LLJ 0 0 0 U_ 0 ILLI Lli L11 Cr_1 0 37- F" =3 uJ -M -I- to (D t-- 00 0) b Id D I I � I ; � I I I � , H ; I � I J � I � I ; ! : , I I ii I � i ! 11 � 1� I ,I I , I � I � I I , , I I ! - ­ _LL-___!-__ ­.­ __ _____ I - - _____ - --l-JI.- LL­J-.___ __ I - L __ - __ I !� , I' _,__'_ji___­11' ,� :i ! I i , , " ­­ ____ �- - - - I .. I I ­ _ , 1_1,.J.­-.,­,,.Li1! ll-_ - _L_LL,lJui11h1JJ.,,..LL �jL � �, i ., �, ___: �j_.L____JLJ � � _.L__11.1�_______ ---. .. I , I,---- -1--i�-.,.�-�--.-".-�---.--�-.----------�."--..,----.--I,--- _� . . I - -_ _____ SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS I - I I I I � I � I .---------- _____ _________ -_ DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE CONTROL 1.1 SUMMARY -_ -- - SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION A. Miscellaneous metal framing and supports. 1.1 SUMMARY B. Loose metal plates arid shapes. A. Appli6ations: C. Miscellaneous fabricated metal items, 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 , Perimeter insulation under slabs -on -grade. Exterior storefront systems. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "RAC/Aural Sheet 2. Concealed building insulation. A, Materials: Steel plates, shapes, and bars, Steel tubing and Steel pipe, Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where 3. Exposed building insulation. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and Weatherproof. 4. Loose -fill building insulation. 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors, mechanical and electrical equipment and applications where 1.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 5, Vapor retarders. frarning and supports are not specified in other Sections. A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that Might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes, 6, Sound attenuation insulation. 2. Steel framing and supports (outriggers) for window -washing equipment. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 3. Galvanize where indicated. A. Plenum Rating: Glass -fiber insulation rated for resistance against erosion and mold growth per UL 181. 4. Prime with zinc -rich primer where indicated. 1.3 MATERIALS C. Loose steel lintels, primed with zinc -rich primer at exterior walls. & Insulation: D. Shelf angles, primed with zinc -rich primer. units. 1 . Extruded -Polystyrene Board: Type IV, 1,60 lb/cu. ft.. E. Loose bearing and leveling plates, primed with zinc -rich primer. 1.03 2. Molded -Polystyrene Board: Type 1, 0.90 lb/cu. ft.. F. Steel Weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for casting into concrete, 2. Species: Select white birch, 3. Foil -Faced Polyisocyanurate Board: Type 1, Class 1 or 2. G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Steel angle corner guards, steel edgings and loading-dQck edge angles. 4. Unfaced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board: 1.0 lb/cu. ft.. 1. Prime exterior locations with zinc -rich primer. MANUFACTURERS 5. Foil -Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board: 1.0 lb/cu. ft.. H. Metal Bollards: Schedule 40 steel pipe, Steel shapes, as indicated. A. 6. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Board: 2.25 lb/cu. ft.. END OF SECTION 05500 1 - - -_ - - _. ____ _. - � 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 7. Unfaced Glass-Filber Blanket: Type 1. SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND T . UBE RAILINGS 8. Faced Glass -Fiber Blanket: Type 111, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil-scrlryi-polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on 1 face. I� Besam Automated Entrance Systems with Breakaway function 9. Unfaced Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rocl�-Wool-Fiber Blanket: Type 1. 1.1 SUMMARY 1,05 10. Faced Slag-Wool-Fiber/kocl�-Wool-Fiber Blanket: Type 111, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil -scrim -kraft, fQil-scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on I face. A. Aluminum pipe and tube railings. I 8. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 11. Cellulosic -Fiber Loose Fill: Chemically treated for flame resistance. B. Steel pipe and tube railings. . �. 1.4 12. Glass -Fiber Loose Fill: Type 2 for poured application. 1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Vapor Retarders: Reinforced polyethylene. A. Fabricator to engineer arid fabricate railings to withstand design loads. 1.4 EXAMINATION 1.3 FABRICATION A. Verify that substrates arid conditions are ready to receive work of this Section, Notify Owners Representative of any existing conditions, which will adversely affect execution, Beginning ofexecution will constitute acceptance ofexisfing A. Changes in Direction of Members: By bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. conditions. B. Connections: Welded. B. Verify that work of other trades, which will be covered by insulation in complete and approved. 1.4 FINISHES 1.5 BATT AND BLANKET INSTALLATION A. Aluminum: Mill. . A. Install insulation either friction fit, using adhesive, or triechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturee's recommendations after mechanical and electrical services have been installed. B. Steel and Iron: Ungalvanized, primed with universal shop primer. B. Fit insulation tight within stud spaces, above soffits, behind facias, and tight to and behind mechanical and electric services within plane of insulation, leaving no gaps or voids. Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly around iterns B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, arid bars; ASTM A 611 penetrating insulation. Stagger and butt joints, or Cavity of a cavity wall system, LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES I C. Within metal stud or joist systems install full height and width in such manner that voids or openings do not occur. Insulation is required for full width between studs, including cavity of each stud. Do not allow insulation to obstruct vents. END OF SECTION 05521 __ � D. Cut arid trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces. Cut insulation oversize to ensure tight butt joints when installed. Cut insulation to fit around protrusions and irregularly shaped projections. Use bafts free of ripped backs or edges. Glazing as specified in Division 8 "Glazing". E. Batt Insulation with Vapor Barrier Membrane . I I I .. 7 � - _____ -_ --- - Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard pressure -glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, 1. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm in winter side of building spaces. DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS 2. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members; fasten in place at maximurn 6 inches on center or tape in place. . I � PRIMING/FINISHING 3. Tape seal butt ends; lap side flanges and ends; do not tear membrane. manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed A. Shop Priming: . I I , . I I . I . . i - --- - SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY __ __ ___ - - - __ A. Protect insulation from moisture until building is made watertight. 1 . Doors for Opaque Finish: One coat of wood primer. . END OF SECTION 07210, . -_ - - --- I . I ____ � I I . . 1.1 SUMMARY 2. Doors for Transparent Finish: Stain and first coat of finish. - ____ _____ . � I . I . . A. Wood blocking and nailers. SECTION -_ -_ 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) B. Wood furring. requirements. C. C. Plywood backing panels. 1.1 SUMMARY 1 1.2 MATERIALS . A. Exterior insulation and finish system (El FS) applied over gypsum sheathing. A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I . Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated, A. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E 1 1 9. 2. Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated, B. Fire Test: Full-scale diversified per modified ASTM E 108. 3. Application: All rough carpentry. C, Mockups for each form of construction and finish. a. Framing for raised platforms. 1.3 MATERIALS b. Concealed blocking. A. Flexible-Membrano Flashing: Cold -applied, fully self -adhering, self -healing, rubberized -asphalt. c, Framing for non -load-bearing partitions. B. Insulation Adhesive: Factory -blended portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers. d. Framing for non -load-bearing exterior walls. C. Board Insulation: Molded, rigid cellular polystyrene. e. Roof construction. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Standard impact. f. Plywood backing panels. E. Base-CQat Materials: Job -combined polymer -emulsion adhesive and portland cement dry Mix. B. Dimension Lumber Framing: F. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -based coating. 1 . Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent, G. Trim Accessories: PVC. 1 2. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade , any species, I � Type: Casing bead, Expansion joint and Parapet cap. 3. Structural Lumber: No. 2 or better grade Douglas fir or yellow -pine. H. Elastomeric Sealants: Single -component, nonsag, neutral -curing silicone. C. Plywood backing panels for telephone and electrical equipment. 1.4 FABRICATION D. Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel where exposed to weather, in ground contact, in contact with treated wood, or in A, Prefabricated Panel Framing Connections: Welded. area of high relative humidity. 1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL E. Metal Framing Anchors: A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1 . Metal: Hot -dip galvanized steel. 1.6 INSTALLATION 1.3 INSTALLATION A. Insulation: Mechanically attached to substrate. A. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- size furring at 16 inches o.c. B. Expansion Joints: END OF SECTION 06100 I 1.3 1 . Where required by EIFS manufacturer. flat -head C, . I Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated. -_ I . I SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING D. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated. I - E. Finish Coat: Applied over base coat. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Special Inspections and Testing: By Owner -engaged agency. I A. Wall sheathing. END OF SECTION 07241 1.2 MATERIALS 1 � I . I A. Wall Sheathing: I I � I .. � ,- I SECTION 07543 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING I . Paper -Surfaced Gypsum: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. PART1- GENERAL 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 1.1 SUMMARY 3. Cellulose Fiber -Reinforced Gypsum: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. A. Section Includes: 4. Extruded Polystyrene Foam: Thickness indicated. C. t. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. B. Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel where exposed to weather, in ground contact, in contact with treated 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS wood, or in area of high relative humidity. A. Energy Performance: Provide roofing systern with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testirig identical products by a qualified testing agency, 1.3 INSTALLATION B. Energy Performance' Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roofproducts. A. Gypsum Sheathing: C� Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity riot less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 1. Screw to cold -formed metal framing. 1.3 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements for locations indicated: 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE END OF SECTION 06100 A, Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by rnernbrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. C. Windlocks: Malleable iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Unless otherwise recoinmended by door manufacturer, provide imately B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for ruernbrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by mernbrane roofing manufacturer. SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK � 1 1.5 WARRANTY I . I . LCN 4040 with drop plate and shoe. A, 1. � Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or custornized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of ruernbrane roofing system that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified 1.1 SUMMARY Mounting: Parallel arm. warranty period. A. Interior standing and running trim. 3. I . Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Flush wood paneling. PART2- PRODUCTS C. Wood and plastic -laminate cabinets. 2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING D. Plastic -laminate countertops. A� Fabric -Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, scrirn reinforced, uniform, flexible, TPO sheet. E. Solid -surface countertops. F. I . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a continuous bar for holding windlocks. r a. Firestone Building Products Company, UltraPly TPO 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE b. Approved equal. E. Quality Standard: AWI, including installation. Cylinders: Specified in Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware." 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 1.3 MATERIALS . H. 3. Color: White . F. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed -grain hardwood. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS I G. Composite Wood Products: Made without urea formaldehyde. A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and corhpatible with rnernbrane roofing. H. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. I Pull Handles: 32D, 1 inch diameter, 9 inch centerfine dimension. I . Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Standing and Running Trim for Opaque Finish: J. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following flinits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1 . Grade: Custom, a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 2, Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. E. Flush Wood Paneling: 1 . Provide push plate affixed to push bar. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives7 70 g/L. 1 . Type: Plastic -laminate slat wall as indicated on drawings. K. d. Fiberglass Adhesives' 80 g/L. F. Plastic-Laininate Countertops: B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot -formed structural -quality carbon steel, welded or searriless pipe, or sufficient diameter and e. Contact Adhesive: <250 g/L. 1 � Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. I . Latch Paddle Devices: Manufacturer's standard extruded - aluminum deadlatch operating paddle. g. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 2. Grade: Custom. L. In. Non-mei-nbr@ne Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 3. Edge Treatment: As indicated. C� Provide spring balance of one or more oil -tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 91. 4. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LID 3, Grade HGS. j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. a. : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, rninimurn, of sarne color as sheet membrane, 1) Pionite C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard , water based. G. Solid -Surfacing Material (Counterlops)' Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. 1 . Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: E, Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturers standard, predrilled stainless-steel or alurninum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. . . b.r Formica Corporation I . . � . . F. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and rnetal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening mernbrane to substrate; and acceptable to membrane roofing system 2. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. manufacturer. 1.4 INSTALLATION G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. A. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-O" for plumb 2.3 ROOF INSULATION and level and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation' ASTM C 1289, Type 11, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, B. Scribe and Cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. B. R -Value: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation With minimum R-Valuo of 30 'F,fF;h / Btu. Insulation requirements may vary with local authorities and regulations. C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and C. Tapered Insulation (If shown on drawings): Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. blocking with Countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where [). � Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fa I bricate to slopes indicated. pre -finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk arid filled 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrWion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofinsulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing D. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, use full-length pieces (from system manufacturer. rinaximurn length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related mernbers. B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold -applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. Cope at returns and miter at corners. . 2.5 WALKWAYS 1.5 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not PART3- EXECUTION possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION B, Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-0posed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or A, Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is riot exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. soiled areas. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturers written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to wriforru to slopes indicated. A. Provide final protection and Maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inc . hes or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer 0 that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. minimum of 6 inches in each direction. END OF SECTION 06402 � I I . E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each laye(of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized forfastening specified board -type roofinsulation to decktype. I I . . . C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures I . Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. SECTION 06640 - PLASTIC PANELING 3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION (7, A, Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturers written instructions. PALCE I - GENERAL B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer, Stagger end laps. 1A SUMMARY C. Bonding Adheslve� Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing, Do not apply to splice area ofmembrane roofing. A. Section includes gloss -fiber reinforced Plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. D, In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane footing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. L2 ACTION SUBMITTALS E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope Of roof deck whore possible. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashing$ according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . I . Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet Membrane, A. Surface -Burning Charactefistics� As determined by testing identi�al products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified I 2, Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair searn sample areas. I testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. A. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does riot cornply with requirements. PAR'F 2 - PRODUCTS 3,3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 1 2. t PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's Written instructions, A. General: Gelcogt-finishbd, glass -fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. B, Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with Cured or uncured sheet flashing. t . Koroguard Wall Protection Sy�terers; a division of RJF International Corporation D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a Watertight seatin installation. , a, Koroseal "Korogard" Protective Wallcovering: Rigid high-irnpact Korogard substrate sheet. E. , Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.040 inch. 3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 3. Texture: Starrdard-Hair�ell; Velour Matte, Level Haircell, Smooth Nap, or Cashmere (as selected by Owner). A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Color: As noted in Finish Schedule. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. 13, Repair or remove and replace components of melinbrane roofing system where irispections indicate that they do hot comply with specified requirements. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, arid caps as needed to conceal edges. END OF SECTION 07543 , I 1 . Color: Match panels, Within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. _ -_ - -_ I I B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. I I I . � ------ - C� Sealant: Single -component, mildew -resistant, neutral -curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling SECTION 07600 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." 3. Installation methods. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 SUMMARY 3.1 PREPARATION A. This Section includes the following: A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. C. 1. Coping. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written 1.2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS recommendations. A. Coping: Provide aluminum coping similar to AP Snap -tight coping system as manufactured by RAC/Aural Products Company. The coping shall be .050", C. Lay Out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches patterns. Verification Samplesf For each finish product specified, two samples, minirnum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. smooth 5005H-34 alloy aluminum. Complete with all accessories including a I baked enamel finish. wide. 1.3 SHEET METAL FINISH 3.2 INSTALLATION A. High -Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system by coil coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. manufacturers and applicator, B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive, Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Do not lay flat. 1. Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturers standard 2 -coat, thermocured system composed of specialty formulated inhibitive primer and C. Install trim accessories with adhesive or staples. Do not fasten through panels. 1.5 A. fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidehe fluoride resin by weight; cornplying with AAMA 605.2. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner triin in a bead of sealant. storefront systems. Do not install damaged components, Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and a. Color: As indicated on the drawings. F. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. b. Resin Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fluoropolyrner coating systems containing resins produced by one of the F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant WARRANTY following manufacturers: manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry Cloths until no residue remains. A. 1) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500) END OF SECTION 06640 surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum 2, Sheet Metal Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following t I ; -6.& 11 i � - - --- --- - - SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT a. A as A ummurn Gorpor8hon; r-,CtPIU LUI,K 1-UP111y. b� Metal Era Roof Edge Systems; EconoMe _-A. i 11.0f Coping ; I\) I (D Quality Standard: AWIL c. WP Hickman; Universal Coping System. I � I � 0) 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS : ; > Exterior storefront systems. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "RAC/Aural Sheet i ! --I 1.02 Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where � 0 =)- DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and Weatherproof. ;:;: A. 1.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION (D movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that Might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes, I -2- B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and street rinetal work during construction to ensure that : r- " I I work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. : 9) 1.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH I "" 2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing IEND OF SECTION 07600 . I I __ - __ . I - - . I 1. I � 90 N � . I . . I I I � I � I I . I I I -0 . I . I WAA_-M9A9M9M50MWWRrAHWA6� . 0- i f, r I I I I 11-1 I— ­­­­� I : I I I :1!� 1 1 : r- :, r I I I I :�� I I , � 11 : : 1 I' 1, � : : , � - � I � i I I r I I : :1 I I I 1 1 1 11 I 1:� I :1 I i I I I I I I I SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof hatches 1.2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bilco Co. Type S-20 1.3MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Commercial -Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 526 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. C. Wood Nallers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water -borne preservatives for above -ground LISO, Complying with AWPA C2; not less that 1-1/2 inch thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other rion-corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide non -removable fastener heads. I E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene. F. Elastorrieric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NIS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, and A. G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non -asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application of other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 1.4ROOF HATCHES A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf per sq.ft. external loading and 20-lbf per sq.ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 9 -inch -high, integral -curb, double-wall 14 gauge construction with I-1/2 inch insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall 14 gauge cover (lid) construction with I -inch insulation core. Provide gasketing arid equip corrosion -resistant or hot -dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, interior security bars arid both interior and exterior latch handles. B. Type: Single -leaf personnel access; Bilco Type S-20 1. For Ladder Access: T -O" x 2'-6". C. Materials: Zinc -coated steel sheets with red oxide primer. 1.51NSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, roof insulation, roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure that each elernent of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses, as well as inward and outward loading pressure. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to forrTl a seal. D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter -flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. E. Operational Units' Test operate units With operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 1.6CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 . -_ - I I - I . . I - - - ____ - SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE -RESISTIVE MATERIALS - 1,1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility and adhesion testing. 12 WARRANTY Retain this Article for special warranties. Verify length of vvarranty period with manufacturers. A. Materials and Workmanship: Two years. 1 1.3 MATERIALS A. Concealed SFRM: Cementitious or sprayed -fiber type with dry density not less than 15 lb/cL1. ft.. I B. Exposed SFIRM: 1 . Cementitious Type: Dry density not less than 22 lb/cu. ft.. 2. Sprayed -Fiber Type: Dry density not less than 22 lb/cu. ft.. 3. Water-based inturnescent mastic. C. Auxiliary Fire -Resistive Materials: 1 . Substrate primers. 2. Bonding adhesive. 3. Expanded metal lath. 4� Reinforcing fabric. 5, Reinforcing mesh. 6. Sealer. 7. Topcoat. 1.4 INSTALLATION . . A. Exposed SFRM Finishes: I. Cementitious: Sprayed. 2. Sprayed Fiber: Sprayed with sealer. 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Contractor engaged. B. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. If fire -resistance ratings are not indicated on Drawings, consider inserting a schedule here. END OF SECTION 07811 1 1 SECTION 07841 - THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM, I.ISUMMARY A.Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire -resistance -rated fire walls, floors, flooriceiling assemblies. 1.2PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Provide through -penetration firestQp systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F -Rated Systems: F -ratings equaling or exceeding fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systerns: For penetrations located outside wall Cavities and outside fire -resistance -rated shaft enclosures. 3. L -Rated Systems: Where through -penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers. I 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A firm approved by FMG according to FMG 4901, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E 814 by UL, . 1AMATERIALS I A.Accessories: Permanent forming/daniffling/lbacking materials and steel sleeves as needed to comply with performance requirements. 1.6INSTALLATION A.Identification: Preprinted metal or plastic labels, permanently attached. 1.15FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspeotion of Installed Firestop Systems: By Owner -engaged agency according to ASTM E 2174 requirements. 1.7THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE A.One-Part Fire -Stopping Sealant to be used for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and partitions. 1 . Manufacturers: a. Biotheirn Fire Stop Sealant± Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant± bow Corning Corp. c. 3M Fire Barrier Caul CP -25± Electrical Products DIV/3M d. SpecSeal Sealant± STI, Inc. END OF SECTION 07841 1 1 � SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS ION TESTING n compatibility and adhesion testing. B. Preconstruction field -adhesion testing. 1.2 WARRANTY C. Installer Warranty: Two years. 1.3 MATERIALS A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: 1 . Architectu(al Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates:- 250 g/L . . - . - . I Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L, 8. Stain Test: ASTM C 1248. 1.4 J 0 1 NIT S EALANTS A . Single -Component Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant [ES - 1]'. 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. � J. Dow Corning Corporation; CWS. c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. d. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. e. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI -631, f. Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus, g. Tremco� Proglaze SG. h. Tremco; Spectrem 2. i. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Typo and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). . 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. B. Sing le -Component Nonsao Urethane Sealant (ES -2): I . Available Products: j. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - Ia. k. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. 1. Sonneborn, Division of CherfiRex Inc.; NP 1, m. Tremco; Vulkem 116. n. Sherwin Williams 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) arid NS (rionsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NIT (nontraffic). � 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates� M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. Joint -Sealant Backing: Cylindrical. 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -adhesion testing, 1.6 SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application ES -1: For exteriorjoints, unless noted otherwise. I 1 . Joint Sealant: Single -Component Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant (ES - 1) 2. Joint -Sealant Color: From manufaOturer's standards. B. Joirit-Sealant Application ES -2: For all interior joints unless noted otherwise. 1 . Joint Sealant: Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES -2) 2. Joint -Sealant Color: From manufacturer's standards. END OF SECIION 07920 1 . . I I . I I I I . . . . I I . . I 11 .1 I I I DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS ­ I SECTION 081 1 0 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Standard hollow inetal doors and frames. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Hollow Metal Quality Standard: ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Custom Hollow Metal Quality Standard: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. C. Fire -Rated Doors and Frames: Positive -pressure testing. 13 PRODUCTS A. Standard Hollow Metal Doors: I . Design: Flush panel. 2. Thermal -Rated Doors: Exterior and interior where indicated. 3. Exterior Doors: Metallic -coated steel sheet faces. a. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty). 4. Interior Doors: Cold -rolled steel sheet faces. a. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty). B. Standard Hollow Metal Frames: 1 . Exterior Frarnes: Metallic -coated steel sheet; full profile welded. a. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042 -inch- thick steel sheet. 2. Interior Frames: Cold -rolled steel sheet; full profile welded. a. Frames for Level I Steel Doors: 0.042 -inch- thick steel sheet. b. Frames for Wood Doors: 0,042 -inch- thick steel sheet. C. Accessories: I . Louvers: Sightproof, steel. D. Finishes: Factory priming for field painting. E. Vision Glass: Safety Gloss I . Section 08800 "Glazing." 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Metal -Stud Partitions: Frames filled with insulation. B. Concrete and Masonry Walls: Frames filled with grout. END OF SECTION 08110 1 ___ ___ __ I -_ -_ --- ____ SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS - - --- --- - - SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11.0f SUMMARY A. Quality Standard: AWIL A. Exterior entrance systems. I . AW1 Quality Certification Labels or an AW1 letter of licensing for doors. B. Exterior storefront systems. B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Positive pressure testing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A, General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and Structural A. Low -Emitting Materials: Made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. 11 , ,[" , , C�� ,, " "',111- """,", " I -, � ,�, r,, ", "", 'e'l��O�i,,,'�,",,�,�,,��t���,��,��r� 1� , ��l I � ���11610&,�i�,��, �,,�,rg-�� iQ,",�."�'719, �, � � , . . . . . movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar B. WDMA I.S.1 -A Performance Grade: to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following: 1 Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. I . Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. 1.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: units. 1 . Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 1.03 WARRANTY 2. Species: Select white birch, A. Warranty Period: 2 years frorn date of Project completion. 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products for entrances and 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. storefront systems, that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 6. Core: Particleboard. I� Besam Automated Entrance Systems with Breakaway function 7. Construction: Five of seven plies, bonded. 1,05 MATERIALS 8. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with [he 1.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH requirements of standards indicated below. A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1 . Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 1 . Gradle� Premium. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). 2. Faces: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 3. Core: Particleboard. 4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 21 1 M). 4. Construction: Five or seven plies, bonded. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5. 1 0. 5� WDMA I.S. 1 -A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, arid bars; ASTM A 611 1.5 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES I for cold -rolled street and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot -rolled sheet and strip. A. Louvers: Extruded aluminum with clear anodic finish. C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 "Glazing". B. Light -Opening Frames: D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturers standard pressure -glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, 1. Wood beads. and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastorner of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket 1.6 PRIMING/FINISHING manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed A. Shop Priming: with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 1 . Doors for Opaque Finish: One coat of wood primer. . E. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in 2. Doors for Transparent Finish: Stain and first coat of finish. hardness reconimencled by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance B. Factory Finishing: Contractor's option. requirements. C. Transparent Factory Finishes: F. Framing system gaskets, sealants, arid joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer foe joint type. I . Grade: Premorn. G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Division 7 Section 2. Finish: Catalyzed polyurethane. "Joint Sealants." 3. Effect: Open -grain finish. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing D. Opaque Factory Finishes: no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil (0.762-mrn) thickness per coat. I . Grade: Premium. 1.06 COMPONENTS END OF SECTION 08211 A. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-irich- (44.5 -mm-) thick glazed doors with minimum 0,125 -inch - (3.2 -mm-) thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that � . are deep penetration arid fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods. - ___ -.---- - SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS 1 . Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturers standard snap -on extruded-aluminurn glazing stops arid 1.1 SUMMARY preformed gaskets. I 2. Stile Design: Narrow stile; 2 -1/8 -inch (88.9 -mm) nominal width. A. This Section includes overhead rolling metal doors. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers7 C, Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, noribleeding fasteners and I . Overhead Door Corporation, accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 2. Cornell Iron Works. 1 . Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. I 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips 1.3 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION flat -head rinachine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. A. Overhead Coiling Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead rolling door curtain of interlocking roll formed, fully foamed -in place insulated slats, designed to D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, noribleeding flashing, compatible with withstand required wind loading, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats as follows: adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. I . 20 Gauge Steel Door Curtain Slats: Interi6r/Exterior structural quality, cold -rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 446, Grade E. 1.07 Sill: .060 inch thick breakmetal. Finish to match fraini'ng. HARDWARE A, with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525. "flat A. GeneraL Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for ' a. Furnish manufacturer's standard -face" slats, Series 625 UFN, W nominal thickness. . entrances indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Bottom Bar: Consisting of back to back steel angles, minimum 1/8" thickness, as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation. B. Offset Pivots: ANSI/BHMA At 56.4, Grade I with exposed parts of Cast -aluminum alloy. Provide top, bottoni, and a. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather seal arid cushion bumper for manually intermediate pivots at each door leaf. operated doors, unless shown as an overlapping joint. C. Closers, General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, d r epending on door size, exposure to b. Supply with electric safety edge for retraction, weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 3. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side -locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jarnb sides, I . Closing Cycle: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the Americans with Disabilities Act operable froin coil side. 4. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock, type as standard or recommended by overhead door manufacturer. (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," whichever are more stringent. B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Provide locks On afteimate curtain 2. Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements for locations indicated: slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement, a. Exterior Doors: 15 lbf (67 N). C. Windlocks: Malleable iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Unless otherwise recoinmended by door manufacturer, provide imately b. D. Interior Doors: 5 lbf (22,2 N), Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: ANSI/BHMA At 56.4, Grade 1. Provide cover and the following: windlocks on doors exceeding 16 feet wide, Space windlocks approx 11 24 inches o.c. on both edges of curtain. I . I . LCN 4040 with drop plate and shoe. E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels arid angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain 2. Mounting: Parallel arm. loading. Build up units with minimum 3/16 -inch -thick steel sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment. 3. Back Check: Adjustable, F. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimurn of 3/8 -inch bolts at not more than 30 inches o.c., unless closer spacing recommended E. Door -Mounted Holders: ANSI/BHMA A 1 56.16, Grade 1, flip -up type for mounting on door bottom rail and with rubber by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on shoe. exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over -travel of curtain and . . F. . Door Stops: ANSI/BHMA Al 56.16, Grade 1, floor- or wall -mounted door stop, as appropriate for door location a continuous bar for holding windlocks. r indicated, with integral rubber bumper. G. Weather Seals: Provide vinyl or neoprene weather-stripping for exterior exposed doors, except where otherwise indicated. At door heads, use G. Cylinders: Specified in Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware." 1/8 -inch -thick continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use 1/8 -inch -thick continuous strip secured to exterior side of H. I Rirn-Mounted Exit Devices: Sargent 8500 of Von Ddprin 35 rim -type exit device with one -point latching at door -lock jamb guide, stile that is released by a full -width crash bar or when locked down (dogged) by lock cylinder.. 26 D or 32D finish. 1. Pull Handles: 32D, 1 inch diameter, 9 inch centerfine dimension. 1.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM J. Push Bars: As selected by Construction Representative from manufacturer's full range of full -door -width, single -bar push bars. A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and 1 . Provide push plate affixed to push bar. connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease -sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. K. Deadlatch Locks: Manufacturer's standard mortise deadlatch with minimum 112 - inch - 12.7 - mm- long latch bolt and B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot -formed structural -quality carbon steel, welded or searriless pipe, or sufficient diameter and auxiliary bolt located below latch bolt and complying with ANSI/BHMA Al 56.5, Grade 1 requirements. wall thickness to support roll -up of curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deffection to riot more than 0.03 indi per foot of span under I . Latch Paddle Devices: Manufacturer's standard extruded - aluminum deadlatch operating paddle. full load. L. Thresholds: At exterior doors, provide manufacturers standard threshold with cutouts coordinated for operating C� Provide spring balance of one or more oil -tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with hardware, with anchors and jamb clips, and not more than 1/2 -inch- (12.7-aini-) high, with beveled edges providing a I uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. floor level change with a slope of not more than 1:2, and in the followirig material: D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold -rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. 1. Material; Aluminum, mill finish. M. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripr;ng as follows: E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either case iron or cold -rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for 1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC cur ain. complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements. F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating rnechanism at opening head and act as weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to N. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard weather sweep for application to exterior door bottoms and with concealed which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottorn edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface -mounted hoods and any portion of fasteners on mounting strips. between -jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag, 1,08 FABRICATION 1 - Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 0.0276 -inch -thick (24 -gauge) hot -dip galvanized steel sheet with G 00 zinc coating, complying A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to with ASTM A 625. . produce hairline joints free of burrs arid distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1 . Fabricate components for screw -spline frame Construction. A. Manual Push -Up: Provide lift handles on bottom bar and pole with hook. B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. D� Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the 1.6 INSTALLATION system to the exterior. A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jarrib arid head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard, Weld before finishing components to greatest equipment supports according to final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified. extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. B. After completing installation, including Work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion. F. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness arid type of plastic sheet indicated according to plastic C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures sheet manufacturer's written instructions. for resetting closing devices after activation. I (7, Metal Protection: Where aluminum will Contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with pritner or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. END OF $ECTION 08331 , I I - 1-1 - ___ � I H. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (Without projecting stops). Provide subframes and . . - re4iforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to SECTION 08380 L TRAFFIC DOORS _____ PART1 - GENERAL greatest extent possible. Disassemble components Only as necessary for shipment and installation, 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory A. Section Includes: assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame 1. Mediurn to heavy duty traffic doors. units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before finishing 2. Hardware and accessories. components. 1 . Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stCippihg at fixed stops with thresholds and sweeps. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 2. InteriorDoors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.16 silencers at stops to prevent rnetal to metal contact. Provide3 A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Prepared opening in masonry. silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and 2 silencers on head of double-dooe frames. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications' Steel Channel or angle opening frame. � I . � . . . - - 1.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES . . . . . . . . C. Section 06,114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Rough wood framing for door opening. A. . General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations 1.3 SUBMITTALS relative to applying arid designating finishes. A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 300. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: Within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. 1 . Preparation Instructions arid recorrimenclations. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 3. Installation methods. C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating 4. Operation and ma - intenance data, aluminum finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details; include door elevations, head, jamb, and Meeting stile details including full or partial gaskets, D. Class 1, Clear Anodized Aluminum Finish: C0111plying with AAMA 607A. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and 1.10 EXAMINATION E. patterns. Verification Samplesf For each finish product specified, two samples, minirnum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions F. Manufacturer's warranties. affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory 1.4 . DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING conditions have been corrected. A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Do not lay flat. 1,11 A. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturers written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and 1.5 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install storefront systems. Do not install damaged components, Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and products under environmental conditions outside manufacturers absolute limits. distortion, Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 1.6 WARRANTY B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact A. Provide manufacturer's standard two-year Warranty that products are free of defects in material and workmanship and guaranteeing to replace (exclusive surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum of freight and labor) parts proven defective within two years after date of shipment to purchaser. will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. PART2- PRODUCTS C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. Acceptable Manufacturer: Eliason Corporation', P.O. Box 2128, Kalamazoo, MI 49001 ASD, Tel: Tel: (800) 828-3655. Fax: (800)828-3577. Email: D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise "Joint doorsCOeliasoncorp.com Website: www.eliasonGorp.corn. I indicated. Comply with requiremerits of Division 7 Section Sealants." Install sills in one piece, full width of � B. Substitutions: Not permitted. opening except where opening exceeds available manufactured lengths. Provide sealed metal end darns at ends of C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. E. sills. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment With established lines and grades without warp or rack of 22 TRAFFIC DOORS framing members, Medium to Heavy Duty Traffic Doors: High strength polymer cell core, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick thermoplastic facing on both sides; total door thickness 3/4 inch F. Install entrances plumb and true ih alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate (19 mm); (Model P-1 1 PLUS) operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers'w6ften instructions. 1 . Window Size: 14 inches (856 men) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high. 1 . Install surface -mounted hardware according to manufacturer's Written instructions using concealed fasteners to 2. Window Molding' Black rubber molding. greatest extent possible. 3. Glazing: Clear double glazed acrylic. G. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," 'unless otherwise indicated. 4. Thermoplastic Facing Color: I . Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to a. Color: Gray, (1 1 0) ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning arid priming surfaces. 5. Provide jairib guards and base plates as sokified in Accessories below. . 2. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES H I . Install secondary -sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide weatherproof A. Hinges: Double Action Easy Swing(r) proprietary hinges, joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended . by sealant manufacturer. B. 1 . Finish: Zinc coated. Jamb Guards: Use in high impact traffic areas to protect the door jamb and bottom pin. Installed at bottom edges of doors. 1. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. 1 Finish: Zinc coated. J, Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: . 2. Size: 3 inches wide by 9 inches high. I . Variation from Pfane: Limit variation from plane Or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch C. Spring Bumpers: Easy Spring bumpers, 0.25 inch thick high impact resistant thermoplastic. . (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 111 6 inch (1.5 min). Where surfaces 1 - Dimensions: 18 inches high. . tneet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 MM). D. 2. Coloir: Black. base Plates: 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 men). Base plates to install on base of door surface; in pairs for front and back. 1.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING PART3- 1. None. EXECUTION A. Adjust d I oors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and 3.1 EXAMINATION weathertight closure. A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared, B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces. B. Verify jambs Plumb and square. 1.13 PROTECTION C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure 3.2 PREPARATION entrance and storefront systems are Without darnage or deterioration at the time of Project completion. A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. I END OF SECTION 08410 B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate Under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1. A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. D. Minimum jamb construction of double studded 2 by 4 wood construction or equivalent. E. Reinforce hollow metal jambs at hardware locations. F. Steel Channel jambs are required for heavy duty traffic doors. G. Adjust door assembly to smooth operation and in full contact with weatherstripping. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean doors, frames [and glass]. 13� Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08380 1 . I I . - I . � . 11 I I " I 4 1 q , I fL � , � �_ I 'i �� .. t - 11� �`jlll�. i eN � I'll . ;;;�, �� 11, " I ';�%�,� '4 1 �� �i� ,� Q, ;�,�,�,,, � ,,r.,,� � , ��_ "'111 � , ,�y�"' b -,� I � 11, � . . . . . . . J,�� 1, I � - � I V1 I e e i"'Al " , - _;,,, - y "I I I I -.11 11�� "' Z'�U�� 111� r, i . I __ . �t w 11 , ,[" , , C�� ,, " "',111- """,", " I -, � ,�, r,, ", "", 'e'l��O�i,,,'�,",,�,�,,��t���,��,��r� 1� , ��l I � ���11610&,�i�,��, �,,�,rg-�� iQ,",�."�'719, �, � � , . . . . . � ��, Ev �� � 'k '� � I , �1 I A 1 I I . , 1 Fj,,5� 1 1 � I 11� '.A I % , I , " " r ��� ... 1, - ;, I I ,77 , I 1� I REVISIONS W 0 - UJ !;� 0 T_ I- rl- " M _JI ILL - - CD 111� 0 LJ_ '71 < U) W __J 0 ! K", 0 0� W I- , . �?_ UJ 0 LU ;_;;, ?� 0 I ­ CZ) LO cy-) t ; i I 0 Z F__ cj� �1_ Z - Z C)f 0 cy-, CL < :D 00 0 W < LU il-- rr 0� (D LU < M C) U) a- U) UJ 0 __J I-_ 7D �� 0 < LU �_ I-_ LU M E I n 0 0 Q:� W CL 0- >_ 2: __J 0(0 ifz U) LU < cr, 2 a - W x 0 LU " = C0 = U) - �_ < Z I-- W .7, :�E 0 =) 0 0 Cf) 0 l_- r') = LU W :�E (f) LU =) r Q II. - 0 0 1.1- 0 UJI LU U) U) LU =) X F-- 0 UJ L11 W. 0 = 11-- =) < 2: =) DATE 5/4/12 1 JOB NO. 11266 11 A7m2 , SHEET NO. 0 (D SECTION 08952 - FIBERGLAS8-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes alunrinurn-framed assemblies incorporating fiberglass -sandwich panels as follows: 1 . Wall assemblies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Shop Drawings: For panel assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of panel assernbles required for this Project. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but riot limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, rnetal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Water leakage. 2, Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. I . Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Filberbloom. b. Delamination of Coating, if any, from exterior face sheet. c. Color change exceeding requirements, d. Delarnination of panel face sheets froni panel cores. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Aluminum -Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include norrual weathering. I . Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years frorn date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Kalwall Corporation. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Fiberglass -sandwich -panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of the following forces without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes, but is [lot limited to, the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Water leakage. c. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. d. Noise or vibration created by wind, thermal, or structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. B. Structural Loads: I . Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C, Deflection Limits: 1. Vertical Panel Assemblies: Limited to 1/60 of clear span for each assembly component. 2. Overhead Panel Assemblies: Limited to 11180 of clear span for each assembly component, D. Structural -Test Performance: ASTM E 330. E. Wind borne -Debris- I mpact-Resistance Performance: Provide panel assemblies that pass missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASITM E 1886 and the testing information in ASTM E 1996 for the designated Wind Zone. I . Large -Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade, 2. Smat-Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade, F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide panel assemblies that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minirnum static -air -pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. G, Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient- and surface -temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar treat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. H. Energy Performance: Provide panel assemblies with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below and certified and labeled according to NFRC: I . Thermal TranSulittance (U -Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U -factor of not more than 0.80 Btu/sq. ft. x In x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2� Solar-Heat-GainCoefficient: Fixed glazing and fraluing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.6 as determined according to NFRC 200. 3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.30 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., 2.3 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Components: Thermally broken, extruded aluminum. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1 . Street and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, anclTubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTIM R 429/B 429M. 4, Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous ShinIS for aligning skylight components. D. Fasteners And Accessories: Manufacturers standard, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatiblewith adjacent materials. E� Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTIM A 307, Grade A, galvanized steel. G. Concealed Flashing: Corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet not less than 0.040 inch thick, finished to match framing. 1. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. J. Frame -System Sealants: As recornmended in writing by manufacturer. K. Corrosion -Resistant Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic. 2A FIBERGLASS -SANDWICH PANELS A. Description: Assembly of uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglass -reinforced -polymer fare sheets bonded to both sides of a grid core. 1. Self -Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more per ASTM D 1929. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less per ASTM E 84, or 75 or less per ASTM D 2843. 3. Flanne-Spread Index: Not more than 25 per ASTM E 84. 4; Combustibility Classification: Class CC1 per ASTM D 635. 6. Interior Finish Classification: Class A per ASTM E 84. B. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches. C. Panel Strength Characteristics: 6. Maximum Panel Deflection: 3-1/2 inches when a 4 -by -1 2 -foot panel is tested according to ASTM E 72 at 34 lbf/sq. ft., with a maximum 0.090 -inch set deflection after five Minutes. 7. Panel Support Strength: Capable of supporting, without failure, a 300-lbf concentrated load when applied to a 3 -Inch- diameter disk according to ASTM E 661. D. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked, extruded-alurninurn I-bearns, with a ruinimurn flange width of 7/16 inch. 1 . Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, in alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. [-Beam Construction: Thermally broken, 3. Grid Pattern: Inline rectangle, nominal 12 by 24 inches. E. Exterior Face Sheet: 1 . Thickness: 0.070 inches. 2. Color Crystal. 3. Color Change: Not more than 3.0 units Delta E when measured according to ASTM D 2244, after outdoor weathering in southern Florida compliant with procedures in ASTIM D 1435, with panels mounted facing south. 4. Erosion Protection: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Impact Resistance: No fracture or tear at impact of 70 ft. x lbf by a 3 -1/4 -inch- diameter, 5 -lb freefalling ball according to UL 972 test procedure. F. Interior Face Sheet: 1 . Thickness: 0,045 inch. 2. Color: White. G, Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Adhesive: ASTIM D 2559. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES H. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class 1, 0.018 rnm or thicker. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions. -2. Do not install damaged components, 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonrnovement joints. 5. Install Anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and immobilization of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 6, Metal Protection: Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion -resistant coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closures with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. D. Install components to drain water passing through joints, condensation occurring within aluminum members and panels, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations. F. Erection Tolerances: Install panel assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 7. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding elernent separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch. 8. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet, but no greater than 1/2 inch over total length. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08952 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09111 - NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PAWF I - GENERAL I, t SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsurn ceilings and soffits. 3. Recessed slotted wall standards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated asserublies that incorporate rion-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 541/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-irich- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Powdef-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing Agency. C.Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth, As indicated on Drawings. E� Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Coid-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-mch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. , a. MinimurnBase-Metal Thickness: 0.0179inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTIM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Min imu in Base Meta I Th ickness: O.Oi79inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-ifich- deep Members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetricalorliatshaped. F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung systern composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch, unless otherwise indicated. .2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch, for the following locations, unless otherwise indicated. a. For 6 inch framing B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: I . Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double -Runner Systern: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness riot less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are hot limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SILD or VerfiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SIFT). 3) Or equal system by USG� C.Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1 , Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179inch. D. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with ruinimurn 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-112 inches, 0,068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shapod, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymtrietrical or hat shaped. G. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, 2, Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with Minimum bare -steel thickness of 0.0312 inch, 3. Tie Wire: ASTIVI A 641/A 341M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0,0475 -inch- diameter wire. 2.4 RECESSED SLOTTED WALL STANDARDS A. Recessed slotted wall standard ernbedded in a 3-5/8" stud. 1. 25 ga. Galvanized steel. 2. I-beam shape of 2 Y�` and 3 5/8" studs as indicated on drawings. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Clenico Elite Standard Systems, (909) 483-0141 C.Finish 1 . Drywall and slotted standard must have flush finish with one another. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel mernbers to substrates. PAtn'3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, forcompliarice with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are 'applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A, Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1 . Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install Supplementary framing, And blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies, D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Fraffle both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they @but or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1 , Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within Ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horiZontal-forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 1110ans. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will riot cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do riot attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach [rangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F, Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross4urring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet [treasured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend frarning full freight to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1 . Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, Install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jarnbs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated, b. Extend jarnb studs through suspended cellings and allich to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frarne openings other than door openings the sarfie as required for door operrings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Parfitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Tra& Where indicated, install to maintain Continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Parfitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. D.Direct Furring: I . Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driveh fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E.Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior cbmers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring Members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flarrge extending beyond corner; on adjacentvVall surface, screw -attach f I f 4 (1 A 11 1 At I f A k 1k 19; h f, -4 t a Vi0 16 Switches and Sensor: Field installed nd adjusted.Adjustments: 1 . At no additional cost to the owner, manufacturer must furnish with close out documents, any special tools or devises that may be required for setup and 2.04 ACTIVATING DEVICE - SENTRYSCAN A, olentryScan motion detection device specified herein is based on K -band frequency technology, eliminating ghosting effect and bond width jarnrining SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL / or service to equipment. prevalent with X -bands, arid providing motion detection twice as fast as X -band technology, with a higher quality detection pattern. Circuitry desigri 2. Adjustments by remote control or manually by push button. eliminates Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). Detection patterns remain very stable in extreme weather 11 SECTION INCLUDES 3. LED indications to aid in the positioning of the infrared curtain. Proper LED indication shall signify compliance to applicable ANSI standard for safety conditions, A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and inotion/presence sensor control device. pattern. B. The "SentryScan" motion detector is a unidirectional/bidirectional sensor which operates only on the FCC approved K -band frequency (24.125 GHz) It 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 2.8 ELECTRICAL shall utilize a planar, (flat antenna) and for aesthetic purposes the unit shall be no larger than 4- 3/4" W x 3 1/8" H. x 2" D. A. Section 08410 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. A. High -Efficiency DO Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20 Arrip line. I. Relay hold firne from 0.5 seconds to 9.0 seconds, Adjustable for unidirectional or bi-directional sensing capabilities, wide or narrow patterns. All B. Section 08710 - Hardware. B. Power: Self -detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming adjustments must be made by a universal coded infrared remote control. Mounting height, 7' to 1 Tabove finished floor, C. Section 08800 - Glazing. power with solid -earth ground connection for each door systern. 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. C. SELECT FINISH D. Section 16000 - Electrical. C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts. 1. Finish: (Black, ready for non-metallic field finish painting). 1.3 REFERENCES D. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well 2,05 SWING DOOR SAFETY DEVICES - PASSPORT A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. beyond brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. A. General: Safety devices specified herein operate on active infrared technology. "PassPort" B. ANSI/BHMA 156.10 - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, including sensor capabilities for typically 100 B. The " PassPort": active infrared presence device shall utilize a combination of focused and diffused technology. The is powered by C. ANSI/UL 325 - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. cycles. 24VACIDC electronics supplied by the controller and shall recognize 2 different patterns: 1) when door is closed and 2) when door is open. When door 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION is in open position it will provide 1' o f threshold protection with an adjustable self -adaptation time of 30 seconds to 25 minutes. The PassPort protection A. Doors Powered to Open Position: 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES pattern will go through the threshold and overlap the motion pattern. All adjustments must be made by a universal coded infrared remote control. 1 . Doors powered by I DO electric motor and rucchanical gear assembly transmitted to active leaves by fiberglass -reinforced tooth drive belt for silent A. Anodized: Clear, AA-C22A31. Mounting height Tto 9'above finished floor operation. boors using roller chain, cable, or hydraulic devices shall not be accepted. C. The "Lock out Relay" shall inhibit the PassPort output during the closing Cycle. The LO -21 B shall also communicate the position of the door to the 2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation controls. PART3 EXECUTION PassPort in order for the PassPort to utilize 2 different programs. One program will be with the door open and the other program will be with the door 3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to motor Until door is closed. Coordinate with detection systern package. fully open. Door systerns that use microswitches shall not be accepted. 3.1 EXAMINAT10N D. "Safety Beams" (PassPort Beam Kit) Active infrared safety beams, located 5 inches past the lead edge of the door in the full open position, will provide 4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and surrounding walls or interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do additional safety in the closing cycle. In the event someone breaks the beams, the door will not recycle open. Beams are connected to LO -21 8 lockout and after a delay go to the full closed position. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while closing sliall riot be acceptable. riot proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. relay. Note: guide rails are provided and installed by installing distributor. B. boors Powered to Closed Position: 2.06 SWING DOOR SAFETY DEVICES - PASSPORT PLUS (OPTIONAL) I , The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and after remaining in the open position for a preset 3.2 PREPARATION A. PassPort Plus package includes an optional swing door safety device - Superscan sensor. time delay (per ANSI 156.10-2005 standards). A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, leveli square, and in tolerance. B. The PassPort Plus includes Superscan sensors which shall be used in conjuhction with the PassPort presence sensor and lock out relay in order to 2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to the, motor until door B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header. provide safety during the Closing and opening cycles of the door or stand alone on the approach side of a low energy swing door for extra safety. The is fully closed. C. Ensure floor is level and smooth. Superscan sensors shall detect the presence of anything entering from either side of the door. Superscan shall be niounted on each side at top ofthe 3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open position if an obstruction is detected, their resume their door at the lead edge of the door. Sensor shall detect a person in the swing path of the door during opening or closing and shall cause the door to stop. interrupted movement at low speed to check whether the obstruction has disappeared or not, Door systems that only monitor the door travel while 3.3 INSTALLATION C. Superscan door mounted detectors shall use active infrared technology with distance measurement. 12V - 24V AC or DO power requirements. opening shall not be acceptable. A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10-2005. D. Two sensors required for single doors. Four sensors required for pair of doors. C. Emergency Breakawy: B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. 2.07 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS 1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out froin any position in sliding mode. C. Anchor frames securely in place. A. Electrical Characteristics: 120V, 60 Hz, 10 amp electrical power supply to the operator, 24VAC/DC +/- 10% to the sensors. 2. Brealkaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with ANSI/BHMA '156.10 maximum of 50 pounds. ID. Separate aluminum frorn other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect. 2.06 GUlDE RAILS D. Watchdog Monitoring: E. Install exterior doors to be weatherfight in closed position. A. To be provided and installed by local certified Besam distributor per current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated 1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations. F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. Pedestrian Doors. 2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assurne corfiniand of system and shut down automatic function by holding doors open, should door speed, rnotor function, G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 2.07 FINISHES or drive train operations deviate from design criteria ranges. A. Standard operator and door finish is dark bronze anodized (AAC23A44) or clear anodized (AAC22A31). Custom finishes such as stainless steel clad 3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor ruain Watchdog control circuit every 255 door cycles, ready to perform as a backup. Door systems that do riot 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL are available, if specified. Powder coat painted finish is available with match to Kynar colors. Monitor control circuits every 255 cycles will not be accepted. A. Manufacturer's Field Services: E. Energy Saving Device: 1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Switch: Recessed in interior header cover. 2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10-2005. Certified 2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2 -way traffic, partial opening, arid hold fully open. technician shall be approved and trained by manufacturer. 3.01 EXAMINATION 3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss. A. Verify the openings are plumb and are dimensioned properly. Insure adequate support has been provided at the operator header. Proceed with the 4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway hardware and door stiles. 15 ADJUSTING installation I only after conditions are deerried satisfactory. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A, Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10-2005. 3.02 INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENT A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing A. Install equipment in accordance with Besam Installation instructions. Adjust equipment per instructions and current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. 3.6 CLEANING National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. B. Compliance: A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Besam reserves the right to make product improvements and change specifications without notice. 1 . ANSI/BHMA 156.10. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would clarriage glass or finish. 2. ANSI/UL 325 Ii . sted. END OF $ECTION 08116 5. UL Canada approved. 6. Air Infiltration per ASTM E283-91 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and 17 A. PROTECT10N Protect installed doors And finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of I SECTION OWN - G LAZING Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across Specimen. substantial completion. 1.0,1 SUMMARY 8. Full breakout: static pressure air infiltration conducted at 0.57 psf (16 mph) with a .07 cfWlft result and 1.57 psf (25 mph) with a 1.3 cfm/ft result. A. Glazing for the Following Products: 5. Structural Performance (wind load) per ASTM E330-07 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors END OF SECTION 08460 1 . Entrances and other doors. by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Testing conducted at positive and negative loads. EC TION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE a. Full breakout: 37 psf (120 mph) 1.02 WARRANTY 6. Forced Entry Resistance per AAMA 1303.6 - Voluntary Specifications for Forced Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors. 0.1 SUMMARY A. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Project completion. C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing doors and frames. D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors'. 1.03 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS 1. Bi -Part Doors: 220 pounds (100 kg) per active leaf. 1.2 MANUFACTURERS A. FloatGlass (Type FG -A): ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 Clear, Qualityq3 glazing select; 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick. 2. Single Slide Doors: 300 pounds (200 kg) per active leaf. Manufacturers! Subject to Compliance with requirements, provide products as shown on construction drawings. B. Safety Glass (*Type FG -B): ASTM Of 048, fully tempered, Condition A uncoated, Type I transparent flat, Class 1 Clear, Quality q3 glazing select; E. Operating Temperature Range: -35o F to 122� F (-30o C to 50o C). conforming to ANSI Z97.11� 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick. F. Motion and Presence Detection System: Uses planar K -band microwave technology to detect motion and 1.3 SCHEDULED HARDWARE G. Wired Glass (Type FG -H): ASTM C1036, Type 11 patterned . and wired fiat, Class 1 translucent, Quality q8 glazing; 1/2" square mesh, 1/4 Inch (6 mm) focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. 0. Systems With Transom Over 16-0" (4,877 Turn) or With Heavy Glass: System can span up to 16 feet without overhead support. Systems at 16A", with Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware Are indicated in the "Hardware D. minimum thick. Mirrors: Clear tempered float glass; 1/4 inch (6 inin) ff iinimurn thick, size as indicated; Coat second surface of glass with successive layers of chemically transorns, or with heavy glass shall install anti -sag rods through transom verticals. Group" on the drawings. deposited silver and manufacturer's standard protective organic coating; 10 year warranty against silver spoilage; Flat polished edge; Continuous channel 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.4 INSTALLATION bottom support designed to withstand mirror weight and top support to prevent rninor from coming away from wall along top edges; setting blocks at A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, materials, and fabrication of Mount hardware units at heights Indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing quarter points. Include clear anodized aluminum frames where shown on drawings. doors, frames, sidelites, operator, ruction/presence sensor control device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories. regulations and except as otherwise directed by Owner. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.04 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Installer's Qualifications: 1.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Sealed Insulating Gloss Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces COMplying with 1. Minirrium of 2 years successful experience in installation of similar doors. A. Adjust and chock each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 2. Local certified Besam distributor. adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1 . For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, 4. 3. Approved by manufacturer. 1 . Where door hardware 18 installed ruore than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 5. AAADM certified week prior to acceptance or occupancy And make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items 2. Provide heattreated, where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating w . here safety glass is designated or required. A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage. and ventilating equipment. 3. Performance characteristics designated for insulating glass are norninal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm B. Storage: Store Materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufactures instructions. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. . (0.23 inch) thick and nominal 1/2 -inch dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 4. U_values are expressed as Btulhour x sq. ft. x F. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE END Or SECTION 08710 B. Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with glass elastomer edge seal; outer pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, inner pane of 114 inch clear A. The manufacturer shall offer a dispatch procedure that shall be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year to facilitate proper service capability. low -e glass, purge interpane space and fill with argon; total unit thickness of 1 inch (25 Turn). B. A manufacturer's designated service contact shall obtain malfunction information and dispatch appropriate service provider to project location. SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS C. Edge Seal Material: Black color. C. Toll free phone number, 1-877-BESAM-US (1 -877-237-2687), shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator. D. A geographically assigned installation provider shall be trained and certified to provide maintenance service. PARTI-GENERAL 1.05 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: PART2 PRODUCTS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of A. Automatic swinging door package consisting of operator, alurninum door, motion sensor and presence sensing safety device. Perform installation by insulating glass units, and glazing Channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as dernonstrated by testing and field experience. 2.1 MANUFACTURER the local certified Besam Distributor. Besam Program Module to be used by installer during installation. For the name and number of your local Besam 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications A. Besam Entrance Solutions, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free (866) BESAM-US. Phone (704) 290-5520. Fax (704) distributor, please call tol-free (866)237-2687. indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 290-5555. Web Site www.besam.corn. E -Mail marketing@Ibesam-usa.com, 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIF I IED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION: 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS A. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrances and storefronts a. Provide selections made by Construction Representative from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. A. Model: Besam Unislide automatic siding doors, #OCaS (OC2-12) B. Section 08710 - Door hardware B. Elastorneric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastorneric sealants. 1. The system shall consist of sliding alurninum doors, header, operator, threshold track and actuating controls. The Besam header will C. Division 1600 - Electrical G. Glazing Sealant for Fire -Resistant Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistive rating. include the UltraV'eWTM Motion and Presence Sensor Control System that is self-monitoring and communicates with the Unislicle through a I I D. Section 08810 - Glass & glazing monitoring connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a sensor or monitoring E. Section 07920 - Caulking & sealants 1.06 GLAZING TAPES failure. 1.03 REFERENCES - (Codes & Approvals) A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and normigrating in 2. Overhead -concealed, electro -mechanical, microprocessor -controlled, sliding door operator. A. Package descrii bed complies with current ANS I/BH MAI 56.10 American National Standard for PowerOperated Pedestrian Doors, SwingmasterMP contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recornmended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls 3. Operator housing, floor rollers, And door carriers. operator is listed with ANSI1UL 325-1907 standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. Swingmaster IMP operator is with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: B. Dimension also CUL approved (for use in Canada). 1 . AAMA 804. 1. 1, Sliding Alurninurn Doors: Provide door units to dimension heights and widths with corresponding stile glazing as shown on construction documents. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Glass stops as specified shall be available for all door panels and transom. The bi-part sliding door system shall include a two-point lock securing the A. Automatic door equipment accommodates niediurn to heavy pedestrian traffic and up to 250 1.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS lead edges of the door stiles together and to the hanger Assembly. All doors shall have horizontal door extrusions, including optional muntins, with the pound (114 kg) weight of doors. A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other design characteristic to nest orinterlock into the intersecting vertical member. This design feature is to restrict any twisting or movement ofthe B. Motion and presence sensor capable of Operating within temperature ranges of Operating temperature range of - 30 Li F (-34 Ll C) to 1310 F (55 1:1 C). glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation, horizontal member that can produce open sightlines and / or compromise the door leaf integrity. The door package shall include security ball catches 1.05 SUBMITTALS B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. that latch the swing out panels in the closed position when the sliding doors are in the fully closed position. The active sliding door shall be provided A. Product Data: Submit [Tian ufacturer's product data and standard details for automatic operators. C. Setting Blocks: Elastorneric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. with a key cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior in accordance with NFPA 101. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of automatic operators and associated components of D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place 2. Clear Doorway Opening Width: As indicated on the drawings. the work. Include anchors, hardware and other components hot included in mantufacturer's standard data. for installation indicated. 3. Overall Frame Width: As indicated on the drawings. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 4. Masonry Opening Width: As indicated on the drawings. A. Spore parts list and owners manual are available from the manufacturer. 5. Active and Sidelite Leaf Width: As indicated on the drawings. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.08 PREPARATION 6. Cleat Door Opening Height: As indicated on the drawings. A. Local certified Besam distributor to install operator in accordance with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Rernove coatings that are not firmly bonded to 7. Overall Frame Height: As indicated on the drawings. Pedestrian Doors and local applicable codes substrates. 8. Masonry Opening Height: As indicated on the drawings. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS 9. Active and Sidelite Leaf Height: As indicated on the drawings. A. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section shall have minimuin ten years experience an,' be a member of the 1.09 GLAZING, GENERAL 2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). Prior to placing door(s) in operation, an AAADM technician should inspect the A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent A. Doors and Frames: Extruded Aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. doors for compliance with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Hydraulic dampers (optional): provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and closing during emergency breakout conditions. 8. Manufacturer to provide FACTORY owned central dispatch system for warranty service throughout North America. System to be available 24 hours a B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: B. Glass: day, 365 days per year with 8 factory employee (not an answering service) to obtain Malfunction information and dispatch appropriate service agency Use a Telling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass 1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1. to the customer location, Toll free 1-817-BESAM-US to be prominently displayed on header of each operator. To insure quality service dispatelhing, units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with Rates or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are 2. Active Leaves: [1 /4 -inch (6 -mm) glass] [5/8 -inch (16 -mm) glass insulating units] [I -inch (25 -mm) glass insulating units]. outside contractors or answering services will not be accepted. located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufactures label. 3. Sidelites: [1/4 -inch (6-rnin) glass] [5/8 -inch (16-mrn) glass insulating units] (I -Inch (25 -mm) glass insulating units - fixed sidelite units Only]. 1.09 WARRANTY 2. Remove damaged glass from Project Site and legally dispose of off site, Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when 4. Field -glazed or preglazed. A. Besarn's autorratic door components are wairrariled to be free of defectsin materials or workmanship under norinal use for a period of one year from installed, weaken glass.and impair performance.and Appearance. C. Door Operation: the date of shipment from Besam's factory when the components have been installed by an authorized Besarn distributor� Abuse, inisuse, modific3tion C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preGonstruction sealant substrate testing. 1. Shall be Besam Unislide Door System with UltraView Im Technology for bi-part or single slide directional operation, In compliance with NFPA 101 all or improper repair or service by unauthorized technicians negates this warranty. During the period of this warranty Besam, at its sole option, will repair D. Install elmtomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with refere'nced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass panels shall allow "breakout" to the full open position to provide instant egress at any point in the door's movement. To allow safe egress, automatic or replace any Besam automatic door cornponent or parts thereof found to be defective in material or Workmanship if any necessary return charges are manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. operation shall be discontinued when any panels are in the "breakout" mode. Doors and sidelights shall be sized to prevent pinch points at meeting prepaid. Components repaired of replaced under this warranty are warranted only for the remainder of the period covered by this warranty. For E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. stiles. expanded warranty terms see Besam's warranty certificate. F. Provide Spacers for Glass Sizes Larger than 50 United Inches (Length plus Height) as Follows: D. Aluminum Frame and Extrusions I � Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face Clearances, except where 1. Shall be a consistent .125" wall thickness throughout the entire extruded member including And not exclusive to, the integral structural sections to PART2-PRODUCTS gaskets and glazing tapes Are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and cornply with system performance maintain the integrity of the overall extruded shape. Glass stops shall have .062 -wall thickness. Door systems with less than .125 wall thickness or requirements. with 2.01 MANUFACTURER 2. Provide 118 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final .125 "norninal" thicknesses will not be accepted. A. Provide PassPort 900OMP automatic swing door package as Manufactured by Besam, Inc;, Monroe, NC 28110, Perform installation by the local conipressed thickness of tape. E. Sidelites: certified Besarn Distributor. 6. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 1. Provide sidelites to dimension heights and widths as shown on construction documents with corresponding glazing. All sidelights shall have 2.02 EQUIPMENT H. Set glass lites in each series with uriiforin pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. interlocking, nested Intermediate roils to prevent twisting and separation. The sidelights shall swing out and allow the sliding doors to "breakout" to the A. PassPort 900OMP package consists of Swingmaster IMP overhead concealed operator unit (surface mounted operator is also acceptable), PassPort full open position for instant Ogress at Any point in the door's movement per NFPA 101. swing door presence sensor, SentryScan inotion detector, lock -out relay, PassPort beam kit, and Genter pivoted swing door. 1.10 PROTECTION AND CLEANING F. Header Case: 2.03 AUTOMATIC SWING DOOR OPERATOR 1. Shall be a Besam 7-5/8" x 6-7/8" Architecturally enhanced extruded alurninum profile with recessed UltraViewlm sensors on each side to meet ANSI A. SWING DOOR OPERATOR UNIT: Swingmaster IMP overhead concealed (or surface mounted) electro -mechanical, microprocessor controlled A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by Attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers At 56.10-05. Header shall be capable of supporting bi-parting doors of 220 pounds per leaf over a span of 1645 without intermediate supports when operator, powered by 24 volt, 1/4 hp motor. Completely assembled and sealed unit which includes helical gear drive transmission and interconnected to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. using 1/4" glass. It shall contain door operator and door mounting components, The header shall be a "closed design" to reduce infiltration of airborne rack and gear system for compression of exterior replaceable heavy duty spiral spring, all contained within a die cast aluminum housing and filled with B. Protect glass frorn contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminants and debris which may inhibit proper operation and facilitate increased service requirements. Headers with visible underside carrier special lubricant for extreme temperature conditions. Drive shaft is mininium 15/16" (24mm) thick containing 14 tooth splines to maximize bearing contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. openings of 1/4"or greater, whether in the open or Closed positions, shall not be accepted. surface contact with drive arm assembly and eliminate slippage and door latch drifting. Interfaced with the transmission system is a DO shunt-wound C, c n, n less a Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during constru tio but of th n G. Roller Composition: permanent aragnet niotor with sealed ball bearings. System operates from 120 VAC -60 cycle -1 phase power supply. The operator is mounted in the once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. 1. Shall consist of two (2) steel roller wheels per door leaf having a 1-3/4" (440m) diameter with single journal sealed oil -impregnated bearings to ensure header case housing using vibration isolators to maintain quiet operation. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during roller life on a "replaceable" Delrin track to reduce service cost from normal usage and incorporate self -aligning anti -risers to ensure proper panel B. HEADER: Operatoris housed in a 6" (152mrn)wide X 6" (162mm) high side load, non -handed, extruded aluminum header. All aluminum sections are construction period. positioning. Rollers of any urethane composition shall not be, accepted. The assembly shall allow the sliding doors to swing outward and facilitate 6063-T5 alloy. The operator housing provides a seal against dust, dirt and moisture. E. Wash glass on . both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Project completion. emergency Ogress in accordance with NFPA 101. C. ELECTRONIC CONTROLS: A self-contained, microprocessor controls the operations and switching of swing power operator. The electronic control Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. H. Stiles: [Narrow - 2-1/8"1 [Medium - 4` 1 [Wide - 5"]. provides low Voltage power supply for all means of actuation. No external or auxiliary low voltage power source will be allowed. The Control includes 1. Pivots: Top and bottorn concealed pivots, extruded aluminum. time delay (I to 30 seconds) for normal cycle, as well as, the following built in features: END OF.SECTION 08800 J.Hardware: Breakaway. 1. Torque limiting for controlled forces on opening, K. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Noturemovable, security -type glazing bead to prevent unauthorized entry. Doors utilizing removable exterior stops will not 2. Acceleration control for smooth starts and recycle. be accepted. 3. Special circuitry for roducing power to the motor when door is in HOLD -OPEN mode, extending longevity arid assuring reliability. 2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATION 4. Besain PMD handheld programming device to eliminate electronic adjustment tampering. A. Door Operator and Controller: D. POWER OPEN: The automatic door operator powers the door open by forces transmitted mechanically to the drive shaft and maintains a constant 1. Shall be a Besam electro-inechanical Controlled unit. The operator shall integrate a high -efficiency, energy efficient, DC motor requiring a Minimum of engagement throughout the opening cycle. The operator is designed to counteract most exterior wind conditions and/or interior stack pressure without 3 A current draw, allowing 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. The supplied system shall have the capability to operate at full performance well beyond the need of additional power assist mechanisms. The automatic door system functions as a manual door closer in the event of a power failure. The a brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265V) sensing Changes and adjusting alltOmatically, The operator shall be of the type to allow an automatic door system is electro -mechanical in design requiring no remote pumps or compressors. adjustable hold open time delay of 0 to 60 second having internal software to incorporate a self-diagnostic system. E. SPRING CLOSE: The automatic door operator is spring closed. Spring is designed to counteract most normal wind conditions and return the door to B. Microprocessor Control Box: full close. Closing forces are regulated by utilizing the motor and gear assembly as a dynamic brake. The spring is compression typo to ensure 1. Besam factory -adjusted configuration, with opening and closing speeds set to comply with ANSI Al 56.10-2005 requirements. Should the drive train longevity. Clock type springs are not acceptable. operations deviate from design criteria ranges, Watchdog Control Circuit Monitoring will assurne command of the system and shut down the automatic F. EMERGENCY BREAKAWAY: All INswing doors which arO required exits, are equipped with an emergency breakaway feature which internally cuts function allowing A secondary supervisory circuit to perform as a backup. power to the operator. No external power switch will be allowed. The breakaway feature allows doors to swing in the direction of egress, with forces C. Accessories: that comply with Current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian boors. Following emergency breakaway the 1. The Unisfide Automatic Sliding Door Systern shall have the following accessories to reduce energy loss: Adjustable nylon sweep(s) on the bottom of doors return to the full closed position and electrically reset automatically, the sliding door(s), double pile weather stripping for the sliding door lead edges, single pile weather stripping between the carrier and the header on the G. SWING DOOR: Narrow (or medium) stile swing door as manufactured by Besam, Inc., and is complete in all respects consisting of the following: lead stile(s) of the sidelight(s) and the pivot stile(s) of the sliding door(s), and a selector switch located on the interior side of the unit to allow door(s) to I . Narrow (or medium) stile heavy-duty aluminurn door fabricated of 6063-T5 alloy. open at full or reduced width according to weather and traffic conditions. 2. Besam end load, bottom pivot. 2.5 AIR INFILTRATION 3. Top Ann prep for Swingmaster MP swing door operator. A. Weatherstripping: All active door panel weatherstripping shall be concealed, 4inned-pile." 4. Quick disconnect wiring harness. 2.6 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE (WIND LOAD COMPLIANCE) AND FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE 5. Mechanical I point lock (2 point lock for pairs of doors). A. Locking shall be independent 2 pt- locking system In each active leaf and include exterior key cylinder and interior thumb turn, 6. Jamb tubes (optional) and finger guards as required by UL. B. Threshold shall be aluminum, I/F x 4-1/2" running full width of package, Lead -up: optional. 2.7 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE A. Model: The BEA Wizard Sliding Door Sensing SysteinBesarn UltraVO01 1. The focused active infrared shall be used for the purpose of presence detection in and around the door threshold area, The presence technology shall overlap the motion pattern. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The system is built on numerous Object -tracking algorithms. Any object is tracked while in the infrared presence zone as well as in the threshold area. The focused active infrared (safety zone) remains active even during the closing cycle of the door to EXCEED guidelines as outlined in ANSI Al 56.10-2005. 2. Sensors not using focused active infrared technology and object- tracking algorithms will not be accepted. 3. Before EVERY closing cycle, the UltraViewTm sensor is questioned by the door control microprocessor to assure the sensor is functioning properly. Ifthe UltraView Im sensor does not reply per pre-programmed operational settings, the doors are prevented from closing. Sensors that do not have this capability will not be accepted. B. Motion Sensor: 1. Shall be a Besarn UltraVieWTM sensor utilizing K -band (24.125GHz) microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single recessed housing within each side of the header. The microwave porflon of the sensor will be capable of bi-directiorial, uni-dire6tional or both sensing capabilities while having a self-monitoring ability to communicate with the sliding door through a monitoring connection. The infrared curtains shall have a self-adaptatior) time of 30 seconds minimum that will enable the �ensor to learn permanently changed environments. The unit shall have the design characteristics to operate within a temperature range of -30 F to 131 F (-34 C to 55 C). K -band microwave technology provides prompt activation and reduces door hold open time to the minimum required by ANSI, thus reducing internal environmental temperature interference. One-way traffic applications shall use two microwave patterns on the re-entry side. One large pattern will trigger the activation circuit, and one small pattern will be routed to the safety circuit. The smaller pattern is adjustable to meet ANSI Al 56.10-2005 secondary activation requirements. SECTION 08952 - FIBERGLAS8-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes alunrinurn-framed assemblies incorporating fiberglass -sandwich panels as follows: 1 . Wall assemblies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Shop Drawings: For panel assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of panel assernbles required for this Project. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but riot limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, rnetal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Water leakage. 2, Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace panels that exhibit defects in materials or workmanship. I . Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Filberbloom. b. Delamination of Coating, if any, from exterior face sheet. c. Color change exceeding requirements, d. Delarnination of panel face sheets froni panel cores. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Aluminum -Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include norrual weathering. I . Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years frorn date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Kalwall Corporation. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Fiberglass -sandwich -panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of the following forces without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes, but is [lot limited to, the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Water leakage. c. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. d. Noise or vibration created by wind, thermal, or structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. B. Structural Loads: I . Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C, Deflection Limits: 1. Vertical Panel Assemblies: Limited to 1/60 of clear span for each assembly component. 2. Overhead Panel Assemblies: Limited to 11180 of clear span for each assembly component, D. Structural -Test Performance: ASTM E 330. E. Wind borne -Debris- I mpact-Resistance Performance: Provide panel assemblies that pass missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASITM E 1886 and the testing information in ASTM E 1996 for the designated Wind Zone. I . Large -Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade, 2. Smat-Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade, F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide panel assemblies that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minirnum static -air -pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. G, Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient- and surface -temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar treat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. H. Energy Performance: Provide panel assemblies with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below and certified and labeled according to NFRC: I . Thermal TranSulittance (U -Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U -factor of not more than 0.80 Btu/sq. ft. x In x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2� Solar-Heat-GainCoefficient: Fixed glazing and fraluing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.6 as determined according to NFRC 200. 3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.30 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., 2.3 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Components: Thermally broken, extruded aluminum. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1 . Street and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, anclTubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTIM R 429/B 429M. 4, Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous ShinIS for aligning skylight components. D. Fasteners And Accessories: Manufacturers standard, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatiblewith adjacent materials. E� Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTIM A 307, Grade A, galvanized steel. G. Concealed Flashing: Corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet not less than 0.040 inch thick, finished to match framing. 1. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. J. Frame -System Sealants: As recornmended in writing by manufacturer. K. Corrosion -Resistant Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic. 2A FIBERGLASS -SANDWICH PANELS A. Description: Assembly of uniformly colored, translucent, thermoset, fiberglass -reinforced -polymer fare sheets bonded to both sides of a grid core. 1. Self -Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more per ASTM D 1929. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less per ASTM E 84, or 75 or less per ASTM D 2843. 3. Flanne-Spread Index: Not more than 25 per ASTM E 84. 4; Combustibility Classification: Class CC1 per ASTM D 635. 6. Interior Finish Classification: Class A per ASTM E 84. B. Panel Thickness: 2-3/4 inches. C. Panel Strength Characteristics: 6. Maximum Panel Deflection: 3-1/2 inches when a 4 -by -1 2 -foot panel is tested according to ASTM E 72 at 34 lbf/sq. ft., with a maximum 0.090 -inch set deflection after five Minutes. 7. Panel Support Strength: Capable of supporting, without failure, a 300-lbf concentrated load when applied to a 3 -Inch- diameter disk according to ASTM E 661. D. Grid Core: Mechanically interlocked, extruded-alurninurn I-bearns, with a ruinimurn flange width of 7/16 inch. 1 . Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, in alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. [-Beam Construction: Thermally broken, 3. Grid Pattern: Inline rectangle, nominal 12 by 24 inches. E. Exterior Face Sheet: 1 . Thickness: 0.070 inches. 2. Color Crystal. 3. Color Change: Not more than 3.0 units Delta E when measured according to ASTM D 2244, after outdoor weathering in southern Florida compliant with procedures in ASTIM D 1435, with panels mounted facing south. 4. Erosion Protection: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Impact Resistance: No fracture or tear at impact of 70 ft. x lbf by a 3 -1/4 -inch- diameter, 5 -lb freefalling ball according to UL 972 test procedure. F. Interior Face Sheet: 1 . Thickness: 0,045 inch. 2. Color: White. G, Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Adhesive: ASTIM D 2559. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES H. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class 1, 0.018 rnm or thicker. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions. -2. Do not install damaged components, 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonrnovement joints. 5. Install Anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and immobilization of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 6, Metal Protection: Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion -resistant coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closures with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. D. Install components to drain water passing through joints, condensation occurring within aluminum members and panels, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations. F. Erection Tolerances: Install panel assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 7. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding elernent separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch. 8. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet, but no greater than 1/2 inch over total length. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 08952 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09111 - NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PAWF I - GENERAL I, t SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsurn ceilings and soffits. 3. Recessed slotted wall standards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated asserublies that incorporate rion-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 541/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-irich- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Powdef-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing Agency. C.Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth, As indicated on Drawings. E� Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Coid-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-mch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. , a. MinimurnBase-Metal Thickness: 0.0179inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTIM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Min imu in Base Meta I Th ickness: O.Oi79inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-ifich- deep Members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetricalorliatshaped. F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung systern composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch, unless otherwise indicated. .2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch, for the following locations, unless otherwise indicated. a. For 6 inch framing B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: I . Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double -Runner Systern: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness riot less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are hot limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SILD or VerfiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SIFT). 3) Or equal system by USG� C.Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1 , Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179inch. D. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with ruinimurn 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-112 inches, 0,068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shapod, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymtrietrical or hat shaped. G. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, 2, Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with Minimum bare -steel thickness of 0.0312 inch, 3. Tie Wire: ASTIVI A 641/A 341M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0,0475 -inch- diameter wire. 2.4 RECESSED SLOTTED WALL STANDARDS A. Recessed slotted wall standard ernbedded in a 3-5/8" stud. 1. 25 ga. Galvanized steel. 2. I-beam shape of 2 Y�` and 3 5/8" studs as indicated on drawings. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Clenico Elite Standard Systems, (909) 483-0141 C.Finish 1 . Drywall and slotted standard must have flush finish with one another. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel mernbers to substrates. PAtn'3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, forcompliarice with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are 'applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A, Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1 . Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install Supplementary framing, And blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies, D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Fraffle both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they @but or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1 , Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within Ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horiZontal-forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 1110ans. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will riot cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do riot attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach [rangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F, Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross4urring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet [treasured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend frarning full freight to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1 . Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, Install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jarnbs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated, b. Extend jarnb studs through suspended cellings and allich to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frarne openings other than door openings the sarfie as required for door operrings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Parfitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Tra& Where indicated, install to maintain Continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Parfitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. D.Direct Furring: I . Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driveh fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E.Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior cbmers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring Members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flarrge extending beyond corner; on adjacentvVall surface, screw -attach f I f 4 (1 A 11 1 At I f A k 1k 19; h f, -4 t C\1 co _J LL_ 0 LL_ U) LU ._J 0 I.JJ 0 LU 0 L0 (Y') Ra 00 0 LLJ LU 0 LU < (r, UU Z 0 < LU F F_ - L1J M 0 0 IL C:) U) W < cr� .7 CL cc� x 0 ILL SUOR range o lurring CHanne to vvev Q a ac a c Anne. ri e or corners, space secon File- V1 HV MVIU UH HVI U insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces Vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 LU k - Q co -'r U-) co r- Go 0-) ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DATE 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A7m3 SHEET NO. a Vi0 16 C\1 co _J LL_ 0 LL_ U) LU ._J 0 I.JJ 0 LU 0 L0 (Y') Ra 00 0 LLJ LU 0 LU < (r, UU Z 0 < LU F F_ - L1J M 0 0 IL C:) U) W < cr� .7 CL cc� x 0 ILL SUOR range o lurring CHanne to vvev Q a ac a c Anne. ri e or corners, space secon File- V1 HV MVIU UH HVI U insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces Vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 LU k - Q co -'r U-) co r- Go 0-) ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DATE 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A7m3 SHEET NO. SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING '1. 1 SUMMARY A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: "MPI Approved Products List" arid "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." B. Mockups for each color and finish. 1,3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: By Landlord / General Contractor-eng aged agency. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Acceptable Substitutions include: 2. Frazee 3. Benjamin Moore 1.5 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint systern that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under Conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience, 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in Paint System arid on substrate indicated, a. Cherrical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with local requirernents for VOC content. B. Colors: Match Colors as indicated on drawings. 1.6 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: 1.7 METAL PRIMERS (if not shop primed) A. Alkycl Anticorrosive Metal Printer: 1.8 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: 1.9 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1) - ProMar 200 1 . Flat finish in vestibule & sales area (Level 4 above fixtures, Level 5 at Customer Service) 2. See schedule for colors, B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): ProMar 200 1 . Eggshell finish in back of house (offices, hallway, stock) 2. See schedule for colors. 1.10 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum TrOisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: I . Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. I . Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 1.11 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions arid recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicableto substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted, If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. I . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates, C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, arid incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprinie substrate with cornpatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated, D. Concrete Substrates: Rernove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk, Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturers written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Rernove grease arid oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, tightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Wood Substrates: 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying Primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand slinooth when dried. 1. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do riot begin paint application until finishing cornpound is dry and sanded smooth. 1.12 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to [Tian ufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged iterns to match exposed surfaces. B. It undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured filin has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface filuis without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks, Paragraph and subparographs below are examples of painting requirements for mechanical and electrical work. Revise to suit Project. 1,13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A, Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any firrie arid as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: I . Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, arid certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractorwill be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 1.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, rernove rubbish, erupty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage a0acent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 1.15 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. 2. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 11A. 3. Latex Over Latex AggregatG System: MPI INT 3.113, 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 3.1 D, 5. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 M. 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 11C. B. Clay -Masonry Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 4AA. 2, Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.1 D. 3. Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 4.1 B. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 4. 1 M. 5. 1-figh-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 L. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Systern: MPI INT 4.2A. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.2C. 3. Alkycl Over Latex Sealer System: MPI INT 4.2N. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4,2E, 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D. D. Steel Substrates: I . Quick -Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. 2. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer Systern: MPI INT 5.10. 4. Alkyd Systern: MPI I NT 5.1 E. 5. Aluminum Paint Systerin: MPI INT 5.1 M. 6. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.IS. 7. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1 R. E. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.31-1. 2. Latex System: MPI INT 5.3A. 3. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C. 5. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 6.3G. 6. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex Systern: MIN INT 5.3N. 7. High-Perforrilance Architectural Latex System: MIDI INT 6.31`vl� F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H. 2. Alkyd Over Vinyl Wash Primer System: MPI INT 5.4A. 3. Alkyd Over Quick -Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J. 4. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.41). 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.4G. 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI IN'r 5.4F. G. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork. 1 . Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.3T. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.313. 4, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3V. 5. High-Performarice Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.3A. H. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted Plywood. I . Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.4R. 2. Latex Over Alkycl Primer System' MPI INT 6,4A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.4B. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6AT. 5. High-Perfoirmance Architectural Latex System: MPi INT 6.4S. 1. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 6.21). 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.2A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI IN'r 6.2C. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex Systern: MPI INT6.2L, 5. High-Perforinance Architectural Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.213. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPIINT9.2A, 2, Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. 4. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.213. K. 3pray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1 . Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1A, spray applied. 2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.1 E, spray applied. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPIINT9.113. 4. Alkyd (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1C. 5. Alkyd System: MPI INT 9.1 D. END OF SECTION 09912 SECTION 09985 - PREFINISHED PANELS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SU M MARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) resin panels as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2. All fasteners, adhesives, trini and moldings required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 2. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each surface protection system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate, Provide written data on each required component including physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, arid flame resistance. B. Shop drawings showing locations, extent, and installation details of wall arid corner guards, and other protection systems. Show methods of attachmeritto adjoining construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture, provide the manufacturer's standard color chips consisting ofactual sections of each vinyl plastic material required showing the full range of materials, colors and textures available. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualification: Engage an experencod Installer who has previously installed wall surface protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and Containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. B. Store wall surface protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1 . Maintain room temperature within the storage area at riot less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) during the period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface distortion, 2. Store rigid plastic and rigid plastic wall guard In a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is enclosed and weather proof and until the arribient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for riot less than 72 hours prior to beginning of the protection systems until that temperature has been attained and is stabilized. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver riot less than two (2) percent of each type, color and pattern of wall surface protection materials and components. Include accessory components as required, Replacement materials shall be from the same production run as materials installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1 , StructoGlass 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Panels: 1 , Thickness: 0.090" 2, Size: 4 X 8', 9', 10', or 12 (refer to drawings) 3. Installation will be single piece by height required. All joints will be vertical. Horizontal joints will not be accepted. 4, Color: Almond 5. Weight: .07 pounds per square foot 6. Performance a. Abrasion Resistance .038% b. Flame Spread: U.L. Class "A" arid "C" 7. Moldings/Trim: All exposed panel edges shall be finished with appropriate one- piece or two-piece non -staining vinyl extruded moldings. 8. Caulks and Adhesives: Use only high quality construction grade adhesives and clear silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, 9. Fasteners: Fully adhered with adhesive as recOffirriended by manufacturer. Mechanical fasteners shall riot be permitted. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wall systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of components, B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surface free of evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS Coordinate requirements specified in other Sections for subtloor construction and tolerances to ensure that they are appropriate for resilient products selected. A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion ofWork. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Examine the drawings and Specifications to determine the nature and extent of the proposed construction. Perform work to conform to the construction called for in such a manner as riot to interfere with or delay work of other trades. 33 INSTALLATION A. All work shall be properly aligned, be plumb and true, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and byapproved installers. Spans shall not exceed limitations set by the manufacturer, B, All fastenings, mechanical or otherwise, shall conform to the manufacturers standards. C. Moldings, division bars, cap finish strips, bar angles, etc., shall be sealed with a silicone type sealant. 3.4 CLEANING AND DAMAGED MATERIALS A. Upon completion of installation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces and/or remove if unacceptable to the Architect. B. Remove and replace any arid all units, which are damaged or improperly installed. C. Remove all packing materials and excess materials from the site. END OF SECTION 09985 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Stainess-steel toilet Compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. B. Zarnac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc -alloy die castings. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45 -lb density. 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I , Ampco, Inc. B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Floor mounted. C. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung with integral flanges. D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped -arid -formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1, Core Material: Manufacturer's standard SOUnd-deadening honeycomb of resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters, 2. Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. E. Urinal -Screen Construction: I , Integral -Flange, Wall-Hurig Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full -height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick. F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard with manufacturer: G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. H. Brackets (Fittings): 1 � Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 1. Stainless -Steel Finish: No. 4 satin, brushed finish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, ternporary protective covering before shipment. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. I � Material: Chronie-plated zarnac. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufact&er's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with corribination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at cornpartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment-Tiounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2A FABRICATION A. Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts At pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch- wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch- wide, out -swinging doors with a rninimum 32 -inch- wide, dear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturers recommencled anchoring devices. B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; I inch between panels and walls. 3.2 ADJUSTING C. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position, END OF SECTION 10155 SECTION 10265 - IMPACT -RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall guards. 2. Comer guards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For each impact -resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. E. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact -resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years frorn date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL GUARDS B. Crash Rail (Cart Stop): 3. Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 8. McCue Corporation - CartStopSSR. 4. Cover: Stainless steel tubing in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings. 5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection -molded plastic; cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap -On cover. a. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Accessories: Concealed splices arid mounting hardware. 5. Mounting: Rail legs mounted directly to floor. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Acrovyn Corner Guards: 6. Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Construction Specialties, Inc., Model VA -200 7. Vinyl/Aaylic: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn with shadow grain texture. Chemical and stain resistance per ASTM D -13o8 standards as establis hed by the manufacturer. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Guards: 90' surface mounted corner guard with 1 -Y2" legs self adhesive tape backing. 9. Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. B. Surface -Mounted, Stainless Steel Corner Guards: PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. be not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, Clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions. 12 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all cornporierits firmly into position, level and plumb, B. Temperature at the firne of installation must be between 65'-75'F and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation. C. Install impact -resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. I . Install irnpact-resistant wall protection units in locations arid at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, Mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams. D. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, arnmonia-based� household cleaning agent. E. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean vinyl covers and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of wo& 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. .END OF SECTION 10255 7� -5� SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.1 SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL PART I- A. Interior gypsum board. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.1 SUMMARY B. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. A. This Section includes acoustical panels arid exposed suspension systems for ceilings. A. Section Includes: C. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1 . Resilient base. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2, Resilient molding accessories. A. Mockups for the following: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1 Levels of gypsurn board finish for use in exposed locations. A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. . B. Fire-Tost-RespQn5o Characteristics: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2. Texture finishes. 1 . Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products accQrding to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.3 MATERIALS by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 Wlsq. cm. A. Interior Gypsum Board: 2. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS I . Regular type. i Sirroke-Developed Index: 450 or less. A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. 2. Type X. C. SeismiG Standard: Comply with the following: B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. 3, Special Type X: Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X. 1 . Standard for Coiling Suspension Systerns Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. C. Install reMient prodLicts after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 4. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bond to fit radii. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -I -lung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel PART2- PRODUCTS 5. Ceiling 'rype: Manufactured to have rnore sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. Ceilings --Seismic Zones 0-2." 2.1 RESILIENT BASE (VB -1) 6� Foil -backed type. 3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling A. Resilient Base: 7. Abuse -resistant type. Assernblies--Seisirnic Zones 3 & 4." 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 8. Moisture- and inold-resistant type. 4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings." a. Johnsonite. B. Exterior GYPSUITI Board for Ceilings and Soffits: 5. ASCE 7, "Minimun] Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1 . Exterior gypsurn soffit board. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS 1 . Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Glass -mat gypsuin sheathing board. A. Furnish extra materials described below that [notch products installed arid that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). contents. 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Tile -Backing Panels'. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. 1 . Water-resistant gypsum backing board. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. D. Height: 4 inches. 2. Glass -mat, Water-resistant backing board. Ej Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 3. Cementitious backer units. PART2- PRODUCTS F. Outside Corners: Preformed. D. Trim Acc:essories: G. Inside Corners: Preformed. 1 . Interior. 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL H. Finish: Matte. 2. Exterior. A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 1. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings. 3. Aluminum: Extruded profiles. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY ITR -1) E. Texture finishes. C. Attachurent Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design A. Resilient Molding Accessory: requirements. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: END OF SECTION 09250 D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc -coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641 /A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. a. Mats Inc. II Size� Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 firries hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide B. Description: Transition strip for carpet to Vinyl tile. SECTION 09310 - CERAMICTILE not less than 0,106 -inch- diameter wire. C. Material: Vinyl. E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips. D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. PAkT I - GENERAL F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim' Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated. 1.1 SUMMARY design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Section Includes: 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACT -1) A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cemerit-based formulation provided orapproved by 1. Ceramic tile. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: manufacturer for applications indicated. 2. Tile backing panels. 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cortega. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. t.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS B. Classification: Provide fire -resistance -rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and 1 . Type and Form: Type 111, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. PART 3 - EXECUTION identified with labels describing contents. C. Color: White. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, comjpo�ifiori, color, pattern, and size D. LR: Not less than 0.82. 3.1 PREPARATION indicated. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. F, CAC: Not less than 35. B. Sweep and vacuuin clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. PAWIL2 - PRODUCTS G. EdgelJoint Detail: Square. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS H. Thickness: 5/8 inch. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. A, ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI At 37.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, arid other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Tile Type CT -1: Colorkody Porcelain Tile 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACT -2) C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 1 . Product: Daltile, Keystones. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 2. Moisture Absouptiorr Less than .5 percent to less than 20 percent. 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Itic.;Prelude. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3. Size and Shape: 2 inches square, nominal. B. Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold7rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinccoated, or hot -dip 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 4, Surface Finish: Plain. galvanized according to ASTm A 363/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 -inch- wide Inetal cops on flanges. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. 5. Colors: D200 - Desert Gray or as indicated. I . Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient 6. , Trim Units: Matching butnose, cove base corner, Cove base outcomer, shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type. floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. a. Cove Base: Cove, Module size 6 by 6 inch 3. Cap Material: Steel cold -rolled sheet, 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 7. Grout: To match tile 4. Cop Hinish: Painted white. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. C. Tile Type CT -2: Ceramic Wall Tile B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 1. Product: Daltile, Semi gloss. PART3- EXECUTION END OF SECTION 09653 2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .01 percent to less than 20 percent. SECTION 09680 - CARPET 3. Size and Shape: 3 inches by 6 inches, nominal. 3.1 INSTALLATION "Ceiling 1.1 SUMMARY 4. Surface Finish: Semi gloss. A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer�s written instructions and CISCA's Systems Handbook." 5. Colors: 0190 - Arctic White Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width A. This Section includes flooring and flooring installation. 6. Trini Units: Cement Bullnose, Fabric Butnose, Groover Bullnose, Jolly shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile shapes, panels at borders. hangers I . Walk -off mat in Vestibule 2, Flooring in Sales Area and Offices. T Grout: To match tile C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay only D. 'File Type CT -3: Ceramic Wall Tile where required and, if permitted with fire -resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; Offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: "Resilient 1. Product: Dalfie, Semi gloss. equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use 1 . Division 9 Section Floor Tile, Wall Base and Accessories" for materials and installation. 2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .01 percent to less than 20 percent. trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental 1.2 WARRANTY 3. Size and Shape: 6 inches by 6 inches, nominal. support for attachment of hanger Wires. A. Carpet: 3 years. 4. Surface Finish: Semi gloss. 1 . Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. PART2- PRODUCTS 5. Colors: ODM1 VERMILLION 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. 2A MATERIALS 6. Trim Units: Cement Bullnose, Fabric Bullnose, Groover Bullnose, Jolly shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile shapes. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach A. Carpet: 7, Grout: To match tile CT -2 Moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 1 , Flooring in the vestibule will be Enterprise Tile by Mats Inc. Tile size 19 11116" x 19 11/16". Color: Anthracite "Confetti" inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Carpet in the Sales and Offices area shall be Mohawk Carpet, #RS068 - E. Tile Type PCT -1: Porcelain tile. 1. Product! Mohawk - Colorbody Polished Porcelain Tile. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another, Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. a. Contact: Bob Stephens @ 954-605-3100 2. Water Absorption: < 0. 5% F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe arid cut panels at borders and PART3- EXECUTION 3. Size and Shape: 12"x`12" penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 09511 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine subtloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, 4. Thickness' 10 Turn and other conditions affecting performance of carpet, Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 5. Colors: Crystal Beach SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE B, Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those ofthe Carpet 6. Grout: Mapoi Ultra Color Plus - Malt #016 - 1/8" Grout Line PART1 - GENERAL manufacturer. 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI At 36. 1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. A. Section Includes: A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI At 18.1. 1 . Solid vinyl floor tile (LVT). B. Level subtloor within % inch to 10 feet, non -cumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. C. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI Al 18.6; color as noted above. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS Fill depressions. D. Water -Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI At 18.3 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 3. Use leveling arid patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the Carpet manufacturer. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. 2.3 TRANSITION STRIPS A. Maintenance data. D. Broom or vacuum clean subtloors to ho covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subtloors for Moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. A. Manufacturer: Schluter 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete -slab primer, according to inanufacturer's directions, where recommended by the Carpet manufacturer. Model Type: JOLLY A100AT. 3/8" - 1 OMM A. Fire -Test- . Response Clio racteri stics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 3.3 INSTALLATION Finish: Anodized aluminum 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cur. A. Installation Types: Per manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recornmendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of Carpet direction arid lay of pile. At doorways, 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet, A. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for restroom floors and walls. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommencled by manufacturer. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. B. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI Al 18.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. and corners: D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. a. Thickness: 6/8 inch. E. Install floor tile offer other finishing operatefis, including painting, have been completed. 3.4 CLEANING C. Waterproofing Membrane: Mapei, Mapelastic-Mapeguard 2 PART2- PRODUCTS & Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 2.1 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT-1, LVT-2) 1 , Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet Manufacturer. A. : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 2. Reff rove protruding yarns frorn carpet surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 . TajIrna Flooring, Inc. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. a. C.A.S. & Associates, Carol A. Schachtman, 215-776-0484 I EXAMINATION B. Tile Standard: Federal Specifications - SS - T -312B A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation". A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI 1 . Type IV B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the A137.1, and are ready to receive tile. 2. Composition Cl time of Substantial Completion. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces, and are smooth C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. END OF SECTION 09680 and flat within tolerances specified in AN81 A13TI. 1 . Wear Layer: 24 mils C. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions iftest results D. Size, colors and patterns: SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING are not within fruits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. 1 . LVT-I 1.1 SUMMARY D. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. a. Material: Tojima LVT #TAJ-91052K A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 3.2 PRE . PARATION b. Size: 6" x 36" 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Protect surrounding work from damage. c. Color/Pattern: Rosewood A. Quality Standards: "MPI Approved Products List" and "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates. d, Adhesive: Spraylock 6500 or Chapco 299 B. Mockups for each color and finish. C. Vactrurn clean surfaces and darnp clean. 2. LVT-2 (Exterior Pads) 1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. a. Material: Tajima LVT #TAJ-71891 A. Testing: By Owner-erigaged agency. E. Install cementitious backer board !(I accordance with ANSI At 08.11 and board manufacture6 instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat b. Size: 18" x 18" of dry -set mortar to 0 feather edge. c. Color/Pattern: Linen Leaf A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. d. Adhesive: Spraylock 6500 or Chapco 299 limited to, the following: 3,3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 2,2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, rnanuf . acturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds' Latex -modified, portland cernent based or blended hydraulic-ceMent-based formulation provided or approved by 2. Acceptable substitutions include: recommendations. manufacturer for applications indicated. a. 'Frazee B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is Used. Do not interrupt B. -Adhesives: b. Benjamin Moore tile pattern through openings. 1 . LVT: Spraylock 6500 adhesive system or Chapoc, 299 adhesive. 1.5 PAINT, GENERAL C, Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. PART3- EXECUTION A. Material Compatibility: D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or 3.1 LVT PREPARATION 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application excess grout. A. Job Conditions: as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. E; Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. I . The installation of flooring shall proceed only after the work of other trades has been completed especially overhead trades. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat to( use in paint system and on substrate indicated. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. 2. Areas to receive Resilient fearing shall be clean, adequately lighted, fully enclosed, weather tight, and heated to a minimum of 650 to 70o F. for 72 hours before, B. Colors: Match colors as indicated on drawings. G. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. during, and after installation is completed. 1.6 PRIMERS/SEALERS H. install thresholds whore indicated. 3. Heat should be maintained in areas to receive flooring with the building's permanent heating systern. Salamanders and other temporary heating devices should A; Bonding Primer (water Based): MPI #17. 1. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. not be used. B. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systern indicated. J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 4. Installed flooring shall not be exposed to heavy traffic or heavy rolling loads or any type of maintenance procedures until the adhesive has cured for a miniry Turn 1.7 METAL PRIMERS K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.� of 72 hours. A. Alkyd Ant -Corrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79 L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. 5. If emergency conditions require the movement of equipment or furniture, the flooring should be protected with heavy planks or a minimum of 1/2" thick plywood B. Rust Inhibitive Primer (water-based): MPI #107. M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. to prevent damage. C. Waterborne Galvanized -Metal Pirtneir: MPI #134. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS B. Suitable Substrates: D, Quick -Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method Ft 13, dry -set or atex-poldland cement bond coat, with standard 1 . Concrete Substrate: Concrete substrate shall conform to requirements of ASTMF-710-06-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient 1.8 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS 9 rout, unless otherwise indicated. Flooring). A. Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series Color SWO039 - Portrait Tone (P-6). 1. Where Waterproofing Membrane is indicated, install in accordance With TCA Handbook Method F122, with latex-portand cement grout. 2. Concrete subtloors shall be steel troweled finished smooth, flat and level. Concrete shall be wet cured for a minimum of 30 days to 3,500 psi. 8. Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-1 00 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series Color SW6331 - Sarokey Salmon (P-7). 2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F131. 3, Flatness of concrete shall be ± 1/4" in a 10'-0" radius. C. Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-1 00 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series Color SW6358 - Crearnery (P-8). B. Over wood substrates, install in accordance With TCA Handbook Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not apply any type of coatings, surface sealers, hardeners, or curing membranes to the surface of the concrete. These Materials will prevent proper bond of D. Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-1 00 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series Color SW6054 - Canyon Clay (P-9) 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F143. the floor -covering adhesive. L , Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series Color SW6600 - Enticing Red (P-10) 3.5 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE 5, Minor cracks, chips, and spalls shall be patched with cement based patching material, i.e. Ardex or Mapei. 1.9 EXAMINATION A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet roorns. 6. Level high spots by grinding or sanding. Any required leveling shall be done with cement -based underlayment, minimum 3,500 psi, i.e., Ardex or Mapei. A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting B, Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. 7. Patching and underlayment material shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. performance of work. C. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with CA Handbook Method W243, thin -set with dry -set or latex-pQrtlorid cement 8. Concrete and underlayment must be dry; maximurn 5.0 lbs. of moisture per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours as tested by Calcium Chloride Test Kits per R.M.A. test B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with air electronic moisture meter as follows: bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. procedure or less than 75% Relative Humidity per ASTMF2170 test method. Test PH of concrete when using Chapco 299 adhesive - or 7.Olbs/square feet, or I . Concrete: 12 percent. 1. Where Waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at restroorn walls, Install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat Method. less than 85% RH when using the Spraylock 6500 adhesive system. 2. Wood! 15 percent. D. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with CA Handbook Method W202, thin -set with dry -sot or latex-portland cement bond coat. 9. PH shall be <1 0 when using Chapco 299, or PH shall be <1 1 when using Spraylock 6500 3. Plaster: 12 percent. E. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W231, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. 10. If the concrete is contaminated With any type of sealer, hardener, curing membrane, paint, oil, grease, adhesives, and any other type of penetrating material it 4. Gypsum. Board: 12 percent. F. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method VV241 , mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. should be removed thoroughly by bead blasting. Sanding is not adequate and chemicals should not be Used to accomplish removal, After concrete preparation C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions arid compatibility with existing finishes and primers. G, All wall tile (CT -2) shall be installed with the 6" dimension in the horizontal direction. has been completed, sweep and vacuum surface thoroughly to remove all miscellaneous dirt and contaminants. D, Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are d ry. 11. Existing Resilient Flooring' IF TAJIMA TILES ARE TO BE INSTALLED OVER SUITABLE EXISTING RESILIENT FLOORING, A TWO-PART POLYURETHANE .1. Beginning coating application constitutes ContractoCs acceptance of substrates and conditions. A. Clean tile and grout surfaces; ADHESIVE MUST BE USED. 1.10 PREPARATION 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK C. Unsuitable substrates: A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substratet and Paint A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. 1. Particleboard, chipboard, flake board, hard board, lightweight aggregate concrete or gypsum underlayment are not suitable substrates for installation ofvinyl systems indicated. B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt arid residue from other trades. flooring. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items, already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because ofsize or weight C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type walkways. D. Layout: of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. D� ALL porcelain floor tile (new & existing) in the aisles, is to be protected immediately upon installation by the General Contractor w/ '/4" masorifte board 1 . Establish chalk guidelines, which 8re at right angles to each other from which the tile are to be laid. Measure the area to find the best starting point for 1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were rernoved. Remove surface-appled protection if and duct taped at all edges. The GC shall maintain the protection until Substantial Completion, at which time the GC will temporarily remove the maximum size perimeter cuts. any. masonite for the Owner to review and accept the floor. Upon acceptance, the GC shall reinstall the masonite. Upon completion of the fixture installation 3.2 LVT INSTALLATION 2. Do riot paint over labels of Independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. (by others) the GC shall remove and dispose of the masonite protection and clean the floor. A. Before beginning Installation Check actual boxes of all tiles to be sure that correct color of tile, patterri, and quality has been shipped for your specific installation. DO C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. NOT MIX DYELOTS IN THE SAME AREA. I , Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. END OF SECTION 09810 1. Observe wearing surface and back of all tiles to be sure there is no damage or defects. Do not install or glue tile with visible defects. Tiles that may have minor D. Concrete Masonry Unit Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity defects on one side of tile or at edges can be Used for trimming and fitting at walls and columns. of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Lay tiles starting at the center of the roorn working towards the walls. Lay following the directional arrows on back of tiles. E, Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using Methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 3. The perimeter tiles must be cut up to tire wall from the field tile. The perimeter tiles should be accurately scribed against the wall and any projections Coming F. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated froin coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, out from the walls. Cut tiles from the face side with a sharp knife. Do not jam tiles. Keep foot traffic off laid area while installing to prevent shifting. lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 4. Install Tolima LVT tile with Stimylock 6500 adhesive system or Chapco 299 adhesive using a notched trowel with notches 1/1 6"wide by Ill 6"deep, spaced G. Aluminum Substrates: Rernove surface oxidation. 1/1 6"apart; for nofi-pbrous sub -floors use al/32"xl/32x 1/16' notched trowel. H, Wood Substrates: 5. Immediately after spreading the adhesive, roil it with a short nap roller dampened with adhesive to flatten the adhesive ridges. -[his procedure will expedite the 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. set up time and ensure the trowel notch pattern does not telegraph through to the finished floor. When using the "wet-sef' method of installation test the 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. adhesive to see if it has "strings" and is moist to the touch before installing the floor covering. Check periodically to make sure there is full transfer ofadhesivO 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of Wood, to the back of the flooring covering. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 6. Note complete instructions on adhesive containers. 1. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. 7. All corners of tiles shall be butted, not staggered. Planks are to be staggered for uniform and natural look. Square tiles will have an arrow on the back ofthe tile J, Bterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do riot begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. or a line. The square tiles should be installed with the arrow or lines at 90 degree angles to each other in order to accomplish uniformity of color and pattern. 1.11 APPLICATION Layout tiles loosely a minimum of 15 to 20 tiles, to verify uniformity of color and pattern. A. Apply paints according to manufacturers written instructions. 8. If the tiles cannot be installed with a uniform appearance, do not install the floor tiles. I . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 9, Fit tiles carefully and neatly to all pipes, Columns and other obstructions without voids, especially where there will be 110 base installed. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime 10. Within one hour after installation, roll the tiles thoroughly in both directions with a 100-odund roller, to properly seat the tiles into adhesive. Check tiles two to coat only. three hours later and roll again. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 11. F . it tiles properly at walls. Do not over -fit tiles as that will cause them to buckle. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, rollor tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or Other surface imperfections. 12� During installation of tiles, remove any spilled adhesive or adhesive that may be squeezed through joints with a clean white rag dampened with soapy Water. If Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. adhesive has set prior to removal with a darrip rag, it can be removed with mineral spirits solvent. 1A2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 13. Foot traffic is allowed after installation of tile is completed, but heavy traffic should be not allowed for 72 hours. A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period 14. Floor surface should not be cleaned until 72 hours after installation is completed when using the Chapco 299 adhesive - or 24 hours if using Spraylock 6500 when paints are being applied: adhesive systern. I . Owner Will ehgagb the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be 3.3 LVT CLEANING AND PROTECTION taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. A. Protection: 26 Testing agency will perform tests for Compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 0) 0) 1 . The floor is designed to properly support a static load of 450 psi. Furniture, equipment, and rolling loads should not exceed these limits. If they do, legs ofsuch 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show ruaterials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall > equipment and furniture should be properly supported to prevent damage to tiles. Protect floor surface with wood or sheets of plywood whenever heavy remove noncomplying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to equipment or furniture must be moved remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 0 =Y' 2� Chair pads are recommended under chairs with roller casters. 1.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION emwim 3. Felt pads are recommended under chairs with sharp or unprotected edges to prevent scratching. A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials froM Project site. (D 4. Tiles should be properly maintained in accordance with Tajima manufacturer's recommendations. B, After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods, Do not scratch or damage 0 5. ALL LVT, is to be protected irnurediately upon installation by the Gerieral Contractor w/ 20 mil construction paper and duct taped at all edges. The GC shall adjacent finished surfaces. maintain the protection until Fixture Installation begins, at which tirine the GC shall rernove the paper. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as 6. The Fixture Installer is responsible for maintaining the new Condition of the LVT, after GC removes the paper, until fixture installation is complete. Any damaged approved by Architect, and leave in on undamaged condition. LVT & subsequent replacement is the responsibility of the Fixture Installer. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. (D END OF SECTION 09653 END OF SECTION 09911 SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING '1. 1 SUMMARY A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: "MPI Approved Products List" arid "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." B. Mockups for each color and finish. 1,3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: By Landlord / General Contractor-eng aged agency. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Sherwin-Williams Company (The). Acceptable Substitutions include: 2. Frazee 3. Benjamin Moore 1.5 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint systern that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under Conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience, 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in Paint System arid on substrate indicated, a. Cherrical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with local requirernents for VOC content. B. Colors: Match Colors as indicated on drawings. 1.6 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: 1.7 METAL PRIMERS (if not shop primed) A. Alkycl Anticorrosive Metal Printer: 1.8 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: 1.9 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1) - ProMar 200 1 . Flat finish in vestibule & sales area (Level 4 above fixtures, Level 5 at Customer Service) 2. See schedule for colors, B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): ProMar 200 1 . Eggshell finish in back of house (offices, hallway, stock) 2. See schedule for colors. 1.10 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum TrOisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: I . Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. I . Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 1.11 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions arid recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicableto substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted, If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. I . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates, C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, arid incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprinie substrate with cornpatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated, D. Concrete Substrates: Rernove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk, Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturers written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Rernove grease arid oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, tightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Wood Substrates: 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying Primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand slinooth when dried. 1. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do riot begin paint application until finishing cornpound is dry and sanded smooth. 1.12 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to [Tian ufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged iterns to match exposed surfaces. B. It undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured filin has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface filuis without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks, Paragraph and subparographs below are examples of painting requirements for mechanical and electrical work. Revise to suit Project. 1,13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A, Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any firrie arid as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: I . Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, arid certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractorwill be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 1.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, rernove rubbish, erupty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage a0acent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 1.15 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. 2. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 11A. 3. Latex Over Latex AggregatG System: MPI INT 3.113, 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 3.1 D, 5. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 M. 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 11C. B. Clay -Masonry Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 4AA. 2, Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.1 D. 3. Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 4.1 B. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 4. 1 M. 5. 1-figh-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 L. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Systern: MPI INT 4.2A. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.2C. 3. Alkycl Over Latex Sealer System: MPI INT 4.2N. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4,2E, 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D. D. Steel Substrates: I . Quick -Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. 2. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer Systern: MPI INT 5.10. 4. Alkyd Systern: MPI I NT 5.1 E. 5. Aluminum Paint Systerin: MPI INT 5.1 M. 6. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.IS. 7. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1 R. E. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.31-1. 2. Latex System: MPI INT 5.3A. 3. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C. 5. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 6.3G. 6. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex Systern: MIN INT 5.3N. 7. High-Perforrilance Architectural Latex System: MIDI INT 6.31`vl� F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H. 2. Alkyd Over Vinyl Wash Primer System: MPI INT 5.4A. 3. Alkyd Over Quick -Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J. 4. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.41). 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.4G. 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI IN'r 5.4F. G. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork. 1 . Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.3T. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.313. 4, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3V. 5. High-Performarice Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.3A. H. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted Plywood. I . Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.4R. 2. Latex Over Alkycl Primer System' MPI INT 6,4A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.4B. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6AT. 5. High-Perfoirmance Architectural Latex System: MPi INT 6.4S. 1. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 6.21). 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.2A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI IN'r 6.2C. 4. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex Systern: MPI INT6.2L, 5. High-Perforinance Architectural Latex Systern: MPI INT 6.213. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPIINT9.2A, 2, Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. 4. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.213. K. 3pray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1 . Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1A, spray applied. 2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.1 E, spray applied. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPIINT9.113. 4. Alkyd (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1C. 5. Alkyd System: MPI INT 9.1 D. END OF SECTION 09912 SECTION 09985 - PREFINISHED PANELS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SU M MARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) resin panels as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2. All fasteners, adhesives, trini and moldings required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 2. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each surface protection system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate, Provide written data on each required component including physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, arid flame resistance. B. Shop drawings showing locations, extent, and installation details of wall arid corner guards, and other protection systems. Show methods of attachmeritto adjoining construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture, provide the manufacturer's standard color chips consisting ofactual sections of each vinyl plastic material required showing the full range of materials, colors and textures available. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualification: Engage an experencod Installer who has previously installed wall surface protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and Containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. B. Store wall surface protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1 . Maintain room temperature within the storage area at riot less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) during the period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface distortion, 2. Store rigid plastic and rigid plastic wall guard In a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is enclosed and weather proof and until the arribient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for riot less than 72 hours prior to beginning of the protection systems until that temperature has been attained and is stabilized. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver riot less than two (2) percent of each type, color and pattern of wall surface protection materials and components. Include accessory components as required, Replacement materials shall be from the same production run as materials installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1 , StructoGlass 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Panels: 1 , Thickness: 0.090" 2, Size: 4 X 8', 9', 10', or 12 (refer to drawings) 3. Installation will be single piece by height required. All joints will be vertical. Horizontal joints will not be accepted. 4, Color: Almond 5. Weight: .07 pounds per square foot 6. Performance a. Abrasion Resistance .038% b. Flame Spread: U.L. Class "A" arid "C" 7. Moldings/Trim: All exposed panel edges shall be finished with appropriate one- piece or two-piece non -staining vinyl extruded moldings. 8. Caulks and Adhesives: Use only high quality construction grade adhesives and clear silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, 9. Fasteners: Fully adhered with adhesive as recOffirriended by manufacturer. Mechanical fasteners shall riot be permitted. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wall systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of components, B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surface free of evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS Coordinate requirements specified in other Sections for subtloor construction and tolerances to ensure that they are appropriate for resilient products selected. A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion ofWork. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Examine the drawings and Specifications to determine the nature and extent of the proposed construction. Perform work to conform to the construction called for in such a manner as riot to interfere with or delay work of other trades. 33 INSTALLATION A. All work shall be properly aligned, be plumb and true, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and byapproved installers. Spans shall not exceed limitations set by the manufacturer, B, All fastenings, mechanical or otherwise, shall conform to the manufacturers standards. C. Moldings, division bars, cap finish strips, bar angles, etc., shall be sealed with a silicone type sealant. 3.4 CLEANING AND DAMAGED MATERIALS A. Upon completion of installation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces and/or remove if unacceptable to the Architect. B. Remove and replace any arid all units, which are damaged or improperly installed. C. Remove all packing materials and excess materials from the site. END OF SECTION 09985 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Stainess-steel toilet Compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. B. Zarnac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc -alloy die castings. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45 -lb density. 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I , Ampco, Inc. B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Floor mounted. C. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung with integral flanges. D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped -arid -formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1, Core Material: Manufacturer's standard SOUnd-deadening honeycomb of resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters, 2. Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. E. Urinal -Screen Construction: I , Integral -Flange, Wall-Hurig Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full -height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick. F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard with manufacturer: G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. H. Brackets (Fittings): 1 � Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 1. Stainless -Steel Finish: No. 4 satin, brushed finish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, ternporary protective covering before shipment. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. I � Material: Chronie-plated zarnac. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufact&er's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with corribination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at cornpartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment-Tiounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2A FABRICATION A. Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts At pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch- wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch- wide, out -swinging doors with a rninimum 32 -inch- wide, dear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturers recommencled anchoring devices. B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; I inch between panels and walls. 3.2 ADJUSTING C. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position, END OF SECTION 10155 SECTION 10265 - IMPACT -RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall guards. 2. Comer guards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For each impact -resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long. E. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact -resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years frorn date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL GUARDS B. Crash Rail (Cart Stop): 3. Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 8. McCue Corporation - CartStopSSR. 4. Cover: Stainless steel tubing in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings. 5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection -molded plastic; cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap -On cover. a. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Accessories: Concealed splices arid mounting hardware. 5. Mounting: Rail legs mounted directly to floor. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Acrovyn Corner Guards: 6. Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Construction Specialties, Inc., Model VA -200 7. Vinyl/Aaylic: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn with shadow grain texture. Chemical and stain resistance per ASTM D -13o8 standards as establis hed by the manufacturer. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Guards: 90' surface mounted corner guard with 1 -Y2" legs self adhesive tape backing. 9. Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. B. Surface -Mounted, Stainless Steel Corner Guards: PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. be not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, Clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions. 12 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all cornporierits firmly into position, level and plumb, B. Temperature at the firne of installation must be between 65'-75'F and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation. C. Install impact -resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. I . Install irnpact-resistant wall protection units in locations arid at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, Mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams. D. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, arnmonia-based� household cleaning agent. E. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean vinyl covers and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of wo& 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. .END OF SECTION 10255 11 U0J C0 __J 0 U_ UJ __J 0 ILI UJ I- W Q� 0 I ­ Cf) lz:) M I ­ Co 0-0 0 cr_ rr a- 211 0 U) LU Cr 0 LL_ U) Z Z 0 0 0 C0 F- r) Z LU I U) Q 0 0 Li U) LL, cr_ 0 OMMMMMMMMMM B -1, 0", 120, VVIEN! lb, DATE 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A7m4 SHEET NO, 7� -5� TV' P J N A ........ ....... M, .......... N� 11 U0J C0 __J 0 U_ UJ __J 0 ILI UJ I- W Q� 0 I ­ Cf) lz:) M I ­ Co 0-0 0 cr_ rr a- 211 0 U) LU Cr 0 LL_ U) Z Z 0 0 0 C0 F- r) Z LU I U) Q 0 0 Li U) LL, cr_ 0 OMMMMMMMMMM B -1, 0", 120, VVIEN! lb, DATE 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A7m4 SHEET NO, I I I i � 1 �: id��! M� AW ------ SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 11162 - STATIONARY DOCK L[FT 1.1 SUMMARY PARTI - GEN ERAL A. Landlord / General Contractor Furnished Material: Hand -carried fire extinguishers. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Related DOCLAIReLAS: Provisions established within General and SLipplennentary Conditions Of tile Contract, Division t A. Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10. Requirements and Drawings tire collectively appl icable to fl 1.3 WARRANTY 13. Related Sections: A. Materials and Workmanship' Six years. (D I. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Placc Concrete: Corictele pit. 1.4 PRODUCTS 0 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Dock stab arid door protection edge angles. A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mcunting bracket indicated. "A' W�­, 3. Section 05521 - Pipe &I'Libe Railings: PeritlletCf guard rails and itisefts. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, 4. Division 16 - ElecuricaL Connections to (JOCIC C(ILriptneiit. but are not limited to, the following: 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTLON a. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. A. This Section, describes (lie rc([t iiierne tits for providing a doc1c scissors lift as shown on the Drawingand specified, to inch b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. f. Hydraulic Dock Scissor Lift c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde pIc. 13, Concrete work, bor (lock lift(s) as spQci fied in Part 3. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, C. Comply with AN SL M111 (Materiall-landfing Institute) 29. L e. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0 1330. inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Product Data: Submit product data for (lock ectutipiticat. B. Multipurpose Dry-Cliemical Type: UL -rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled C. Shop Drawings: SUbmit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock equipinent including plans, e[eva(ions and I container. D. Maintenance Data: Submit mantlfilCturer's maintenance arid service data, including, address arid teleplione nuttiberofne, C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of C) service representative. fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked -enamel finish. E. Operating MaInIals: Furnish operating and maintenance manuals and advise Owner Oil LISO and maintenance ofeqUiptilet 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that (nay be incorporated into the Work include, 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE but are not limited to, the following: A. Dock Lift Standard: Comply with applicable re(JUirenients of ANSI, MH29.1, ("Safety S(andard for industrial SCiSSOFs L a. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. construction and operation, orclock 1i ft (s). b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. B. Provide manufacturers standard 2 (two) year parts, I (one) year labor warranty. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide dock lift(s) its COn1pICtC Units produced by it Single 111anUfacturer, inclUdilng necess D. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letterl.style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. U) fittings 1 . Identify bracket-niounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. t.5 WARRANTY a. Orientation: Vertical. A. Special Warranty: Prepare and Submit in accordance with Section 0178 36. 1.5 INSTALLATION 1. Manufacturer's standard one-year parts and labor warranty. A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1 . Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers, PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated arid in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2A ACCEPTABLE MAN UFACTUR-ERS I . Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re(JUirements, provide the following: 2. Provide fire extinguishers as indicated on drawings. ful JI 2E 1. Dock Lifts (scissors Lifts): C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. A; 4Front Engineered Solutions - Kelley, t6t2 1A.Utt0t1 Drive, Suite 140, Carrollton, 'Texas 75006 (972) 466-0707 voice, (97 END OF SECTION 10523 323-2661 tacsitnite 0 B. Model ft: KDL68-8 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 2.2 DOCK L[FTS (SCISSORS LIFTS) 1 A SUMMARY A. General: Provide irianui(acturer's standard hydraulic (lock lift of capacity, size, and conslunclion, indicated, consisting ofit A. Furnish and install all toilet accessories. platforin with. beveled toe guards on all IbUr sides, steel scissor teg-s, and hydraulic operating system, complete witli'cotitr 1.2 WARRANTY and accessories required. I A. Silver Spoilage for Mirrors: 15 years. B. Typet Provide stationary singIv-scissor-type hydraulic (lock lift designed f0F perntarrent, recessed installation fit it prefori 1.3 MATERIALS location indicated. A. Grab bars: 18 -gauge heavy-duty tested to withstand pressures of 500 pounds. Bars shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/4" diameter, .064" minimum C. Rated Capacity: Provide filling capacity of not less than lb with lb axle load at ends and lb axle loa wall thickness with 3/16" thick flanges. Bar shall pass through flanges and be brazed thereto. Bars shall be peened grips With polished ends, D. Vertical Travel: Provide inaxiinatin vertical travel of 60 inches froiii it lowered height of inclies for it raised height of B, Waste Receptacle: Surface mounted stainless steel unit. Removable leakproof, rigid molded plastic waste container E. . Travel Speed: Nominal raising speed. or 15 rpin. C. Toilet Paper Holder: Double 5-1/4 inch diameter roll capacity; Type 304 stainless steel with keyed door, surface mounted. F. Construction: Fabricate lift from structural stectshapes rigidly welded and reinforced for maximum strength, safety, and D. Liquid Soap Dispenser: Container body and back Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. Shall dispense soaps, lotions and detergents, 40 fl. oz. capacity, assembly to withstand deformation during both operating arid stored phases of service. Provide mounting brackets arid FC unbreakable refill window, concealed wall fastening, locked hinged stabless steel filler top, vandal -resistant. for case of installation. E. Napkin and Tampon Vendor: 18 gauge door; Type 304 satin finish stainless steel, welded construction; double coln operation. 1. Platforin: Fabricate platfornn front Ineavy steel plate with beveted toe guards on, all four sides to comply with requiret F. Surface Mounted Napkin Disposal: Type 304 stainless steel. Provide matching, hinged, throw-ovet bridges where indicated arid removable liandraits. G. Mirror Unit: it. Platforin Surtface� Nonskid, safety -tread deck plate.Platforna Size; inches wide by inches long 1 . Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.06 inch thick. _ b. Hinged Bridge: Provide hinged, throw -over bridge, heavy-duity, piano -type hinge welded to toe guard at end o 7 2. Corners: Welded and ground smooth, bridge conipletewith licavy-clitty liftingchains. Cliatrifer edge or bridge to Unioinaize obstructing Wheels Of 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, using manufacturer's standard method. inaterial-handhing vehicles, 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. a. Bridge Material: Nonskid, safety -tread steel plate. H. Aerosol Dispenser b. Bridge Size: 18 inches long by 72 inches wide. 1 . Air Delights, Microburst 3000 Aerosol Dispenser #401219 c. Ergonomic Spring assisted Bridge a. Manufacturer: Air Delights, (11 -800-440-5656), www.airdelights.com 2. Scissor Mechanism: Fabricate leg inerabers from heavy, steel formed tube members to provide inaXIAILIM strength an b. Proactive Display (LCD) 3. Cyfinders� Ecluip lift with riot less than two heavy-duty, high -press tire, hydratitic, raiii-styte cylinders. Rains shall be c. Color: White Plunger type with positive internal stops as standard by manufacturer; Cylinder rods shall be chronae plated and polished d. Keyless Lock 4. Bearings: Provide pivot points with set f-lUbricating, Ii fetime Self lubricating bushings for minimum maiii(enaiice. e. Provide 2 case packs (12 Cans) of aerosol with each dispenser installed. it. Operation: Provide mamitiacturer's standard, self-contained, electric, hydraulic power unit for raising and I 1.4 FABRICATION controlled from it remotely located push-button station. A. General: Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. 5. Electrical Requirements; Coordinate wiring reqUifen-1011tS and current characteristics with building electrical system. B. Sections and shapes shall be rolled, formed, drawn or extruded as required for respective functions. 6. Power Unit: Provide lninnlf�aCtLlrcr's standard, se I F-contai tied, remotely located power Limit ot'size, type, arid opefaitioi C. Moulded work shall have sharply defined profile and shall be Clean and straight. Plain work shall be leveled, straight and surfaces true and smooth. of lift indicated. Power Limit shall consist ofir TEFC motor, high-pLeSSLIfe gear pump, valve inininifold and oil reservoir. Edges, angles, and corners shall be square, clean and sharp, unless otherwise detailed. a. Manifold shall contain it relief valve, check valve, preSSLne-CO111peuSated flow-contirot valve and solenoid D. Fastenings, exposed metal fastenings, and accessories, unless Underwriters' prohibit for safety, shall be of same materials, texture, color and finish as b. Speed control; Provide nianufacturcr's standard pressure compensated flow control to maintain rated spee the base metal to which applied. loaded or tinloaded, E. Molds, trim, frames and other metalwork shall be proper dimensions to receive masonry block and tile, plaster, ceramic tile, etc. c. Free -fall protection: Provide a IiydraU1iC Velocity Fuse at each cylinder to prevent the lift platrorin from fre 1.5 INSTALLATION of it severed hydraulic hose or broken thydrinific fitting. A, All items specified under this Section shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturees recommendations and details on Plan. d. Oil sight gatige ini (lie reservoir to detenniliC Oil level. B. Grab bars shall be screwed to solid blocking in stud partitions, e. Manual lowering valve located on power pack in case of power loss C. Toilet Accessories: 7. Remote located Control Stintion: Provide it weatherproof, imilti-button control station of the constant-presst ire type w I I See drawings for manufacturer, quantity arid location. END OF SECTION 10801 tip and down push buttons. Controller shall consist of a magnetic motor starter with three potc-adjustabte overloads; and I 15-V DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT transforiner with it fused secondary prewited to terminal strips and enclosed in. a NEMA , Type f2 box. it. Upper-Travcl�Lnnit Switch' E(lUip unit with manufacturer's stan(hird, adjUSUIbIC, Lipper- travel- limit switc SECTION 11022 - LOCK BOXES 8. Safety Devices: Provide ManUfacniter's standind and original safety devices its follows: PART1 - GENERAL a. Rerriovable Handrails: Provide removable handrails on two sides of platform with it single, rennovable chir 1.1 SUMMARY b. 11andrails shall be 42 inches high. with a naid-rait arid 4-itich-high kick plate at bottom. Mount fail sockets A. Section includes fire -rated, high security industrial/governmental key boxes. surface. 1.2 SUBMITTALS C. Maintenance Leg: Provide 1][1,1111.1filetLEFC17'S standard safety inainitenatice le-, B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. d. Toe Protection: Provide manufacturer's standard toe protection along entire unprotected side(s) of lift. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 9. f�inish arid Color: ManuftletUrer's standard paint applied to factory-assenib led and teste(I dock fifts before shipping. I D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, with yellow and black stripes to comply with ANSIZ535.1, and pand remainder of surfaces in manufacourer's standar E. Product test reports. PAR:r 3 - EXECUTION F. Operation and maintenance data. 3.1 DOCK-L[FT INSTALLATION 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate rorming recessed pit for dock tills to ensure that depth is adectUate to accommodate lift in proper relation to to G. Standard: UL Listed. B. Attach dock lift Securely, recording to ntantlfilCtffer's written instructions. PART2- PRODUCTS 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Make necessary adjL[SnuentS fbi" safe, efficicilt operation of loading dock C(tUipiliCut. H. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: B. After installation, restore marred abraded surfaces to the original condition. I . Knox Company, 1601 W. Deer Valley Road, Phoenix, AZ 85027, 800-552-5669 END OF SECTION 11162 a. Knox -Box 3200 Series, Hinged Door Model 2.2 MATERIALS A. Exterior Dimensions: 1 . Recessed mount flange: TH x 7"W B. Lock: UL Listed. Double -action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by a biased cut key. C. Finish: Knox -Coat@ proprietary finishing process D. Colors: Black, Dark Bronze or Aluminum, as indicated. PART3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install key box assemblies complete with doors, frames, and accessories and according to requirements of fire -rated vault door assemblies' UL listing. B. Set key box frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. Ad just door hardware and operating mechanism to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 11022 SECTION 11161 - HYDRAULIC DOCK LEVELER PART I. - GENERAL Lt SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Factory assembled dock leveler with subirame, crossover lip, counter balanced platform, operating lever, and truck bumpers. 2. Installation and Owner's Manual. B. Related Sections: 1 . Section 11164 - Seals and Shelters L2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for dock leveler equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock levelers including plans, elevations and large-scale details. 1 . Show anchorage, pit sizes, critical installation clearances, connections, and accessory items. -2. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. C. Informational Submittals: Subunit following: 1 . Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance of dock leveler for indicated capacity. 2. Manufacturer's instructions. D. Closeout Submittals; Submit following in accordance with Section 01180. 1. Maintenance data. 2. Warranty: Specified warranty. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AN8I/ASME mH 14.1 1987,'Loading Dock Levelers and Dock boards," 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Single Source Responsibility: Each Component of dock leveler is required to be from same manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manuf actudirig Products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Approved in writing by manufacturer with documented experience on at least five ptojects of similar nature in past five years. D. Regulatory Requirements: In compliance with ANSI MH 14.1 and CS 202 plus applicable OSHA requirements. E. Certifications: Submit manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer to hold current ISO 9002 certification 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Division I requirernents. 1 . Manufacturer's standard 1 myear parts & labor warranty. Prorated 1 0 -year structural warranty available upon engineering approval of written application. PAR -T 2 - PRODUCTS 2.t MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1, Lever Series - Model EM as manufactured by Nordock Inc, A. Or equal by Kelley Company, 22 DOCK LEVELERS A. System Description: 1 . Lever Series: Hinged lip, manual, recessed (Type I & III Real Estate Deals) or front of wall Mounted (Type III Real Estate Deals) dock leveler to the following requirements: A. Nominal Size:6'-O" wide x 16" Lip Length B, Capacity: 20,000 lbs. per ANSUASME MH 14A 1987. C. Service Range: Five inches above dock level and Five inches below dock level, D. Lip projection: 12 inches beyond front face of standard 4" bumpers with a 16" long lip. B. Equipment: 1 . Curb angle: 1 -piece 5 x 5 x 3/8 inch angle iron with concrete anchors for the leading edge of floor, full width of door opening. Pit Mounted units require an additional 7 -piece frame of 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch angle iron. C. Dock Leveler: 1 . Ramp: Steel tread plate deck and lugs to be constructed of 50 -55,000 -psi yield material. Ramp to be continuously weld I ed to the deck lugs and full width rear piano hinge, Front and rear hinge rods to be zinc plated SAE 1045, factory coated with anti -seize lubricant. 2. Lip: Steel tread plate lip and lugs to be constructed of 60 -65,000 -psi yield material. Lugs to be continuously Welded to lip plate. Plate to be full width ofdeck, non-tapered with leading edge charinfer milled at maximum 15 degrees. 3. Subframe: Welded assembly to have a full width rear hinge and three solid steel deck supports. Anchor holes to be provided for bolting to the building foundation wall. 4. Bumpers' Extension blocks io be closed on all sides with a 4" projection bumper attached to front face. Total projection not to exceed 18" from the foundation wall. Bumper to be 10" Wide x 13" High Molded Type. Anchor holes to be provided for bolting to the wall for additional support. 5. Manual System: Ramp to be spring counter -balanced and operated with a galvanized lever placed in the Integral deck pocket by the attendant. Pulling back and then forward on the lever extends the lip automatically into the truck. Lip to unlock when in the service range zone, Ramp shall be free to float with the up and down Movement of the truck bed, Deck and lip to automatically return to stored position, protected by the dock bumpers, if the truck pulls away, 6. Finish' All surfaces to be degr�ased and painted with high solid machinery enamel. Provide standard manufacturers color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3A PREPARATION A. Provide curb angles for setting pit edges. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install to building foundation or in prepared pit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust installed unit for smooth, safe, efficient and balanced operation. B. Remove temporary labels and coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. C. Repair or replace damaged products. D. Remove construction debris from site and dispose, 3.4 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. Provide bound copy of manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual at time of instruction. EN D OF SECTION1 116`1 K 1� 0) ITEM, vi 0') 0 LU M (D 0 0 "A' W�­, rr UJI LIJ rn 0 SECTION 11164 -DOCK SEALS& SHELTER PART I - GENERAL 1.01 - WORK INCLUDED enerat A; Factor y assef nbled unit wid i necessary niou riling hardware. lis Section, B. Installation arid Owners Manual. 1.02 - RELATED WORK A. Section 11161 - Dock Levelers. 1.03 - REFERENCES A. Government Test Method Standard No. 191A for fabric. 1.04 - DESCRIPTION A. Door Size - Unit shall accommodate an opening size of 8'-O"wide x 9'-0" high. ide: B. Dock Height - Loading Dock height shall be 12". 1.05 - SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Installation Instructions. B. Submit clitriensionaldrawing. C. Submit specification sheet. PART2- PRODUCTS 1.06 - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODEL arge-scale details. A. Model DSH as manufactured by Kelley Tufseal, Muskego, WI. irest authorized 1.07 - EQUIPMENT A. COMPONENTS: Each unit shall consist of (2) two side pads and (1) one head curtain. it. B. HEAD CURTAIN: Curtain drop shall be 6" lower than the lowest trailer/truck to be serviced and will include splits with hook and loop. The curtain length shall be equal to the overall unit width. ifts") for C. PROJECTION: Overall unit projection shall be 4" to 6" beyond the face of tile dock bumpers. D. UNIT CONSTRUCTION: The framing shall be roll -formed galvanized steel. The base fabric shall enclose a polyurethane foam core, which is chemically bonded to the steel frame. The cover shall be double hemmed on all edges and fastened to the side leg of the steel framing with Tek screws inserted ary accessories arid through load spreading washers. The unit.shall also include full length yellow guide stripes. E WARRANTY: Unit shall include the Manufacturers standard (5) year frame warranty and a (1) one year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship on the remaining components. PART3- EXECUTION 1.08 - INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Caulk between the building wall and unit. END OF SECTION 11164 SECTION 11785 - TV ANTENNA PART1- GENERAL 2) 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. TV Antennas. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS lionslip steel A. Product Data: For each type of product ols, safely devices, 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A, Operation and maintenance data. ed concrete pit at 1A WARRANTY B. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in ds -,it sides materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. inches. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2- PRODUCTS stability. Design 2.1 ANTENNAS inovabte lifting eyes A. Amplifed HD TV Antenna 1 . Radio Shack, Model # 15-254, Catalog #: 15-254 lients of M1129. 1. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. f platform. Provide B. Install per manufacturers recommendations. C. Utilities4 Comply with electrical requirements. END OF SECTION 11785 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT d rigidity. SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS chrect-displacement PART1 GENERAL to prevent rLiSting. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A, This specification is intended to cover the complete furnishing and installing of one (1) oil hydraulic passenger elevator. All work shall be performed in a Oweting lift, workmanlike manner and is to include all work and material in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. i needed for capacity B. Any inquiries related to this elevator should be directed to Linda Lewis, Schindler Elevator Corporation, 973-397-6576. 1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS valve. A. General contractor shall provide the following requirements which shall be in accordance with the requirements of the ASME A17.1 Code plus applicable d when the lift is Model Building Code. For specific rules, refer to AS ME A17.1, Section 300 for hydrau I ic elevators. State or loca I requirements must be used if more stringent. e falling in the event 1. Clear, plumb hoistway, with variations not to exceed 1/2" at any point. Minimum two (2) hours of fire resistance rating of hatch walls. 2. 15' Bevel guards on all projections, recesses or setbacks over 2" except for loading or unloading. 3. Supports for rail brackets at pit, each floor and roof. Maximurn allowable vertical spacing of rail supports, without backing. Divider beams between hoistway at each floor and roof, for guide rail bracket supports. i(h NEMA 4x rated 4. Light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway (or in the machine room) as indicated by elevator contractor. AC control 5. Recesses, supports, and patching, as required, to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc. 6. All barricades outside elevator hoistways as required. It. 7. Dry pit reinforced to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. Pit floor to be level and free of debris. 8. Convenience outlet and light fixture in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. in across each end, 9. . Where access to the pit is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, vertical ladder of non combustible material extending 42" minimum above sill of flush. with platform. access door or handgrips shall be provided to the saine height. 10. Enclosed and protected machine roOrfl. `11� Access to the machine room and machinery space as required by tire governing code or authority. 12. Lighting, convenience outlets, heating, cooling and ventilation of machine room, and machinery space. 11-ovide toe guards 13. Machine room temperature to be maintained between 56' F and 90' F. d color. 14. A fused disconnect switch for each elevator and light switch located per the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70), arid where practicable, located inside the Machine room adjacent to the door. 15, Suitable copper feeder, ground and branch wiring circuits for signal system and power operated door, included ruain line switch. Feeder arid branch ading platforin. wiring circuits for Car light and fan, including main line switch. 16. Clear access above ceiling, or metal/concrete raceways in floor, for oil line and wiring duct from machine room, if machine room is remote from elevator hoistway. 17. Convenience outlet and telephone outlet on control panel. 18. Cutout through machine room wall, 8" x 16", for oil line and wiring duct. Coordinate with elevator Contractor at the building site. 19. All conduit and wire runs remote from either the machine room or tile hoistways. 20. Hoisting beams, trap doors, ladders or stairs and other means of access to machine room for maintenance and equipment removal purposes. 21. Heat, smoke or products of combustion sensing devices connected to elevator machine room terminals when such devices are required. Make contacts on the sensors should be sided for 120 volt D.C. 22. Furnish and install finished flooring in elevator cab. 23. Entrance walls and finished floors are not to be constructed until after door frames and sills are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. When drywall construction is used, the general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the Wall fire resistance rating is maintained. 24. Where drywall or street rock construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor. 25. Door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place to maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction). 26. The interface of the elevator wall with the hoistway entrance assembly shall be in strict compliance with the elevator contractor's requirernents. 27. Filling and grouting around entrances by general contractor as required. 28. For sill support by the elevator contractor, hoistway capable of accepting anchor stud type fasteners must be provided. 29, When fixtures are mounted in drywall, wall thicknesses may increase. The general contractor must coordinate requirements with the elevator contractor. 30. Where openings occur, all walls and sill supports must be plumb. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All designs, clearances, construction, workmanship and material, unless specifically excepted, shall be in accordance with the requirements ofthe ASME code, handicap accessibility, Annericans with Disabilities Act and all codes having legal jurisdiction include requirements or which conflict with the ASME code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: After structural and architectural drawings are furnished, submit complete working drawings, showing the location of all equipment, loads, and all other information necessary to render a totally functional elevator to the owner. B. Samples' Provide finish color selection brochures. C. Schematics: Provide wiring diagrams at time of final acceptance. D. Maintenance Manuals: Provide Renewal Parts Catalogs and Maintenance Instructions as well as two sets of equipment keys at time of final acceptance. 1.05 TEMPORARY USE A. Temporary use of the car shall be negotiated with the elevator contractor if required and shall be in accordance with the terms and conditions of the elevator contractor's temporary acceptance form. 1.06 WARRANTY - A. Guarantee the material and workmanship of the equipment installed by him under these specifications and make good any defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use which may develop within one year after the completion of the installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial Use, whichever is earlier. 1.07 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION A. Any proprietary Material, information or data contained in any component or feature of this equipment remains the property of the elevator contractor. This includes but is not limited to tools, devices, manuals, software, source codes, access codes, objects and passwords. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A, Furnish Regular Maintenance service for a period of 12 months on each unit completed under this contract after the completion of t he installation, or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. B, Provide trained employees to make periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and the replacing of parts to keep the elevator in operation, except parts which require replacement because of accidents, misuse, or negligence by parties other than the elevator contractor. C. Provide emergency call-back service 24 hours 7 days a week, D. Elevator Control System: 1 . Include built-in remote diagnostic module to relay constant status of elevators and control system to a 24-hour, 7 -days -a -week central -monitoring facility. 2. Remote Monitoring Device: Transmit information on current status of elevators, including malfunctions, system errors, and shutdown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS A. Elevator Equipment Summary: One (1) Oil Hydraulic Passenger Elevator Application: Dual Piston Holeless Service: Hospital Service Capacity: 4,500 lb. Speed: 125 fpm Travel: 16 feet 0 inches, or as required Landings: 2 Openings: 2 openings in line as required per project; alternate 1 front and 1 rear opening Overhead and Pit: Pit depth 4'-0"; overhead 12'-3" rninimurn Operation: M I icroprocessor Single Car Automatic Operation Machine Room: Adjacent to hoistway at lowest level served Platform Size: 64' Wide x 8'-9' Deep; with rear openings 9'-4 1/2" Deep Cat Inside Size: 5'-8" Wide x T-9 112" Deep; with rear openings T-10" Deep Holstway Size: T-4" Wide x Y-6 1/2" Deep; with rear openings 10'-8" Deep Guide Rails (lbs.): 16 lb. per square foot Hoistmy Entrances: 4'-0" wide X T-10" high 2SSO doors with baked enamel finish Car Enclosure: Steel with baked enamel finish Power Supply: 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz Contract Maintenance: 12 months with emergency callback service, 24 hours 7 days a week. Additional Features: Anti -Stall Feature Braille and Audible Signals Door Open and Close Stall Protection Emergency Lighting Firefighter's Service, sensors by others Independent Service Feature Infrared Light Curtain Door Protection Low Oil Return Oil Cooler (Heat Exchanger) Overload Sensors Phase Protection Remote Monitoring Capable Rescue Feature (Battery Lowering) Certificate Frame Electronic (Soft Start) Starting Telephone (ADA Compliant) Upgraded Travel Cable for Camera when required B. Plastic laminates when used shall be general purpose type and meet flame spread ratings as required by code. C. Motors, purrips, valves, fluid tank, hydraulic fluid, microprocessor controller, controls, pushbuttons and wiring shall be UL or CSA approved. D. Spring buffers, attachment brackets and anchors shall be designed and sized according to code with safety factors. E. Pump shall be of the positive displacement screw type, designed for steady discharge with minimal pulsations. Provide the following: 1 . Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel -cage induction motor, suspended inside tank from vibration isolation mounts. 2. Provide heavy duty motor, designed for heavy usage with solid-state starting. 3. Provide larger tank to increase t he internal mass of the oil and allow for a slower increase in oil temperature, plus more surface area for heat dissipation. 4. Provide heat exchanger (oil cooler) to assist power unit in dissipation of heat. F. A holeless dual jack system that Utilizes two mechanically synchronized jacks shall be provided. The jacks are located at each side of the car and connected to the elevator structure. Air external mechanical assembly shall be used to synchronize the jack section movement as the elevator travels up and down the hoistway, if two or more jack stages are applied. G, Cab Enclosure 1. Steel side and rear walls finished in E035 Black Satin baked enameled steel with Wilsonart Gunstock Walnut W313A-60 plastic laminate decorative panels. 2. Suspended anodized aluminum tee frame ceiling with flat Lexan or aluminum egocrate panels. 3. Lighting: Fluorescent. 4. Front Returns, Transoms: Returns shall be of integral construction. Finished in brushed stainless steel. 5. Cab doors shall be flush design both sides, rib construction, finished in brushed stainless steel. 6. Ventilation: Mount art exhaust fan in cab transorn or canopy. 7. Handrail: Provide a 1/2" x 2" flat handrail in brushed stainless steel mounted on the side and rear walls (side walls for front and roar opening applications), 8. Threshold: Extruded alurninurn. 9. Cab Flooring: Provide 3/8" recess for finish flooring to be furnished arid installed by others. 10. Certificate Frame: Provide a separate certificate frame in #4 stainless steel finish. H. Hoistway Entrances 1. Provide doors of rigid flush panel construction containing sound -deadening material. Securely fasten frarnes at the corners to form a unittraine. Frames shall be bolted. 2. Exposed areas of the corridor doors and frames at all floors shall be UL labeled and finished in E01 1 Dove Grey baked enameled steel. 3, Provide extruded aluminum sills at all floors. 1. Signal Fixtures 1 . Mount main car operating panel in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Provide vandal resistant pushbuttons and illuminating indications for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches per code. Provide switches for car light and accessories. 2. Provide the following cab fixtures: I Car Lantern, Digital Car Position Indicator, Hands -Free Telephone (ADA compliant), Locking Service Panel, Certificate Frame 3. Hall Pushbuttons: An up button and down button at intermediate floors and a single button at each terminal floor at a freight to comply with handicap requirements. 4. Provide #4 stainless steel vandal resistant hall fixtures. Mount fixture cover plates with tamper resistant fasteners in the same finish. 5. Hall fixtures to be integral in the elevator entrance jambs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, holstway openings, pits and machine roorris as constructed. Verify that hoistway, pit, machine room and openings are of correct size and within tolerance and are ready for work of this section. Notify General Contractor in writing of any dimerisional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. B. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. C. Arrange for temporary electrical power to be available for installation work and testing of elevator components. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the elevator in accordance with accepted manufacturer's instructions. Install machine room components with the proper clearances as required by Code. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. 3.03 TESTING A. Obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal and State permits and at his expense make all tests as required by governing codes. B. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for inspection arid testing. Have acceptance inspection, required by local authority, performed by enforcing agency. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjustments: I . Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. 2. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at any landing an the corridor side unless the car is at rest at that landing, or is in the leveling zone and stopping at that landing. 3. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve within %" of the landing, B. Clean Up: 1 . Remove from hoistway surfaces all loose materials and filings resulting from this work 2. Clean machine room floor of dirt, oil and grease 3. Remove crating and packing materials from premises. 3.05 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND MECHANIC STANDBY A. Instruct Owners Personnel: Provide a competent instructor or instructors for a period of four hours, at a mutually agreed upon time prior to store opening, to instruct the store management and/or appointed personnel in the proper operation and general care of the elevator equipment. Review of manuals, docurnentation, Warranties, safety, use of cleaning materials and service call procedures with store personnel will be included. Instruct store personnel in the operation of special security features, when applicable. Provide to store management four sets of equipment keys. Performance of this training shall not be prerequisite of payment or the release of retainage due to the elevator contractor. B. Mechanic Standby: Provide standby mechanic for two (2) Grand Opening days, 10 am to 10 pin Friday arid Saturday. END OF SECTION 14240 SECTION 14245 - HYDRAULIC FREIGHT ELEVATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This specification is intended to cover the complete furnishing arid installing of one (1) oil hydraulic freight elevator. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner arid is to include all work and material in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation. B. Any inquiries related to this elevator should be directed to Linda Lewis, Schindler Elevator Corporation, 973-397-6576. 1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS A. General contractor shall provide the following requirements which shall be in accordance with the requirements of the ASME A17.1 Code plus applicable Model Building Code. For specific rules, refer to ASME At 7.1, Section 300 for hydraulic elevators. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. 1 . A properly framed and enclosed legal hoistway, including venting as required by the governing code or authority. 2. Suitable machine room with legal access and ventilation, concrete floor. Machine room temperature to be maintained between 60' F and 80' F. 3. Adequate rail bracket supports, bracket spacing as required by governing code. Divider beams where required. 4. Dry pit reinforced to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and impact loads from buffer and cylinder. 5. Furnish and install channel frames. Frames to be plumb, one above the other, and square with the channel, 6. Hoistway walls are to be designed and constructed in accordance with the required fire rating including where penetrated by elevator fixture boxes and to include adequate fastening to hoistway entrance assemblies. 7. Any cutting, including Cutouts to accommodate hall signal fixtures, patching and painting of walls, floors or partitions together With finish painting of entrance doors and frames. 8. All electric power for lights, tools, hoists, etc., during erection as well as electric current for starting, testing and adjusting the elevator. 9. A fused disconnect switch for each elevator per the National Electrical Code with feeder or branch wiring to controller. Size to suit elevator Contractor. Disconnect to include separate ground wires from disconnect to elevator controller. 10. A 120 volt, AC, 20 amp, single phase power supply with fused SPST lockable disconnect switch for each elevator, with feeder wiring to each controller for car lights. 11. Suitable light and Goinvenlence outlets in machine room with light switches located within 18 inches of lock jamb side of machine room door. 12. Venting Of Iflachine room. 13. Convenience outlet and light fixture in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. 14. Clear access above ceiling, or metal/concrete raceways in floor, for oil line and wiring duct from machine room, if machine room is remote frorn elevator hoistway. 15. Convenience outlet and telephone outlet on control panel. 16. Cutout through machine roorn wall, 8" x 16", for oil line and wiring duct. Coordinate with elevator contractor at the building site. 17. All conduit arid wire runs rernote from either the machine room or the hoistways. 18. Hoisting beams, trap doors, ladders or stairs and other means of access to machine room for maintenance and equipment removal purposes. 19. Provide smoke sensors at each floor and the elevator machine room. Bring back a pair of wires, to the controller. These wires will be hooked on the N/C or N10 terminals of each controller. 20, Entrance walls and finished floors are not to be constructed until after door frarnes and sills are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. When drywall construction is used, the general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained. 21. Filling and grouting around entrances by general contractor as required. 22. Guarding and protecting the hoistway during construction. The protection of the holstway shall include solid panels surrounding each hoistway opening at each floor, a ruinimum of 48 inches high. Hoistway guards to be erected, maintained and removed by others. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All designs, clearances, construction, workmanship and material, unless specifically excepted, shall be in accordance with the requirements ofthe ASME code, handicap accessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act and all codes having legal jurisdiction include requirements or which conflict with the ASME code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: After structural and architectural drawings are furnished, submit complete working drawings, showing tile location of all equipment, loads, and all other information necessary to render a totally functional elevator to the owner. B. Product Data: Provide cab, entrance and fixture drawings. C. Schematics: Provide wiring diagrams, D. Owners Manuals: Provide renewal parts data. 1.05 TEMPORARY USE A. Temporary use of the car shall be negotiated with the elevator contractor if required and shall be in accordance with the terms and conditions of the elevator contractors temporary acceptance form. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Guarantee the material and workmanship of the equipment installed by hini under these specifications and make good any defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use which may develop within one year after the cornpletion of the installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. 1.07 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION A. Any proprietary material, information or data contained in any component or feature of this equipment remains the property of the escalator contractor. This includes but is riot limited to tools, devices, manuals, software, source Codes, access codes, objects and passwords. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish Regular Maintenance service for a period of 12 months on each unit completed under this Contract after the completion of the installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever Is earlier. B. Provide trained employees to inake periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and the replacing of parts to keep the elevator in operation, except parts which require replacement because of accidents, misuse, or negligence by parties other I than the elevator contractor. C. Provide emergency call-back service 24 hours 7 days a week. D. Elevator Control Sys tem: 23. Include built-in remote diagnostic module to relay constant status of elevators and control system to a 24-hour, 7 -days -a -week central-morifforing facility. 24. Remote Monitoring Device: Transmit information on current status of elevators, including malfunctions, system errors, and shutdown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS A. Elevator Equipment Summary: One (1) Oil Hydraulic Freight Elevator Application: Dual Piston Holeless - Service: Freight Elevator to serve Stock Area Capacity: 6,000 lb., Class C3 Loading Speed: 50 fpm Travel: 16 feet 0 inches, oras required Landings: 2 Openings: 2 in line; alternate 1 front and I rear opening as required Control: Microprocessor based Operation: Single Automatic Push Button Machine Room: Adjacent to hoistway at lowest level served Platform Size: 1 0A" Wide x 12'-0" Deep Hoistway Size: 12'-4" Wide x 12'-8" Deep; with rear openings 12'-10" deep Overhead arid Pit' Pit depth 4'-6" minimum; overhead 4-6" minimum Guide Rails (lb.): 16 lb. per square foot Hoistway Entrances: 10'-0" wide x 8'-0" high vertical biparting power doors Car Enclosure: 14 gauge steel, enamel finish, 8'4' high from finished floor to underside of canopy Power Supply: 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz Contract Maintenance: 12 months with emergency callback service, 24 hours 7 days a week. Additional Features: Auto Open Light Auto Close Buzzer and Light Emergency Light Firefighter's Service, sensors by others In -Use light Oil Cooler (Heat Exchanger) Phase Protection Electronic (Soft Start) Starting Remote Monitoring Capable Telephone (Handswf`ree ADA Compliant) B. Cylinder and Plunger (Jack Unit) I . The cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficient thickness and suitable for the operating pressure per Current ANSI Code. The top of the cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with drip ring and self adjusting packing. 2. The plunger shall be Constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of proper diameter ifiachined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. The plunger shall be provided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. 3. The plungeir and cylinder' shall be installed plumb and must operate freely with minimum friction. C. Purnping Unit 1. The pumping unit shall be a submersible design and shall include an electric motor connected to a pump, a hydraulic; control systern, storage tank, necessary piping connection and silencer, all compactly designed. D. Pump 1. The pump shall be a positive displacement submersible screw type to give smooth operation and shall be specially designed and manufactured for elevator service. E. Motor 1 . The motor shall be of the alternating current, poly -phase squirrel cage induction type and shall be of a design especially adapted to electro -hydraulic submersible requirements. F. Storage Tank 1 . Construct the storage tank of 11 gauge steel and provide 8 removable cover containing a removable oil dip stick. The pump and submersible motor shall be mounted on a special reinforced isolation mount in the bottom of the tank. The control valve shall be mounted in the discharge line a . bove the oil level and easily accessible from the top of the tank, The control valve shall hot be mounted external of the tank. Provide an initial supply of oil sufficient for proper operation. G. Piping 1 . Pipe of adequate size and seamless schedule 80 thickness shall be installed between the pumping unit and the cylinder head, Provide a shut-off valve in the machine room and pit for maintenance and adjusting purposes. H. Hoistway Operating Devices 1 . Normal terminal stopping devices shall be provided. When an emergency terminal stopping device is also required, it shall be furnished and the controller switches arid Circuitry arranged in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI Code. 1. Pit Switch 1 , Locate an emergency stop switch in the pit. J. Platform 1 . The car platform shall be of steel construction with channel iron stringers and a non-skid steel surface. 2. Too guards to be minimum 12 gauge steel. K. Car Frame I . Provide a suitable car frame fabricated from structural steel members with adequate bracing to support the platform and Car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car frame plank members must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches its down limit of travel. Guide shoes to be solid cast iron. L. Guides I . Steel elevator guide rails shall be furnished to guide the car, erected plumb and securely fastened to the building structure. M. Wiring 1 . All wiring and electrical interconnections shall comply with the governing codes. Insulated wiring shall have flame retardant arid rnolsture-proof outer Covering, and shall be run in conduit tubing or electrical wireways. Traveling cables shall be flexible arid suitably suspended to relieve strain on individual conductors. N. Hydraulic Control System 1 � The hydraulic control system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the required pressures and it shall be mounted in the storage tank. The control valve shall be manifold with up, down and Check valve sections. A control section including solenoid valves will direct the main Valve and control up and down starting, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up arid down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. Down speed and up and down leveling shall be controlled at the main valve sections. All of these functions shall be fully adjustable for maximum srhooffiness and to Meet contract conditions. 0. Leveling Device 1. The elevator shall be provided with an automatic leveling device which will bring the car to a stop within 3/8" of the landing level regardless of load or direction of travel. Landing level will be maintained within the leveling zone irrespective of the hoistway doors being open or closed. P. Controller 1. A microprocessor controller shall be provided including necessary starting switches of adequate size together with all relays, switches and hardware required to accomplish the operation specified. A three phase overload device shall be provided to protect the motor against overloading. Q. Car Stall Protective Circuit 1. A protective circuit shall be provided which will stop the motor arid the purup and return the car to its lowest landing in the event that the car, while traveling up, does not reach its designated landing within a predetermined time interval. This circuit shall permit a normal exit from the car but prevent further operation of the elevator until the trouble has been corrected, R. Emergency Car Lighting 1. An emergency power unit employing a 6 volt sealed rechargeable battery arid totally static circuits shall be provided that shall illuminate the elevator car and provide Current to the alarm bell in the event Of nOffflal power failure. The equipment shall comply with the requirements of the ANSI Code. This unit shall be an integral part of the car operating panel. S. Applied Car Operating Panel 1 . An applied car operating panel shall be furnished. Cabinet will contain a bank of mechanical illuminated buttons marked to correspond to the landing served, an emergency stop button, door open and door close buttons. The emergency call button shall be connected to a bell that serves as an emergency signal. Switches for lights and other key operations shall also be located in the Car operating panel. T. Telephone and Telephone Compartment 1. An ADA compliant hands-free telephone shall be provided in the car operating panel. Necessary wires shall be included in the car traveling cable. Connections to the building service system shall be furnished by others. U. Cab Enclosure 1. Walls and canopy to be 14 gauge solid hot rolled steel panels, blue -grey enamel finish. All panels shall be bolted and contained in an angle iron framework. Steel protective base bumpers on walls. A recess for mounting of car operating panel shall be provided. 2. Lighting shall consist of two recessed fluorescent lights with top guards. 3. Cab Flooring: Provide 1/4" aluminum diamond plate. V. Gate I . Power car gate shall be vertical sliding and made of not less than 9 gauge steel wire mesh with primer enamel finish. Gate shall be properly guided on steel tracks arid counterbalanced by weights attached to the gate by flexible wire or sprocket chain running over suitable sheaves or sprockets. Counterweights shall be enclosed. Equip gate with an electric contact to prevent operation of the car until gate is closed as defined by code. W. Hoistway Entrances 1 ; Furnish and install power operated holstway doors complete with wiring, Each door shall bear UL certification. 2. Doors shall be vertical bi-parting all steel counterbalancing type and panels made of not less than #14 gauge sheet steel. A small glass vision panel in each Upper door section shall be provided, Doors shall be finished in enarnel primer. 3. The door operator shall open the door automatically after the car reaches the landing. Constant pressure on the close button shall close the door. Momentary pressure on the open button shall reopen the door if the car is at the landing. Provide rianual operation of the doors frout the car in the event of a power failure. Each door shall be equipped with a lock and contact operated by a stationary carn on the car to prevent the Movement of the car unless all doors are closed and to lock the door when the car leaves a landing. X. Signal Fixtures 1, In addition to the car operating panel, furnish a car position indicator in the cab. 2; In the hallway an up button and down button at interruediate floors and a single button at each terminal floor shall be furnished at a height to comply with handicap requirearents. 3. Hall Fixture Finish' #4 stainless steel. Mount fixture cover plates with tamper resistant fasteners in the same finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms as constructed. Verify that hoistway, pit, machine room and openings are of correct size and within tolerance and are ready for work of this section. Notify General Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. B. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the elevator in accordance with accepted manufacturer's instructions. Install machine room components with the proper clearances as required by Code. 3.03 TESTING A. Obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal and State permits and at his expense make all tests as required by governing codes. B. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for inspection and testing. Have acceptance inspection, required by local authority, performed by enforcing agency. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjustments: 1 . Adjust controller, switches and safety features to operate to within accepted design tolerances. 2. Adjust leveling devices so car stops within 3/8" of finished floor. 3. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Clean Up: 1. Remove from hoistway surfaces all loose Materials and filings resulting frorn this work 2. Clean machine room floor of dirt, oil and grease 3. Remove crating and packing materials from premises. 3.05 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Instruct Owner's Personnel: Provide a competent instructor or instructors for a period of four hours, at a mutually agreed upon time pHor to store opening, to instruct the store mimagement and/or appointed personnel in the proper operation and general care of the elevator equipment. Review of manuals, documentation, Warranties, safety, use of cleaning materials and service call procedu(es with store personnel will be included. Instruct store personnel in the operation of special security features, when applicable. Provide to store inanagernent four sets of equipaterit keys. Performance of this training shall not be prerequisite of payment or the release of retainage due to the elevator contractor. B. Mechanic Standby: Provide standby mechanic for two (2) Grand Opening days, 10 am to 10 pm Friday and Saturday. END OF SECTION 14245 SECTION 14300 - ESCALATORS PART1 GENERAL 1,1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Escalators. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Escalator pits. B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel (Structural Steel Framing); Intermediate support bearing structures, hoist beams, steel bracing members, truss bearing plates. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Truss cladding. D. Section 13850 - Detection and Alarm (Fire Detection and Alarm): Heat, smoke, and products of Combustion sensing devices. E. Section 15700 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment (Heating, Ventilating, arid Air-Conclitioning (HVAC)): Heating, cooling, and ventilation of machine room and machinery space. F. Section 16100 - Wiring Methods (Common Work Results for Electrical): Light outlets, convenience outlets, light switches, and conduits. G. Section 16440 - Switchboards, Parielboards, arid Control Centers (Switchboards and Parielboards): Disconnect switches. H. Section 16500 - Lighting: Light fixtures. 1. Section 16720 - Telephone and Intercommunication Equipment (Voice Communications): RJII I C - I pair analog telephone line to phone jack brought to either top or bottom landing of escalator for Remote Monitoring interface. 1.3 REFERENCES A, ANSIASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. ISO 9001:2000 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Arrange escalator components in machine room, control room, or machinery space so equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced with ruininial disturbance to other equipment and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A, Comply with Section 01330 (0133 00) - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturenfinstaller's product data, including: I . Descriptive brochures or detail drawings of escalators, including product features. 2. Power Information: Separate data sheets for horsepower, starting current, running current, machine and control heat release, and electrical requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturerfinstaller's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, fabrication, fasteners, hardware, finish, options, accessories, and other information to render totally functional escalators. D. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer's samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials, E. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer/installer's operation and maintenance manual; including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs; and electrical wiring diagrams. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer/installer's standard warranty. 1,6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/lilstaller's Qualifications: Specialize in manufacturing and installing escalator equipment, with a minimum of 5 years successful experience. B. Regulatory Requirements'. 1 , Escalator design, clearances, construction, workmanship, materials, and installation, unless specified otherwise, shall be !it accordance with the following: a. ANSI/ASMEA17.1. b. Handicap accessibility. c. Americans with Disabilities Act. d. Other codes having legal jurisdiction. 2. ANSIASME At 7.1 shall govern, except where codes having legal jurisdiction include rnore rigid requirements or conflict with ANSI/ASME At 7.1. 3. Escalator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures cartified in accordance with ISO 9001:2000 to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance for new products. C. Pre -installation Meeting: 1. Convene pre -installation meeting before start of installation of escalators. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, and escalator manufacturerfinstaller. 3. Review examination, installation, field quality control, adjusting, Gleaning, protection, and coordination with other work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturerlinstaller's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name arid manufacturer/installer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1�8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Electrical Power: 1 . Owner will arrange for temporary 220 -VAC, single-phase, 60 -Hz, GFCI-protected electricity to be available for installation of escalator components. Permanent power required for adjusting and testing. 2. Comply with Section 01510 - Temporary Utilities. A. Temporary Use of Escalator I , Owner will negotiate with manufacturer/installer for temporary use of escalator, if required. 2. Temporary use of escalator shall be in accordance with terms and conditions of i-nanufacturer/installer's temporary acceptance form. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate escalator work with Work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. 1�10 WARRANTY A. Mari ufacturer/installer shall guarantee materials arid workmanship of equipment installed undee these specifications and make good, defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use, which may develop within 1 year after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Escalators shall receive regular maintenance on each unit for period of 12 months after completion of work specified herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. B. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep escalators in operation, except parts that require replacement because of accidents, vandalism, misuse, or negligence by parties other than manufacturer/installor. C. ManLifacturer/installer shall perform all Work, except emergency minor adjustment call-back service, during regular working hours. Manufacturer/installer shall provide emergency minor adjustment call-back service, 24 hours 7 days a Week. D, Should Owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repairs, replacements, or emergency minor adjustment call-back service, unless specified herein, be performed on other than manufacturerlinstaller's regular working hours of regular working days, manufaCturer/iristaller shall absorb straight -time labor charges and Owner will compensate manufacturedinstaller for overtime premium, travel time, and expense at normal billing rates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER A. Schindler Elevator Corporation, PO Box 1035, Morristown, New Jersey 07962. Phone (973) 397-6500. Website www.us.schindler.corn <http://wwW.us.schindler.Gorn>. B. Escalators shall be Installed by escalator manufacturer. 2,2 ESCALATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS A. Escalators: Model 9300 AE. B. Escalator Equipment SUffliflary: 1. Quantity: 2 2. Application: indoor 1 Vertical Rise: 16 Feet 0 Inches 4. Escalator Width: 48 in (1200 turn) 5. Step Width: 40 in (1000 mm) 6, Step Run: Two flat steps 7. Speed: 90 firm 8. Floors Served: From: 1 To 2 9. Power Supply: 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz 10. Contract Maintenance: 12 months with ernergency callback service, 24 hours 7 days a week C. Additional Features: Custorner Handrail Reset Switch �ndcap Deflector Remote Monitoring Capable D. Escalators: Cleat -step reversible type, self-contained units, capable of operating under full -load conditions in either direction, for ascending or descending passenger service on an incline of 30 degrees from horizontal, complete with all equipment. E. Exposed Metals: 1 . Paint in accordance with aranufacturer/installer's standard methods. 2. Do not paint non-ferrous metals; and finished, plated, and machined surfaces. F. Conduit, Duct, Wiring, and Fittings Necessary for Proper Operation of Equipment: 1 , Furnish and install in accordance with manufacturenfinstaller's standard methods. 2. Compliance: ANSI/NFPA70. G. Sound Level: Maximum Of 58 dM, measured 3 feet above comb plates. 2.3 TRUSS A. Structural Steel Truss: I . Designed and constructed to safely carry entire load of escalator, including: a, All parts. b. Full capacity load. c. Weight of exterior balustrade. d. Truss covering. 2. Weight of Exterior Covering Carried by Truss: Maximum of 10 pounds per square foot. 3. Top End of Truss: Carry drive Tachine and controller, 4. Load -Bearing Components of Structure' Composed of open steel shapes, as preventative against hidden corrosion damage. 5. Truss Factor of Safety: ANSIASME A17A and other codes having jurisdiction. 6. Constructed to Withstand Maximum Deflection: 111000 per unit length. B. Coating: Coat truss with anti -corrosive primer. C� Supports: 1 . Trusses: Include supports for truss cladding. 2. Allow cladding to be easily attached to truss exterior, 3. Design: a. Manufacturer/installer's standard. b. Capable of carrying a maximum load of 10 pounds per square foot. C'4 0 Li- z Cf) .9490 MOIN (D MW ITEM, vi LU M 0 "A' W�­, rr UJI C'4 0 Li- z Cf) .9490 MOIN (D MW DAT� 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A705 SHEET NO. LU M 0 0 rr UJI LIJ rn 0 C) 2E LJ_ U) U) LLJ 0 0 0 ful JI 2E 0 C) LU LJJ r14 ry, 0 r DAT� 5/4/12 JOB NO. 11266 A705 SHEET NO. _ _. �� w.� _ . _ _�._� _ I _'' _.J.. �.�i...4',___ � ' L'__ � _��uL Li_. Iii__ - _�_ P. 11_L�-----I - ! J, � _,:__ � ...-- L III __tL i I d i- I I I i 1 1 Imo'" i j INSTALL VOLUME DAMPER FLEX AT TRUNK CONNECTION DUCT DUCT DUCT OF EACH RETURN AIR INSTALL VOLUME DAMPER AT TRUNK DUCT COLLA CONN. INLET CONNECTION DUCT CONNECTION OF EACH RETURN AIR INLET CONNECTION DUCT PLENUM BOX 24"x24"x8" 18 GA DUCT COLLAR PLENUM BOX 24"x24°'x8°' 18 GA W/ROLLED EDGES W/ROLLED EDGES — - — CEILING SEISMIC RESTRAINTS, (TYPICAL) RETURN AIR RETURN AIR GRILLE EGG CRATE GRILLE CEILING 1/2°'x1/2"x1/2" PLASTIC GRID PER C.M.C. & SMACNA SEISMIC RESTRAINT MANUAL, TYPICAL FOR ALL BRACING. DETAILRETURN DUCT SCALE: NOT TO SCALE I BELLMOUTH TAKE -OFF _DUCT MAIN MAX. 4'-0° RIGID GALV. STEEL ELBOW 1.5x . RADIUS DIFF. NECK SIZE -DIA. NEW DIFFUSER BATT INSULATION OVER TOP OF CD BACK PAN VOLUME FLEX DUCT. DAMPER PER C.M.C. &SMACNA CEILING (LAY -1N, GYP BOARD, ETC...) SIESMIC RESTRAINT MANUAL, i I! SEISMIC RESTRAINTS, (TYPICAL) TYPICAL FOR ALL BRACING. ZDuPPL""-T' DUCT DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE iii i T I MECHANICAL GENERAL \ a, ��• � o2f �`. ':yam PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS ��2i FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATIONS A. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THIS WORK IS REFERRED TO "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS" AND "GENERAL A. CONNECT SEWER, GAS, VENTS AND WATER LINES AS INDICATED ON THE PLUMBING PLANS. A. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE FIRE PROTECTION WOR S STATE OF �^ K HALL BE RECOGNIZED, QUALIFIED AND A. IN RESPECT TO ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH MATERIALS %F'•�� E':.�•��''•: CONDITIONS" AND "SPECIAL CONDITIONS AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT. DETERMINE THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING SERVICE CONNECTIONS BEFORE STARTING LICENSED FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR, PRIMARILY ENGAGED IN THE D j s 0NA c� DESIGN AND MEETING AIEE, NEMA, NELA, ASME AND ASTM SPECIFICATIONS. THE INSTALLATION OF ALL �° %,,� s-- •• THE INSTALLATION OF ANY WORK. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES, THE GENERAL INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. WORK SHALL CONFORMC NAS TO ASHRAE GUIDE AND SHEET METAL PROMOTION PLAN STANDARDS. THE I B. CONTRACTOR ALSO REFERRED TO ALL ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, .ELECTRICAL AND OTHER CONTRACTOR AND THE OWNER'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PAY ALL FEES FOR PERMITS PRIOR TO STARTING OWNER DRAWINGS PERTAINING TO PROJECT, ALL OF ABOVE MENTIONED DRAWINGS, AS WELL AS B. THE FIRE PROTECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, INCLUDING DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS, WORK. THEIR RESPECTIVE SPECIFICATIONS, ARE A PART OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. B. PLUMBING WORK SHALL CONFORM TO GOOD ENGINEERING PRACTICE AND BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SHALL BE PREPARED BY A STATE CERTIFIED SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGNER OR PROFESSIONAL THE APPLICABLE PLUMBING CODES AND OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGINEER. B. MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND IN PERFECT CONDITION N ITION WHEN INSTALLED, AND SHALL BE C. MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED -TO SUPPLEMENT EACH OTHER, BE LICENSED IN THIS AREA TO PERFORM THE NEW WORK. PROTECTED FROM ALL INJURY UNTIL NT FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE SYSTEM. MECHANICAL FURNISH ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR CALLED FOR IN ONE EVEN THOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY C. THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH ALL STATE, LOCAL AND CONTRACTOR SHALL BE C THE IN BOTH. LICENSED 1N THIS AREA TO PERFORM THE NEW WORK. � C. SANITARY SEWERS. AND VENTS INSIDE OF THE BUILDING SI -TALL BE SERVICE. WEIGHT, CAST NATIONAL CODES AND ALL APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION IRON, NO HUB WITH COMPRESSION TYPE NEOPRENE JOINTS. ABS OR PVC SCHEDULE 40 PIPING ASSOCIATION. C. THIS CONTRACTOR T R SHALL REMOVE ALL TOOL, SURPLUS MATERIALS AND DEBRIS OF ALL KINDS D. INSTALL AND CONNECT EQUIPMENT, SERVICES AND MATERIALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH BEST SHALL BE AS APPROVED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY AND OWNER IN CONCEALED (UNDERFLOOR �- ( R ANp C FROM .HIS WORK AND LEAVE ALL IN A CLEAN, PERFECT CONDITION, FULLY SATISFACTORY TO �, c•a ENGINEERING PRACTICE AND ACCORDANCE WITH VARIOUS MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN WALLS LOCATIONS. NOTE: CEILING PLENUM C D. ALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS REQUIRED FOR EACH SYSTEM, SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTION. � � �. �, ) WILL BE USED; NO PLASTIC PIPING WILL BE THE ARCHITECT. �„ INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE AUXILIARY PIPING, PERMITTED WITHIN CEILING PLENUM. WATER FLOW ALARM, VALVE SUPERVISION WIRING SHALL BE BY THE VALVES, WATER SEALS, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS, ETC., RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER OR FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR. SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY DEVICES WILL BE COMPATIBLE„ D. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE OWNER WITH ONE (1) SET OF AS -BUILT' DRAWINGS. REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION. D. ALL COLD AND HOT WATER LINES SHALL BE TYPE 'L' COPPER WITH 98--2 TIN ANTIMONY (NO WITH THE ALARM EQUIPMENT PANEL. 0 cs LEAD) SOLDER. E. FURNISH ALL MATERIALS, TRANSPORTATION, RIGGING, HOISTING, ETC. TO PROVIDE A _cc�a E. FURNISH MATERIAL OR LABOR WHICH IS NEITHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR CALLED FOR IN E. ELECTRICAL POWER SHALL BE PROVIDED AS DESCRIBED UNDER DIVISION 16. COMPLETE AND OPERABLE HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND VEN TILATING SYSTEM. � SPECIFICATIONS BUT WHICH IS OBVIOUSLY A COMPONENT PART OF AND NECESSARY TO COMPLETE E. GAS PIPING ABOVE GROUND SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL WITH 125 POUND BLACK »ca WORK OF SIMILAR CHARACTER. MALLEABLE IRON SCREWED FITTINGS. GAS- PIPING COMPOUND AT JOINTS SHALL BE PER NFP F. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE 1/4" SCALE SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING DETAILS OF F. ALL EQUIPMENT IS TO BE INSTALLED E A �, �, A IN A .NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER, ACCORDING TO � CONSTRUCTION, FABRICATION, EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, ETC., INSTALLATION AND WIRING OF MANUFACTURERS r ' BULLETIN X54 AND LOCAL CODES. GAS VALVES SHALL BE UL LISTED FOR GAS SERVICE SUCH A TUBERS RECOMMENDATIONS AND GOOD PRACTICE. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OTHER F. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROCURE AND PAY FOR. ALL PERMITS OR LICENSES REQUIRED TO CARRY _ ALL COMPONENTS FOR ALL WORK AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED HEREIN. WITH THIS WORK. HE SHALL PAY FOR ALL CHARGES MADE BY INSPECTION. NOTE: ALL AS DEZURICK MODEL S-425 FOR 2 AND LESS, WITH DEZURICK MODEL. F 425 FOR 2-1/2 AND TRADES AND WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. cu cr =3,r - CONTRACTORS SHALL BE LICENSED IN THE COUNTY, CITY, ETC. TO PERFORM. ALL. NEW WORK. LARGER. G. ALL DEVICES �' - E AND MATERIALS PERTAINING TO ALL FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL BEAR THE G. ALL TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE DONE BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. THIS c' UNDERWRITER LAB 4 ORATORIES INC. LABEL FOR FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES. SUBMIT SIX 6 cra F. INSULATE ALL NEW HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING WITH NONCOMBUSTIBLE ARMSTRONG ( ) CONTRACTOR SI -TALL COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR ANY 120V /24V CONTROL, G: THIS CONTRACTOR- SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES,.. ORDINANCES AND ALL LOCAL SETS OF - � c CATALOG CUTS OF THE FOLLOWING .SPRINKLER DEVICES. SPRINKLER HEADS AND TRANSFORMERS LEGAL REQUIREMENTS. ALL LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS OF STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNING ARMAFLEX" TYPE II FOAM INSULATION WITH SEALED JOINTS OR WITH OWENS CORNING R REQUIRED AND EQUIPMENT PURCHASED. c AGENCIES ESCUTCHEONS. 0co N IES SHALL BE CONSIDERED A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS AS FULLY AS IF WRITTEN FIBERGLASS ASJ/SSL-11 HEAVY DENSITY PIPEINSULATION WITH VAPOR BARRIER AND SEALED ' 0 HEREIN, H. SYSTEM IS TO BE AIR BALANCED BY A CERTIFIED '�04 .JOINTS,. INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE AS ,FOLLOWS. IED .INDEPENDENT. BALANCE COMPANY, TO INCLUDE DIFFUSER H. IT IS ESSENTIAL FOR THE COORDINATION OF ALL TRADES THAT THIS CONTRACTOR BE - CFM, RETURN CFM AND EXHAUST CFM WITH THREE 3 REPORTS SUBMITTED 0 �' RESPONSIBLE �- ( ) T THE .OWNER AND R E FOR CONFIRMING THE LOCATIONS .AND ELEVATIONS ' NS OF HIS PIPING AND H. THIS CONTRACTOR r- T R SHALL TAKE OUT PERMIT WITH. PROVISIONS 0 THREE 3 A N F INSPECTION BEFORE STARTING HOT 8c COLD WATER BRANCH , PIPING _O MAINTENANCE MANUALS TURNED OVER TO OWNER BEFORE R P IN UP, TO 1 1/2_ THICKNESS EQUIPMENT AT THE JOB SITE TO AV RE .FINAL ACCEPTANCE. ALL r�•.-� AVOID ENCROACHING UPON THE SPACE NEEDED AND SYSTEMS ca SYSTEMS AID EQUIPMENT ANY WORK, FEE FOR SAME SHALL BE PART OF THIS CONTRACT. Q MEN T ARE TO B G HOT & COLD WATER MAIN PIPING UP- TO 1-1 2 1 THICKNESS ALLOCATED FOR ANOTHER TRADE. E GUARANTEED FOR. PARTS AND LABOR FOR ONE YEAR (EXCEPT 5 P AIR. CONDITIONING COMPRESS R S _ (0 HALL HAVE .FIVE � HOT 8c COLDYEAR WARRANTY). ..WAFER MAIN PIPING NG 2 AND OVER 1 ,� THICKNESS I WHEN O / WORK 1S COMPLETED, ED, THI S CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH TO THE ARCHITECT - CERTIFICATES c c L DRAWINGS I GS` R W N ARE NOT 'I T OF APPROVAL L FROM THE RESPONSIBLE INSPECTION AGENCIES. � _ » A - I. DUCTWORK .AND. PLENUMS G. PLUMBING. CONTRALTO S S SHOP D � M SHALL BE AS SCHEDULE ON T R HALL' INSTALL SHOCK ABSORBERS IN PIPING SYSTEM. TO PREVENT A H DRAWINGS, INSTALLATION DRAWINGS, OR SLEEVE DRAWINGS. DRAWINGS FOR THEE D HE DRAWINGS .PER, SMAGNA DUCT r c� NOISE AND CONSTRUC DAMAGE DUE TO WATER HAMMER WHERE EC PURPOSES SHALL BE PREPARED BY T TION CLASSIFICATION. J. TESTING OF ALL WORK UNDER N NECESSARY. BRANCH PIPING SHALL .HAVE HE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACT SHALL 'BE DONE BY THE CONTRACTOR IN THE �- .� ACCESSIBLE SERVICE VALVE,: PRO - 1VIDE SHUT-OFF VALVES IN THE SUPPLY PIPING TO EVERY PRESENCE OF THE OWNER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE, �' - _ ,_ I I E. ALL APPARATUS, EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, FIXTURE. c J. SHEET M ETC., SHALL FULLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THESES c J. A COMPLETE INTERCONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM SHALL BE .SUBMITTED SHOWING ALL METAL FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE A� FOLLOWS. SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM WITH NUMBERED TERMINALS AND ALL 1. INTERCONNECTING ALL DUCTWORK SH H. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL G WIRING WITH COLOR CODING AND CO ALL. BE CONSTRUCTED' AND INSTALL K. , _ H L FURNISH AND INSTALL HER.�EY MODEL FDC -2 BRONZE BACKFLOW. CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS. ED IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARDS THE BID SHALL CONTEMPLATE THE FURNISHING AND `INSTALLING OF .MATERIAL .AND EQUIPMENT, SET c SET FORTH IN LATEST EDITION OF THE ASHRAE GUIDE AND .�MACNA STANDARDS UNLESS EXACTLY AS SPECIFIED OR SHOWN AS SIMILAR BY PREVENTER COMPLETE WITH DUAL .CHECK .VALVE DEVICE WITH. REPLACEABLE CORROSION FREE.. D THE: CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; THE CONTRACTOR �. �- - CHECKS K. THE EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING MODIFIED HEREIN. SUBMITTING ON SIMILAR EQUIPMENT WILL BE RESPONSIBLE MAXIMUM FLOW 60 GPM,- MAXIMUM .PRESSURE. 17� PSI, TEMPERATURE RANGE FROM 35 SHALL BE HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED TO 200 PSI FOR TWO HOURS. FOR ALL CUTS ASSOCIATED WITH �: , � r r, _ �, _ _ � THE NEW _. DUCT DIMENSIONS _ _ - DEGREES TO 1 5 DEGREES W LINE SHALL' BE THOROUGHLY FLUSHED, N IONS ARE GROSS EXCEPT FOR LI CHANGES IN ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL` MECHANICAL AND 0 " 4 E REES F AND THE PRESSURE DROP SHALL NOT EXCEED 6 PSI. WATER L p. TESTING AND FLUSHING SHALL BE COMPLETED BEFORE LINED DUCTS WHERE DIMENSIONS ARE NET FREE / R ELECTRICAL TRADES DUE TO CONNECTION AREA. METE N TO THE INSIDE PIPING. R SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL WATER COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. NG. THE SIMILAR EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS SUBMITTED. BIDS SUBMITTED SHALL LIST ANY 3. DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE ACTUAL SHEET METAL .INSIDE DIMENSIONS AND. REMOTE READOUT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY WATER COMPANY _ , ITEMS OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN SPECIFIED OR SIMILAR TO THE ONES CALLED - S - L. MAKE HYDROSTATIC TEST ON SPRINKLER SYSTEM, 200 PSI FOR 2 HOURS. SHALL BE ADHERED TO UNLESS JOB CONDITIONS REQUIRE ALTERATIONS. REVISIONS f0 FOR. SUBSTITUTIONS -SHALL BE APPROVED SEVEN WORKING DAYS BEFORE BIDS .ARE SUBMITTED`. - � : - I. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 1 SET OF AS -BUILT DRAWINGS TO THE OWNER. DUCT SIZES SMALL BE BASED ON THE EQUAL FRICTION METHOD, OTHERWISE, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. M. ALL DEFECTS MAD - - E EVIDENT BY THE TESTS SHALL BE PROPERLY REPAIRED BY THE SPRINKLER 4. ALL ELBOWS IN THE DUCT SYSTEM SHALL BE MADE WITH CENTERLINE -RADIUS OF ONE AND J. CHLORINATION � CONTRACTOR. LEAKS IN OVERHEAD LINES SHALL BE REPAIR c ONE -- HALF L RINATION OF WATER PIPING. THE DOMESTIC .WATER PIPING SYSTEM SHALL BE FLUSHED ED .ONLY BY MEANS OF ONE HALF (1 1 /2) TIMES THE TURNING WIDTH OF THE .DUCT. WHERE SPACE PROHIBITS L. INSTALL FINAL APPLICATION OF LUBRICATION OIL REFRIGERANT CHARGE, A i R E, ANp ALL OTHER TIGHTENING OR REPLACING THE FITTING WITH CLEAN POTABLE WATER UNTIL CONTAMINATED WATER DOES NOT APPEAR AT THE OUT AND NOT RESORTING TO ANY CAULKING METHOD. THE SPECIFIED MINIMUM RADIUS SQUARE WITH DOUBLE BLE RADIUS TURNING VANES r4 SUPPLIES NECESSARY TO PLACE THE:. EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION: �; �, . - • AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH A SOLUTION CONTAINING 50 PARTS PER MILLION OF CHLORINE SHALL BE INSTALLED. CHANGES IN DUCT SIZES SHALL BE 15 DEC, DIVERGING N. UPON COMPLETION OF AND 60 � HE ENTIRE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM AR i - AND ALLOWED TO SAND FOR RANGE TO HAVE THE FIRE DEC.CONTRACTING, FLOW MAXIMUM. ANGLES. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE 5 T R A PERIOD (AS PRESCRIBED BY THE CODE) BEFORE FLUSHING: �. ,- _ _ _ HIS WORK TO BE FREE FROM DEFECTS IN WORKMANSHIP AND _ INSPECTION BUREAU REPRESENTATIVE AND T c HE PROPER INSURANCE. COMPANY AVAILABLE 5. THE GENERAL 0 � THE SYSTEM SHALL BE FLUSHED :COMPLETELY WITH CL A LABLE TO ROUTE OF THE DUCTS I� SHOWN ON THE PLANS: THE MATERIALS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE 1 YEAR EAR WATER UNTIL ALL RESIDUAL ._ _ E EXACT ROUTE SHALL BE Pte. O AR FROM ..DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE.. WITNESS T - HE ACCEPTANCE TEST. DETERMINED BY JO CHLORINE CONTENT IS REMOVED, CHLORINATION SHALL. B B CONDITIONS AND SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ALL � • I E PERFORMED AFTER ALL PIPING AND.: OTHER TRADES. C c I ALL. GRILLES REGISTERS, � LRa DIFFUSERS ETC. SHALL BE L00 FINAL CONNECTIONS AND PRESSURE TESTING HAS BEEN COMPLETED , LOCATED SYMMETRICAL N. ALL POWER WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. SHALL BE DONE BY THE ELECTRICAL IF; AFTER THE PIPES _ _ LY WITH c 0. WORKING DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE STT INS HAVE BEEN CHLORINATED, STATE INSPECTION SERVICE; LOCAL ELECTRIC LIGHT ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT G THE PIPES HAVE TO BE DISMANTLED, THE CHLORINATION PROCESS ET CONTRACTOR. r, � , - , FURNISH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORWIRING DIAGRAMS FOR ALL ELECTRICALLY _ C� G VER c 0 NTNG AU>-HORI H r TY AVING JURISDICTIO ND c MUST B N A TO THE OWNER'S � 6 IE REPEATED. , N R FIRE INSURANCE HANGERS TO BE �3 FT. CENTERS MAXIMUM WITH STRAPS FOR DUCTS BENT .UNDER BOTTOM OF L- POWERED .EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH THE C,0 (BENT CONTRACT WHICH SHALL INDICATE THE SERVICE � �• U DERWR T R N I E FOR APPROVAL i AND PERMITS. ALL DEVICES AND MATERIALS .PERTAININGTO DUCT AND ATTACHED) DUCTWORK S HA _ BE SEALED.REQUIRED AND ELECTRIC LOAD INVOLVED. K. ALL FIR PROTECTION LABOR _SHALL BE PER E TON WORK SHALL BEA .FORMED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER BY MECHANICS:SKILLED. THE R THE U.L. STAMP OF APPROVAL. 7. INSTALL DUCTWORK AS HIGH � P SHALL IN IR I H A� .POSSIBLE. ._ PARTICULAR TI ULAR TRADE. PIPE P .AND EQUIPMENT � HALL BE INSTALLED 8. NO O.' ,SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS, CA LLED SQUARE AND PLUMB AND FIBERGLASS. pUCTBOARD WILL BE PERMITTED:.. W CATALOG SHEETS FOR EQUIPMENT, U _ . >FIXTURES, .DUCTWORK LAYOUT _ z ACCESSIBLE I LE FOR P. T S PROPER 0 HE SPRINKLER U WIRING .DIAGRAMS ETC. IN SIX 6 COPIES TO OPERATION AND SERVICE.. CON TRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE E THE OWNER WITH .TWO 2 COMPLETE_ SETS OF �J E THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW. EACH PR NTED INSTRUCTIONS AND FII K. FU _ S DRAWINGS G NIS R N S COVERT G THE P FURNISH ANp. INSTAL A � r cN H ROPER OPERATION AND L ALL MANUAL SPLITTER DAMPERS: AND DEFLECTORS TORS ' INDICATED ON CONTRACTOR CTOR I� R - � A RESPONSIBLE I TO DISTRIBUTE I TE AP O PR VED SHOP DRAWINGS 0 I T ALL OTHER TRADES S E L. CUTTING 0 PAC N R PATCHING I H NG NEC MAINTENANCE F ®. NECESSARY TO P. E 0 ALL U C PERMIT THE INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED D DRAWINGS � N ANY WORK UNDER THIS. Q N HE UNDER THESE SPECIFICATIONS. R NECESSARY TO PROPERLY DISTRIBUTE AND BALANCE AFFECTED BY HIS WORK EQUIPMENT, E AIR: . ETC.;.. FOR 'COORDINATION. � � � CONTRACT SHALL BE THE. RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACTOR. N RACTUR. Q. GUARANTEE ter' Lu AR T Q EE OF WORK UNDER L. N THIS SECTION HVAC EQUIPMENT CTU OF S N THE SPECIFICATIONSHALL BE AS S SHALL BE FOR A PERIODSCHEDULED,ON DRAWING. P E ASSEMBLE AND SUBMIT TO T.HE 1 ARCHITECT' FOR SUBSEQUENT SUBMISSION TO THE OWNER TWO` M. PROVIDE ANY :.NECESSARY - OF ONE YEAR EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING FOR THE INSTALLATION OF WORK AR AFTER COMPLETION AND FORMAL. ACCEPTANCE OF E �. - N FIRE PROTECTION � � (2) COMPLETE SETS OF OPERATIONS MANUALS AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS COPY OF c SPECIFIED IN THIS DIVISION. AFTER THE PIPE HAS BEEN INSTALLED, TESTED AND SYSTEMS. M. INSULATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: w MANUFACTURE FIXTURE CUTS WITH 'S NAME. AND MODEL NUMBER, EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES, ETC., APPROVED, THE TRENCHES SHALL BE BACKFILLED AND WELL. TAMPED TO GRADE WITH APPROVED WI R ' FOR EACH ITEM' FURNISHED. c KJ7 i MATERIAL. R. PIPE AND FITTINGS. SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 MILD STEEL. PIPE FITTINGS MAY BE CAST, 1. ALL INSULATION, VAPOR BARRIER, JACKETS AND ADHESIVE USED FOR APPLYING 0 U -a MALLEABLE OR DUCTILE IRON. SCREWED CAST IRON FITTINGS 2 AND SMALLER SHALL. HAVE INSULATION SHALL HAVE FIRE AND SMOKE HAZARD RATINGS AS TESTED UNDER ASTM -84 0 z Q. ALL CONTRACTORS MUST COORDINATE EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES N. PIPING - - - �- 1I5 PSI COLA WATER RATING. NEPA 25�, AND U.L. 723 NOT EXCEEDING A FLAME SPREAD 25 AND SMOKE DEVELOPED OF (GENERAL CONTRACTOR, PLUMBING: CONTRACTOR, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, ELECTRICAL 1. ALL PIPING SHALL BE RUN CONCEALED EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 50. >' a C c c Lu L9J CONTRACTOR, ETC.) AFFECTED BY THAT PIECE. OF EQUIPMENT. ROOF OPENINGS, WEIGHTS, 2. ,VALVES, TRAPS, CLEANOUT AND OTHER APPARATUS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN AN EASILY S. GATE VALVES � - 2. ALL C0 � � ' ( , E IN THE FIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE U.L. APPROVED O.S.&Y. VALVE, 1 /5 CONCEALED SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH OWENS-CORNING TYPE 1 �0, 2" DUCT � ACCESSIBLE IB s - POWER REQUIREMENTS, VOLTAGES, ETC. PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND AGAIN PRIOR TO LE LOCATION. W.W.P. CHECK VALVES I FIRE - � �, _ N LINES AND SPRINKLER LINES. SHALL BE U.L. APPROVED WRAP (6.0 R --VALUE). TAPE ALL SEAMS WITH MINIMUM 2 :.WIDE TAPE: RETURN AIR � 3. SOIL WASTE ENT 0 _ - INSTALLATION ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO LIFTING ONTO. R00 VENT, OFFSETS AND HOUSE DRAINS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH A MINIMUM 0 C, _ n 0 I ( F) NO EXTRA COMPENSATION. IR N BODY. BRONLE MOUNTED CHECKS, FLANGED ENDS 1 /5 W.W.P. GATE DUCTWORK SHALL BE LINED WITH - � •-� UNIFORM » � VALVES AHEAD OF WI 1 ACOUSTIC LINING, OWENS-CORNING TYPE X00. � C7 � WILL BE APPROVED IF COORDINATION RM GRADE OF 1 8 TO THE FOOT FOR 4 PIPE AND 1 4 � � c - N IS NOT PERFORMED BY EACH RESPECTIVE CONTRACTOR AND � / TO THE FOOT FOR 3 AND FLOW SWITCHES SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR SWITCHES. 3. DUCTS PASSING THRU. ROOF SHALL B C� i E PROVIDED WITH INSULATED ROOF CURB AND 0 w ' SUBCONTRACTOR. LESS. COUNTERFLASHING. a Lu n 4. HOT AND COLD WATER- S RESPONSE _ y LINES SHALL BE AT LEAST 12 APART. WHERE PIPING. I� T. INSTALL QUICK REaPUNSE SEMI RECESSED PENDENT AND DICK RESPONSE 4. OTHER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: - Q P NSE UPRIGHT .SPRINKLERS A KERS. MANSVILLE, KNAUF, CERTAINTEED. �---- � PARALLEL. _ o PER NEPA 13. PROVIDE METAL. CABINET WITH .EXTRA AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER HEADS. PROVIDE � �. R E c� 1 c , 5. ESCUTCHEON ll1 HEON PLAT ES .:SHALL B E PROVIDED WHERE E L F R ALL PIPE PASSES THROUGH A FINISHED QUANTITIES -0F EACH .TEMPERATURE RANGE N. PROVIDE - c N E ANp TYPE PROPORTIONATE TO THAT INSTALLED.. WITH SPIN IN TRUNK CONNECTIONS WITH AIR AND VOLUME DAM o--- � WALL. r c• PER. C_7 �. SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY CENTRAL SP . � _ SPRINKLER CORP., VIKING, GRINNELL 6 CLUONNECTIONS FROM STEEL f0 COPPER_ PIPING SI -TALL BE MADE W TYCO. A WITH DIELECTRIC TYPE 0. FLEXIBLE CONNECTION AT THE INLET. AND .OUTLET. OF THE AIR MOVING UNIT EXHAUST FANS � X U N � c c � ' MONS,. EPCO OR OTHER APPROVED TYPE. AND HVAC UNIT CONNECTED TO DUCTWORK. MATERIALS SHALL BE NON CO MBUSTIBLE TWELVE U. PROVIDE SIAMESE CO _ cry CONNECTIONS AT LOCATION SHOWN ON DRAWING. WALL SIAMESE CONNECTIONS 12 OUNCES PER SQUARE... YARD NEPA-90A � 0. COPPER PIPING SHALL B c - O 276 ( ) APPROVED. �,. E SUPPORTED N AS ORTED AT INTERVALS NOT.. TO EXCEED 7 0 AND AT EACH MANUFACTURED BY W.D. ALLEN'. OR EQUAL BY ELKHART OR STANDARD, HAVING LOCAL CHANGE IN HORIZONTALS OCIRE DEPARTMENT VERTICAL. HANGERS SHALL SUPPORT PIPING AT PIPE WITH F THREADS, BRASS CAPS AND CHAINS ATTACHED TO CAST BRASS SIAMESE. PROVIDE P FLEXIBLE INSULATED DUCT SHALL BET E M - KE RMAFLEX TYPE M KE FACTORY ASSEMBLED DUCTLo � z INSULATION OVER TOP OR WITH METAL SLEEVETO 0 A SWING CHECK VALVE AND AUTO -BALL � - z 7 PROTECT INSULATION FROM CRUSHED.. ALL DRIP FOR. EACH SIAMESE CONNECTION. CONSISTING. OF COLD ROLLED FIAT STEEL SPRING, CONTINUOUS NON -PERFORATED .INNER AIR LASS INSULATION, 1. HANGER SHIELD: HANGERS FOR PIPING SHALL BE PLACED AROUND THE OUTSIDE OF- THE SEAL LINER, 0.23 THERMAL CONDUCTANCE FIBERGLASS c ANDFIBERGLASS 0 c) _ .' 0 ' INSULATION AICD. PROTECTIVE SHIELDS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT EVERY HANGER LOCATION. V. FURNISH AND INSTALL POTTER ELECTRIC SIGNAL CO. OSYS-B OR PIVS-B, 115V GATE VALVE SWITCH. REINFORCED METALIZED FILM VAPOR BA r BRIER. DUCTS SHALL BE LISTED BY UL, CONFORM TO 0 SHIELD SHALL NOTBELESS THAN 2/3 THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE INSULATION AND TAMPER SWITCHES SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURES RECOMMENDATIONS, ELECTRICAL NEPA CLASS I WITH FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 OR LESS 0 AND SMOKE DEVELOPMENT OF 50 OR �. WHERE SPEED CLIPS ARE USED, THE METAL SHIELD SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AROUND THE CONTRACTOR TO WIRE. LESS. NOTE: MAXIMUM LENGTH SHALL BE FOUR (4) LuFEET. CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE PIPE INSULATION. SHIELDS SHALL BE FABRICATED OF THE va FOLLOWING GAUGES: W. FURNISH AND INSTALL AUTOCALL WATERFLOW INDICATORS 4150 SERIES WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. SIZE GENERAL NOTES: AS REQUIRED FOR PIPING' SERVED. -FLOW SWITCHES TO BE INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURES NOMINAL PIPE SIZE METAL GAUGE RECOMMENDATIONS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO WIRE. 1. THE .MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. SHALL ALSO ARRANGE THE FINAL_ INSPECTIONS BY THE o �a 0" 1-1/2" 20 BUILDING AUTHORITIES. HL LU 0 X. SUPPORT SPRINKLER RISERS ON STEEL SADDLES AND SUPPORT ALL SPRINKLER PIPING, ETC„ 2. ALL ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SHALL B U v) E CONVEYED VIA A CRANE TO THE PROPER LOCATION. u r � 2" - 3 " 16 AS SPECIFIED IN NFPA 13, INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER EQUIPMENT. NOT OTHER METHOD MUST BE APPROVED BY THE PROJECT MANAGER. DO NOT ROLL UNITS C 3-1/2" AND. UP 14 ACROSS ROOF: I w Y. PROVIDE NEW INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION ON EACH F N ' P. CLEAN. OUT ALL LINES, ADJUST ALL VALVES AND CLEAN ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES LOW SWITCH SYSTEM 3. NO PIPING, HANGERS; DUCTWORK ETC. SI -TALL BE .SUSPENDED FROM •�- ANp.. M .ROUE DECK: ALL AS NECESSARY. SHALL c � ITEMS BE SUSPENDED FROM STRUCTURAL .ATE EQUIPMENT: ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE SEALED AT FLOOR AND/OR WALL WITH CLEAR STEEL, 0 SILICONE CAULK. _ 4. ALL ROOF EQUIPMENT ROOF CURBS EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS � � �, „ ( Q AND MISCELLANEOUS .STEEL 4-- Z. FLUSHING CONNECTIONS - 4 LONG NIPPLE AND CAP SHALL BE PROVIDED I PR DED AT ENDS OF ALL ANGLE. FRAMING AND/OR S / R SUPPORTS) SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CROSS MAINS. CONTRACTOR. THE FLASHING OF TENANT Q. AFTER THE PLUMBING' PIPING HAS BEEN INSTALLED,. INSPECTED: AND APPROVED, THE PIPING T OCCUPANCY. ROOF EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DONE N E BY SYSTEM ..SHALT BE FLUSHED TO REMOVE ANY FOREIGN MATTER FROM THE PIPES. THE GENE CONTRACTOR'S r , RAL ROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR AT THE MECHANICAL ICA I AA, REDUCERS SHALL BE ECCENTRIC S N L CONTRACTOR S E RIC AND INSTALLED IN PIPING �U THAT PIPING CAN BE EXPENSE. CUTTING OF REQUIRED ROOF OPENINGS SHALL BE DONE BY THE ROOFING ui R. - DRAINED. ALL PARTS OF THE PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MAINTAINED BY _ SUBCONTRACTOR AT THE MECHANICAL_ CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. A ; MEETING SHALL - BE THE CONTRACTOR THROUGHOUT THE GUARANTEE PERIOD OF ONE YEAR EA AFTER R FINAL ACCEPTANCE _ ARRANGED AT THE J OBSITE WITH THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SO THAT THE ROOFING BB. USE DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS -0R INSULATOR COUPLINGS � i OF THE BUILDING. WHERE PIPE MATERIALS CHANCE SUBCONTRACTOR CAN DETERMINE THE SCOPE OF OR - FROM FERROUS TO NON-FERROUS. .- W K INVOLVED. THE PROJECT MANAGER DURING CONSTRUCTION RI NSTRU.,TION PERIOD OR WHEN CONSTRUCTION IS :BEGINNING WILL MAKE THE S. NOTE. ALL PIPE INSULATION N N (HOT AND COLD PIPE INSULATION, ROOF DRAIN SUMPS STORM NECESSARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR GC. MAKE SCREWED JOINTS R .THIS MEETING. WITH PIPE COMPOUND APPLIED TO MALE THREADS ONLY. ALL CUT LEADERS AND DOWNSPOUTS. SHALL C �' _ �. MEC �' ) CONFORM TO THE FIRE AND SMOKE RATES BELOW. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL THE ON ROOF FOR THE ENDS OF THE PIPE SHALL BE CAREFULLY REAMED TO FULL SIZE. U.L. APPROVED FLEXIBLE -` COUPLINGS ARE PERMITTED ON ALL FEED MAINS. ROOFTOP CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE. COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER FOR EXACT FLAME. SPREAD - 25 OR LESS REQUIREMENTS. SMOKE DEVELOPED - 50 OR LESS 6. MECHANICAL CO S DD. PLACE VALVES AS SHOWN ON C, CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN MINIMUM 15 FEET BETWEEN EXHAUST VENT, FANS, THE DRAWINGS. VALVES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED WITH STEMS ETC., AND OUTSIDE AIR' INTAKES. IN LESS THAN A HORIZONTAL POSITION. ALL FIRE VALVES SHALL BE MONITORED WITH 7. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY VOLTAGES WITH ELECTRICAL CON " T. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES AND. TRIM: TRACTOR PRIOR TO TAMPER SWITCHES. 1. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL STOPS, -TRAPS, ESCUTCHEONS,ORDERING OF ANY ANID ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECTIONS, ETC., AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 8, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE A MINIMUM 10'-0 WORKING CLEARANCE FROM EDGE i` _ EE. ALL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SFIALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN A MANNER AND IN 2. TERMINATE ALL WATER ROUGH -INS WITH SHUT-OFF VALVES BEFORE CONNECTING OF BUILDING. LOCATIONS AVOIDING ALL OBSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTAINING REQUIRED HEAD ROOM EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES. CLEARANCES. FIELD CHECK BEFORE STARTING ANY INSTALLATION. � 3. PURGE ALL WATER LINES , BEFORE MAKING FINAL CONNECTIONS. _ 4. FLASH AND COUNTERFLASH ALL OPENINGS THRU ROOFS WITH SHEET LEAD BUILT AFF. FOOD SIZE FOR ALL HANGERS SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN NEPA- 13. ' MINIMUM OF 10" INTO THE ROOFING IN ALL DIRECTIONS FROM THE OUTSIDE OF THE REV1310NS PIPE. GG. SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE SUPPORTED E FROM STRUCTURAL. MEMBERS WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 5. WATER AND WASTE LINES TO BE ROUGHED INSIDE WALLS: EXTEND WATER AND WASTE ALL PIPING LOCATED BENEATH A ROOF SHALL BE HUNG FROM THE ROOF TRUSSES. LINES OUT OF WALLS TO EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES. 6. WHERE THE WORD FURNISH OR INSTALL APPEARS FOR THE PLUMBING CONTRACT, IT- HH. SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO INCLUDE 5 -YEAR RE -CERTIFICATION PRESSURE TEST. SHALL BE INTERPRETED TO MEAN THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR, L MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES NECESSARY TO INSTALL AND PLACE IN OPERATION I CONDITION. L 7. GENERAL WATER PRESSURE SHALL NOT EXCEED 60 PSI, PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES FOR WATER AS REQUIRED. U. PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE AS SCHEDULED ON THE DRAWINGS. I w a. Lu I n co a, a MECHANICAL 1 E, SPECIFICATIONS I, i DATE 5/4/1 DRAWN BY: SR CHECKED BY: KDH idara��: a evv. i j - i �- I_ _J I' i,_l.. .w :.._V_�._.... ...._-�' �._��.. a'� ..mss— — ._ ,..,.._.–. '' i ......._. .".� � i I i 'I II II 1. l I P If I'. III. II II 'II I r I i i II f I I � I I � j I i j j i j ij j i I � I I II ENLARGED PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" _ V-0,, �j _j_ ------ L I_�,�---- -- I I I 0011111111///// GENERAL SHEET NOTES 57921 y c 1. EXISTING PLUMBING INFORMATION IS BASED ON LIMITED EXISTING BUILDING DRAWINGS AND STATE OF "u FIELD WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FOR ACCURACY. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNER, ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY SITUATIONS THAT MODIFY �'�s''� 0R�o� OR INCREASE THE SCOPE OF WORK FROM THAT IS DESCRIBED IN THE DOCUMENTS. �/S��NAjj111���`� 2. ANYTHING NOT NOTED AS EXISTING IS TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF THIS PROJECT. 3. PRIOR TO ANY ISOLATION OF SYSTEMS, SHUTDOWNS OR DEMOLITION INC CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY INVESTIGATION AND NOTIFY THE FACILITIES ENGINEERING/MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED SO AS TO AVOID ANY DETRIMENTAL SHUTDOWN OF SYSTEMS TO ADJACENT SPACES. 4, PROTECT EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, PIPING, DUCTWORK, ETC. INDICATED TO REMAIN AGAINST REX NW- DAMAGE AND SOILING DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION. WHEN PERMITTED BY THE ARCHITECT, � _r j ITEMS MAY BE REMOVED TO A_SUITABLE, PROTECTED STORAGE LOCATION DURING SELECTIVE Y 0 l DEMOLITION AND THEN CLEANED AND REINSTALLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL LOCATIONS. 5. WHERE PIPE, DUCTWORK, INSULATION, FIXTURES OR EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED OR L DISTURBED, REMOVE THE DAMAGED PORTIONS AND INSTALL NEW PRODUCTS OF EQUAL CAPACITY O iz, AND QUALITY. WHERE IDENTICAL MATERIALS ARE UNAVAILABLE OR CANNOT BE USED, USE ca MATERIALS WHOSE INSTALLED PERFORMANCE EQUALS OR SURPASSES THAT OF THE EXISTING 0 t _J MATERIALS. � `a 6. SPACE ABOVE CEILING IS INDICATED TO BE A RETURN AIR PLENUM. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS w _ ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE NONCOMBUSTIBLE OR HAVE A MAXIMUM 2 / II 5 FLAME SPREAD AND 50 ° I SMOKE DEVELOPMENT FINISH RATING. WIRING SHALL BE LABELED PLENUM RAPED PER NFPA 70, --1- 7. PROVIDE STOP VALVES AT EVERY FIXTURE ON BOTH HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY LINES. G VALVES, ESCUTCHEONS, FITTINGS, ETC. MUST BE CHROME PLATED. WHERE EXPOSED, CHROME > PLATED PIPE IS TO BE USED. g. ALL SANITARY PIPING INSTALLED UNDERGROUND IS TO BE PITCHED @ 1% SLOPE EXCEPT FOR 2" 2 LINES WHICH SHALL BE PITCHED AT 2% SLOPE. 04 cq 9. ALL OVERHEAD PIPING IS TO BE ROUTED TIGHT TO BUILDING STRUU STRUCTURE. C a w � 10. PIPING IS NOT PERMITTEDINDEMISING WALLS. e'~- 0 11. ALL EXPOSED, EXTERIOR PIPING SHALL BE PAINTED WITH RUST INHIBITIVE PRIMER, COLOR CL CODED FINISH, AND IDENTIFICATION LABELS, 12 DO NOT ROUTE ANY WATER CONVEYING PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT j '13. ALL ACCESSIBLE P -TRAPS MUST BE PROVIDED WITH BOTTOM CLEANOUT PLUGS. 14. INSULATE EXPOSED P -TRAPS,. HOT AND COLD VALVES AND PIPING SERVING HANDICAPPED LAVATORIES. 15. NOTHING IS PERMITTED TO BE ATTACHED TO, SUSPENDED FROM, OR PENETRATE THE ROOF DECK. CONTRACTOR MAY ATTACH TO OR SUSPEND FROM THE TOP CHORD OF THE JOIST OR THE STRUCTURAL STEEL WHICH EXISTS ABOVE THE SPACE. j 16. ALL CONCEALED PIPING SHALL BE TESTED AND PROVEN WEATHERPROOF PRIOR TO CONCEALMENT, 17, ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS ARE TO BE INSTALLED FLUSH WITH THE FINISHED FLOOR. SHEETKEYNOTES- I REMOVE EXISTINGPLUMBING FIXTURE COMPLETE, REMOVE SUPPLY AND DRAIN PIPING TO CONCEALED LOCATION AND CAP. PATCH WALL TO MATCH EXISTING FINISH AS REQUIRED. 2 REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE AND MAINTAIN SUPPLY AND DRAIN PIPING FOR RE -USE. TEMPORARILY CAP ANY UNUSED WATER, VENT AND SANITARY PIPING WITHIN WALL. 3 CLEAN AND REFURBISH EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE TO LIKE NEW CONDITION. CONTACT OWNER IF FIXTURE IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY 4 NOT USED LJ- -- 5 FIELD VERIFY CONDITIONS AND EXACT LOCATION OF THE PIPING. REPLACE WITH LAV -1 OR SK -1 AS SCHEDULED AND REWORK PLUMBING AS REQUIRED TO EXTEND CW; HW, SAN AND VENT PIPING AS REQUIRED FROM THE EXISTING REMOVED LAV LOCATION. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS. 6 EXTEND AND CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY MAIN IN EXISTING RESTROOM LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING SANITARY MAIN LOCATION, SIZE, INVERT AND DIRECTION OF FLOW PRIOR TO r WORK. 7 EXTEND AND CONNECT TO EXISTING VENT MAIN IN EXISTING RESTROOM LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING VENT MAIN LOCATION AND SIZE PRIOR TO WORK. H j - 8 EXTEND AND CONNECT TO EXISTING CW/HW PIPING. FIELD VERIFY CONDITIONS AND EXACT LOCATION g "`9 OF THE PIPING PRIOR TO WORK. 3/4" CW/HW ON 1 � 1 1/2" CW/HW' _ ON IN WALL 1 F�1KS-1 - REM=I- FCO 3 1I I 3/4" CW/HW 1 0/H j 1 I Q 3/4" CW/HW TO WH MOUNTED ON SHELF ABOVE MS I 1/2" CW/ HW --- ---_ --_ ON IN WALL I I I 1&2 P2.0 _ F Ii 1 — — -- —I — — — —_— Kali _ T o ._... ._._ __—_—. __-. 4 4 _ _— � --- - _ - - ----- - ---- - - - - 1r -- �—_— — I. u REVISIONS - - - - ----------- -- - I - I- L I I Win_ �: .._._:, -�I------c`----- I I i ----- ! --- - - — -- -- — __- _ - ------ -------- �` II 8.619 1,16sc� _ -,;,i .,zaarr.�rnm, c� 0 LL_ z w J 0 lo� w F z W LSI z 0 Lo LLJ 0 .. I I I I I I I I I I Lu OFT -„z;.., FI tl=w I li II cL L _L rJI ;I J Icy r-- w cn o u.'�'U /m, %u /—_— — --- v----- __ ria'-_-,_._ .__.�- � ..ft.l FfL mm/mm, i— I PLUMBINGOVERALL PLUMBING PLAN PLANS SCALE: 1/8” - V-0" DATE 5/4/12 npAVVN AY- rlwprvpn Py. — ,I SIGNAGE MOUNTED ON BUILDING -� LINE ABOVE CANOPY - SEE ARCHITECTURAL D I . DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BABY DEPOT& LB -33 (L3 II i I i 1— i i i U I I i j C I I (r_ i' III I � I I ,III j_ L i i I (EM) EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1. EM SYSTEM AT EXTERIOR EGRESS DOORS UTILIZES A SINGLE CIRCUIT WITH 4 WIRES: 1) UNSWITCHED HOT, 2) SWITCHED HOT, 3) NEUTRAL, 4) GROUND, BATTERY 2. WIRE "W" (WALL -PACKS) AS EXTERIOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT ON THE SWITCHED HOT AS CONTROLLED BY SWITCHES, LIGHTING CONTACTORS OR TIME CLOCKS,. EE INTERIOR 3. WIRE "EE" (BATTERY PACK) UTILIZING THE UNSWITCHED HOT WIRE. 4. "E1" (REMOTE HEAD) FIXTURES SHALL ILLUMINATE VIA BATTERY PACK "EE" 1N THE EVENT OF POWER -- -�- - - L-- - DISRUPTION TO THE UNSWITCHED HOT CIRCUIT, E1 W EXTERIOR 5. ALL "E1" REMOTE HEADS TO BE MOUNTED ON THE EXTERIOR DIRECTLY OVER OR ADJACENT TO THE DOORWAY AS SHOWN. (TYPICAL) LOW VOLT WIRING - #12 6. WIRING METHOD SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. AWG MIN. EMERGENCY ,.: S , � $�` � � ` 1 �.(: � AND � pep '� ' � 1 k NO. a �...„t,, x _I �' I 1 ' I/ i .G{4 sf �'I LIGHT _`TES NIGHT GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES - 1. NO ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO INDICATE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES, LIGHT FIXTURES, COMMUNICATION DEVICES, WIRING, CONDUIT, ETC. TO BE. REMOVED AND/OR RELOCATED. HOWEVER, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID. 2. REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES ON WALLS OR CEILING BEING REMOVED. COORDINATE SUCH CONDITIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 3. EXISTING CONDUITS, CIRCUITS OR SYSTEMS IN WALLS OR CEILING BEING REMOVED WHICH SERVE SURROUNDING UN REMODELED AREAS SHALL BE REWORKED AND MAINTAINED. 4. ' EXISTING CONDUITS, CIRCUITS OR SYSTEMS PASSING THROUGH THE REMODELED AREAS WHICH SERVE UNREMODELED AREAS SHALL REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND REMODELING; AND SHALL BE RELOCATED AND REROUTED. 5. CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS INTERRUPTED BY REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BE MAINTAINED. 6. ALL UNUSED WIRE (POWER & COMMUNICATION) SHALL BE REMOVED. 7. ALL EXISTING WIRING (POWER & COMMUNICATION) THAT IS TO REMAIN SHALL BE REWORKED OR REPLACED WITH CODE COMPLIANT MATERIAL & SUPPORTS. 8. EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES THAT REMAIN OR ARE BEING RELOCATED SHALL BE CLEANED AND RE-LAMPED. BROKEN LENSES SHALL BE REPLACED. PROVIDE NEW BALLASTS IF REQUIRED TO MAKE FIXTURE OPERATIONAL. GENERAL I 'I. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS, 2. REFER TO DRAWING E5.0 FOR NOTES, SCHEDULES, AND SYMBOL LEGENDS. 3. ROWS OF FIXTURES SHALL BE CONTROLLED ALTERNATELY AND WIRED TO SEPARATE PANELS, CONTACTORS OR LIGHTING RELAY PANELS FOR 50/50 LIGHT LEVEL DISTRIBUTION. 4. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING A-6, SECTIONS - "A -A” "B" "C" "D" FOR LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION. DETAILS: 5. ALL 277 VOLT INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE CONNECTED WITH 2 #10 & #10 GROUND. 6. ALL EXISTING FIXTURES SHALL BE CLEANED AND RELAMPED, REPLACE WITH T-8 LAMPS, BALLASTS AND REFURBISH AS REQUIRED. 7. ALL EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL BE CONNECTED WITH 2#8,#8GND. LIGHTINGO FURNISH AND INSTALL POWER WIRING TO EXTERIOR SIGNS. UTILIZE CIRCUITS INDICATED. MOUNT JUNCTION BOXES ACCORDING TO SIGN MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS WITHIN T-0" OF SIGN TRANSFORMERS. ROUTE POWER THROUGH THE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS, SEE DRAWING E-4.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO, LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS SHALL BE INITIATED BY THE BUILDING EMS. VERIFY C) WITH SIGN COMPANY ALL FINAL, SIGN LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 0 ALL EXISTING AND EXISTING RELOCATED LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE RE-LAMPED: RE -BALLAST AND REFURBISH AS REQUIRED. 3O PROVIDE BODINE B50ST EMERGENCY BALLAST IN EXISTING AND EXISTING RELOCATED FIXTURES, REWIRE FIXTURES TO EMERGENCY LIGHTING CIRCUITS AS SHOWN: WIRE IN SERIES (AFTER) OCCUPANCY SENSOR TO REDUCE LIGHT LEVELS BY 50 LD PERCENT. 0 LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE ADDED IN THIS AREA. COORDINATE LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS AND WIRE TO MATCH LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEME. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES WITHOUT A LETTER DESIGNATION ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. SEE GENERAL NOTE#5. ALL LIGHTING BRANCH PANELS ARE NEW, ALL EXISTING AND NEW LIGHTING ARE WIRED TO NEW PANELS AS SHOWN. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES DESIGNATED WITH 'EHA' SHALL BE WIRED TO SPARE CIRCUIT IN EXISTING EMERGENCY PANEL EHA. Lu w C� II Iu LLJ ui z 0 I_ C L �1 w w 0 w w Q LIGHTING APLAN DATE 5/4/12 DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY: JSR A A noc+ ve a r®e®e a ww, C) LD ® cs> 0- 0 r— L9 CD,, 7 C`4 "Q C:J � COR LL_ ci c z - t0 cr a - Lu w C� II Iu LLJ ui z 0 I_ C L �1 w w 0 w w Q LIGHTING APLAN DATE 5/4/12 DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY: JSR A A noc+ ve a r®e®e a ww, It � I I I I I I � I I I - ------- LA -16 -=-- LA -12 LA -14 LA -14 LA -10 LA -10 LA -12 \�---- ___- =r7 __� - 1 GFI ti. � I 44"L'A-6 LA -9 I -- - -- , - - LA -18 - _ v EF =-� -- --c- GFI LA:12• I � - +84 AFF LA -6 �� -.. _ __ .GFI - 44" i � MANAGER LA -33 EHA - E_7RAININ- ��- \/ELA CASH OFFICE COUNT ROOM _ 7�� L----_.-..._._� ._ �lsm - +44" r � � � VENDING LA -7 j LA -8 LA -18 LA -18 , ll BREAK ROOM ( MACHINES l0t - N LA41 �I I _ GFI;" c� a -�- o o ,,� z ,,i GFI -u - EF -- _ - c� c� +44 L -50 2 „ LA -10 / LA -8 �-' "' 0 O 0 a LA -17 T �! _ - LA -5 LA 12 - a o r �� \� _ _ - :._._ _ ... GFI �_F4T /-4n\r - LA 4 G ® HALLWAY Ell LA -30L-4 3l ,-- LA -54 LA -52 _ _jb LA428 _ 0 I G I, , F A N THREE WAL R HALL PROVIDE PLYWOOD PANELS EL � O l.S CONTRACTOR A INDICATED. COQRDI ATELOCATIONS W ITH BCF PROJECT r AC 1 - �U TON FOR THE P GING LA 22 MANAGER. COORDINATE MOUNTING LOCATIONS S LA 26 � EM PANEL AND RECEPTACLE/S. EEI AMPLIFIER; SE URITY SYSTEM � ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION _ LA -38 S m `i LA -59,61 LA -24 LA -44 rII DEPT. MGR'S OFFICE 5 JAN. - Sm �� _.- , r-�~ `� EQUIP. ROOM , --O LA -55,57 L©SS PREVENTION 9 IlY �. LA -40 iwH LA -4 T ------- \ �. LA -29 LA -26 DF LA -24 � -4 LA -20 LA -22 LA -22 LA -46 LA -48 (; ) LA -20 Sm HA -28 (13)1 M---1 -_ i _ I� _r_� - --- —i �_:_----- ------ & SYSTEM S MOUNT RECEPTACLES & NOVAR BMS7 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL LOW VOLTAGE OUTLET. OVERIDE PANEL FOR TIME CLOCK SECURITY PANEL 40 AF F I L I r LARGED ._------ ... _.__....___..._._._.-. _.. _ .._.___._. _. _..__.._.-.__._-___- _------- LA-12 _ _ POWER t G KEY NOTES AUTOMATIC FLUSH OR WATER FLOW SENSOR, PROVIDE ALL JUNCTION BOXES, TRANSFORMERS,CONDUIT AND WIRING REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. (NOTE NOT USED). OO JUNCTION BOXES MOUNTED ABOVE DOORS AS DIRECTED BY SECURITY SYSTEM REPRESENTATIVE. ® REFER TO "CASH ROOM DOOR RELEASE WIRING DIAGRAM" ON E3.0 ® INSTALL OUTLET IN CEILING OUTSIDE COUNT ROOM DOOR FOR SECURITY CAMERA. FURNISH AND INSTALL COAX CABLE ABOVE CEILING FROM CASH OFFICE TO EXTERIOR SIDE OF COUNT ROOM DOOR. LEAVE 8'-0" OF SLACK CABLE COILED AT EACH END. (1)-3/4"x 8'-0°'x 4'4', PLYWOOD BACKBOARD. PAINT ALL SIDES WITH GRAY FIRE RETARDANT PAINT. ©AUTO DOOR OPENERS - COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS WITH PRODUCT LITERATURE AND INSTRUCTIONS. ® CASHWRAP SEE DETAILS SHEET E3.0 FOR ROUGH -IN REQUIREMENTS. $ PROVIDE 3/4„ CONDUIT STUB -UPS FOR S RVELLANCE SYSTEM (TYPICAL) E.C. TO RUN POWER TO EACH SET OF SENSORMATIC PEDESTALS FROM JUNCTION BOX LOCATED IN VESTIBULE CEILING. SAWCUT AND PATCH SLAB AS REQUIRED. 90 3/4” CONDUIT FOR ANTENNA WIRE (TYPICAL) (OR RUN WITHIN STORE FRONT FRAMING) 10 TELEVISION RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ON WALL 18" BELOW CEILING. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH BCF PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 11 PUBLIC VIEWING MONITOR RECEPTACLEVERIFY MOUNTING LOCATION & HEIGHT PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 12 EXISTING ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES THAT ARE TO REMAIN SHALL BE MAINTAINED THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. REPLACE DAMAGED RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES WITH NEW. 13 PROVIDE RELAY & CONTROL FOR EXHAUST FAN WITH ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSOR. 14 E.C. SHALL COORDINATE WITH NOVAR FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. E.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL 120 VOLT POWER, CONDUITS TS AND BOXES AS WEILL AS THE INSTALLATION OF THE PULSE 0 METER. 15 CASHWRAP FURNITURE COMES WITH INTEGRAL QUAD RECEPTACLE AND POWER WHIP. E.C. SHALL CONNECT POWER WHIP TO QUAD RECEPTACLE INSTALLED ON FLOOR BELOW ACCESS PANEL. 16 PROVIDE TX 4' PLYWOOD BACK BOARD SO BOTTOM IS AT 72" A.F.F. PAINT SAME COLOR AS WALL FOR COMMUNICATONS RACK, 17 MONITOR RECEPTACLE VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PR c_i , I STATE OF 'tw OR \9 .• . _ 0 __ SCALE. 1/4 _ 1 0 r�- 04 0 w Q cc uj d o x m z o 0. cra C :Lu N dLo 0 :;7 ,'off c_,V-, co ZD LL9 w CD _ 0 __ SCALE. 1/4 _ 1 0 r�- 04 0 w < � d z o 0. cra C :Lu 0 :;7 ,'off ZD _ 0 __ SCALE. 1/4 _ 1 0 0 w < � cra C :Lu 0 :;7 ,'off ZD LL9 w 0 Lu GO ry 0 0 [a® 0 W U UJI ' Y I' i 'ill I i 1111 I � �_ I I I SIDE ELEVATION ELEVATION \ E LJ L �.� WIRE ACCESS WIRE ACCESS \ NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A1.5 FOR LOCATION OF SPECIFIC WIDESPAN SHELVING. ACCESS PANEL - i , \ USE SHATTERPROOF GUARDS ON LAMPS ELEVATION CASHWRAP z� :: \\ NOT TO SCALE WIDESPAN SHELVING OLD TYPE NEW TYPE 4 FT 6 FT 1 8 FT CATEGORY 1ST S H E L F A.F.F. 2 N D S-H--EUF- A.F.F. 3RD S E A.F.F. A -S B -S C -S 1100 1100100. UKD INFANT CAR SEATS 6" 44" (LF) 86" (LF) TODDLER CAR SEATS BOOSTER CAR SEATS D 1101 110 101. 101. BOUNCE SEATS 28" 62" (LF) 96" (LF) F G 1102 11U102. 1U2. PLAYARDS(REGULAR) 60" (LF) 96" HIGH CHAIRS R 1103 1103 103. 103. STROLLER STOCK 501' 96" V H 1104 1104 URD 104. SWINGS 56" (LF) 96" (LF) 0 rS 1-S 1105 110 105. 105. BASSINETTES 60" (LF) 7 Oor o N -S 1106 1106 qM OM ALKERS/ENTERTAINERS 6" 50" (LF) 96" (LF) 0 1107 110 107. q 107. GATE CLOSET 96" (LF) P 1108 1108 10$. 108.E MATTRESS 56" 76" 96°° 0 1109 1109 109. 109. BOX END (ENDCAPS) 64" (LF) 1110 1110 mm STOCKROOM cu - - -- - - A B C 1111111 1131. 111. INFANT CAR SEATS 34" 76" (LF) TODDLER CAR SEATS BOOSTER CAR SEATS pMODULARuj 1112 111` j112: 112. STROLLERS 48" (LF) 96" (LF) , JACK WIRINGDETAIL_ 1113 qM. ED STOCKROOM (3 SHELVES) 1 = LIGHT 4' 6'WIDESPA N 1 L OH PER SHELF T WIDESPAN = 2 LIGHTS PER SHELF LIGHTING FIXTURE = (LF) 36" WIRE GRIU SHELF (BY OTHERS) T -O.. — 36" WIRE GRID SHELF (BY OTHERS) `F'-0" - 3'-0" 2'-0" q, 36" WIRE GRID SHELF BY OTHERS ( ) ov _-------- F y� _ _ � 1 v 57921Lu BY OTHERS - - -- ( ) z STATE OF ry 0 (BY OTHERS) „ u-------- IBM - V — — W R.lJ - „ 70 0 rS u o ° u 7 Oor o R G 3" cots (� �y co BLUE/WHITE WHITE/BLUE u 0 6'-01 Ju u o� 61-011 p cu - - -- - - - j CD (3) o pMODULARuj p --- , JACK WIRINGDETAIL_ 36" WIRE GRIU SHELF (BY OTHERS) T -O.. — 36" WIRE GRID SHELF (BY OTHERS) `F'-0" - 3'-0" 2'-0" 96" -BY OTHERS ( ) NOT TO SCALE REVISIONS T-0" _ TRANSFORMER'. EDWARDS #596 TO BE MOUNTER ON EDWARDS #593 TRANSFORMER MOUNTING 6-01,\ PLATE COMPLETELY ENCLOSED IN A TWO GANG ELECTRICAL BOX ABOVE LAY IN CEILING. FURNISH NEAREST 120V UNSWITCHED AND INSTALL LABEL ON JUNCTION BOX. 62 36 WIRE GRID SHELF MOUNT SOURCE 5'-0"' _ (BY OTHERS) JUNCTION BOX WITHIN 20 FEET OF DOOR OPENER. —1. - COUNT ROOM T 0" VALANCE - PROVIDED AND 12 VOLT DOOR RELEASE, MORTISE TYPE INSTALLED BY GC / OWNER TAP EDWARDS #181-AF,12V 3'4' LTG. FIXTURES TYP. "Ll1" PROVIDED BY BCF, INSTALLED PUSHBUTTON BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4 EDWARDS#852 FOOT FIXTURES SHALL BE El2'-0" � SPACED EVENLY FOR EACH RUN. PLAN LOCATE IN CASH OFFICE AS SYMBOL DIRECTED BY B.C.F. PROJECT w MANAGER. 1'-0'° - EDWARDS #340-4E5 B � �- � M �- � cfl r--- oo a� � PUSHBUTTON 88dB AT '10 FEET r EDWARDS #852 q, 36" WIRE GRID SHELF BY OTHERS ( ) ov _-------- 36" WIKE UKID SHELF _ _ BY OTHERS - - -- ( ) ry 0 (BY OTHERS) „ u-------- - V — — W R.lJ - „ 70 p u o ° u 7 Oor -- R G -------------------- BLUE/WHITE WHITE/BLUE u 0 6'-01 u 61-011 p - - -- - - - j — pMODULARuj p --- , JACK WIRINGDETAIL_ tl.1 1 o u u--------------------- ° -----u p 6'-011 5'a®� 62 " — 36°'WIRE GRID SHELF u „ p c'_ ° ' 0 62"' 36"' WIRE GRID SHELF ( BY OTHERS SCALE: NOT TO SCALE C� ' (BY OTHERS) � �; o ) a- CL u----- ----------- U - - V u �� p u JI 41-011 —— p u u u � o 4'`0" _ - - - - - 0 0 0 ila - (2) 18" X 96" WIRE GRIDS o u uLjj o _ o --------- (BY w OTHERS) f 3 -0 u u V u — o Uw o 3 -� — — o — cll� a- 0 W - uLL - u up u cf) p u 4'-O. 48" _ - - - -------- 2'-0" _ o 2 -O" uo — 71 uw — — u — a-- o 0 J o u '" 3 -O — -------- u— 2E -- u —— - o WHITE/ORANGE C=)ORANGE/WHITE 0 0 u u - BLUE/WHITE WHITE/BLUE u u - p - - - u 9 p o - W � 2'-0" 96" -BY OTHERS ( ) NOT TO SCALE REVISIONS T-0" _ TRANSFORMER'. EDWARDS #596 TO BE MOUNTER ON EDWARDS #593 TRANSFORMER MOUNTING 6-01,\ PLATE COMPLETELY ENCLOSED IN A TWO GANG ELECTRICAL BOX ABOVE LAY IN CEILING. FURNISH NEAREST 120V UNSWITCHED AND INSTALL LABEL ON JUNCTION BOX. 62 36 WIRE GRID SHELF MOUNT SOURCE 5'-0"' _ (BY OTHERS) JUNCTION BOX WITHIN 20 FEET OF DOOR OPENER. —1. - COUNT ROOM T 0" VALANCE - PROVIDED AND 12 VOLT DOOR RELEASE, MORTISE TYPE INSTALLED BY GC / OWNER TAP EDWARDS #181-AF,12V 3'4' LTG. FIXTURES TYP. "Ll1" PROVIDED BY BCF, INSTALLED PUSHBUTTON BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4 EDWARDS#852 FOOT FIXTURES SHALL BE El2'-0" � SPACED EVENLY FOR EACH RUN. PLAN LOCATE IN CASH OFFICE AS SYMBOL DIRECTED BY B.C.F. PROJECT w MANAGER. 1'-0'° - EDWARDS #340-4E5 B � �- � M �- � cfl r--- oo a� � PUSHBUTTON 88dB AT '10 FEET r EDWARDS #852 q, ov _-------- 36" WIKE UKID SHELF (BY OTHERS) u-------- - V — — p -------------------- u u p - - -- - - - p — p --- , u--------------------- ° -----u p 6'-011 -- — — u ---------------------------u — o u----- ----------- - u o —— u u - - - - - 0 0 5v.O n - (2) 18" X 96" WIRE GRIDS _ o --------- (BY OTHERS) f u — u — — u- - p - u up u p u 4'-O. 48" _ - - - -------- uo — — — u — a-- o o u '" 3 -O — -------- u— -- u —— o u u - p u u p - - - u o - 2'-0" u — o — — — � u u — --------------- u----- u u - - -- - - u �.O" .. V p . o p - - - u 96" -BY OTHERS ( ) NOT TO SCALE REVISIONS T-0" _ TRANSFORMER'. EDWARDS #596 TO BE MOUNTER ON EDWARDS #593 TRANSFORMER MOUNTING 6-01,\ PLATE COMPLETELY ENCLOSED IN A TWO GANG ELECTRICAL BOX ABOVE LAY IN CEILING. FURNISH NEAREST 120V UNSWITCHED AND INSTALL LABEL ON JUNCTION BOX. 62 36 WIRE GRID SHELF MOUNT SOURCE 5'-0"' _ (BY OTHERS) JUNCTION BOX WITHIN 20 FEET OF DOOR OPENER. —1. - COUNT ROOM T 0" VALANCE - PROVIDED AND 12 VOLT DOOR RELEASE, MORTISE TYPE INSTALLED BY GC / OWNER TAP EDWARDS #181-AF,12V 3'4' LTG. FIXTURES TYP. "Ll1" PROVIDED BY BCF, INSTALLED PUSHBUTTON BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 4 EDWARDS#852 FOOT FIXTURES SHALL BE El2'-0" � SPACED EVENLY FOR EACH RUN. PLAN LOCATE IN CASH OFFICE AS SYMBOL DIRECTED BY B.C.F. PROJECT w MANAGER. 1'-0'° - EDWARDS #340-4E5 B � �- � M �- � cfl r--- oo a� � PUSHBUTTON 88dB AT '10 FEET r EDWARDS #852 lid ij i I- 11\ MVI i Q I I V I 0 I`_" LAj I I- I I I 110 1. The System i, Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. Include a control panel, automatic fire detectors, notification devices, remote annunciators, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. ii. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer, iii. The equipment manufacture shall provide all wiring diagrams, equipment shop drawings, battery calculations, etc. per state and local codes. All prepared & signed by a state certified fire alarm designer. Submit necessary quantity of materials to the authority having jurisdiction for permit. (C 1 ) ( ( L 2. Requirements / ( 1 ( l i. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans). ii. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity aa ty to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period off twenty-four (24) hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be r automatic. T_. � I(r, C t° — 1= �_J I�- F I F _-- % I 95,d � >" ui. All circuits requiring u is e ui n system operating ower ffh U -s all be 24VL7C and hall rn — u �r F � � -, � �s be individually fused at the ,:. V S � .�. �, � � _. _ � � q g Y p 11 u 1 � rI!r�_ �_Y 1 _J � - I ] I I . � 0; -r _ � � Ir - � I control anal. uL1lTS s �- � � 7 c 75c p 1 � 75cd v. 75cd S � �-- The panel el shall be addressable type w it a minimum capacitya ci tY of 120 a dd ressable points. Srgrial circ uifs shall " -2 - � fS F be provided forthe annunciation devices Shawn on Ian i2 tamP pare circuits. Construction shallbaL�75cd76cd 75cd171d 177cd modular w/ solid state microprocessor based electronics. -1� \ / 7 IFf CEILING ING 77cd P F MOUNTED Scontrol s v. The an 1 shall support class B supervisedervised initiation circuits.LAN 75cd �AFCEILI G ING MOUNTED �0 L� TED FIRE ALARM NOTES 1. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND THE APPLICABLE UNIFORM CONSTRUCTION CODE AND LOCAL ORDINANCES. 2. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COPPER. ALUMINUM WIRE WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED, 3. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL BE MINIMUM WIRE SIZE OF #16 AWG. 4, FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL AND DEVICE INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI 117.1 1998 AND ALL OTHER ADA CODES AND REQUIREMENTS 5, STROBE AND HORN/STROBES SHALL. BE CEILING MOUNTED OR WALL MOUNTED IF WALL MOUNTED THEN STROBE AND HORN/STROBES SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 80" BELOW THE CEILING WHICHEVER IS LOWER. ALL STROBES SHALL HAVE A SYNCHRONIZED FLASH. ALL HORN/STROBES SHALL BE WHITE UNLESS THIS IS NOT ALLOWED BY THE LOCAL AHJ. 6. DETECTORS SHALL NOT BE LOCATED CLOSER THAN (3) FEET FROM VENTILATION REGISTERS. M 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DI EN 0 Stl NS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WOR THE E D COMPLIANT. E COM LIA 8. H INTENT IS TO FURNISH A SYSTEM' WHICH IS CO T . AFG - ABOVE FINISHED GRADE UON -UNLE E SS OTHERWISE RWISE NOTED. ETR - EXISTING TO REMAIN .. 1 3. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter DACT 177cd F g ( ) J 177cd _�_: :__. 177cd c CEILING, — - —.—_— — I i. Thecontrol anal shall be provided with a DACT unit. The D - �. __._�_ (� �_._ - ._ - ��-__ _ � _- �t ACT unit shall transmit fire alarm _i C - _ _- — — _ =-_ - ----- _ P p MOUNTEfT v actr rt to a central supervising location as chosen b n the owner. System hall s be capable of seizing a c!� Y p g Y Y p _ CEILING 9 C ILING CEILING — - � telephone Line and sending an alarm sig nal.MOUNTED M UNTED MOUNTED *_0_0-0-4 � 4. Peripheral Devices I -I r. Supply and install where indicated on the plans fire alarm horn and ADA visual unit. Audio/visual units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices The housingshall be designed geed to accommodate either hems, bells; or chimes. The unit shall be complete -- — --- __ _.__.__- with pyramidal shaped lens with fire lettering visible from a 180 field of view. Lamp shall provided 4 wire connection to insure c su e properly supervised in/out system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting ' hardware including back box. Audio/visual unit shall meet requirements of the American Disabilities Act for - --- T _-____-- - -- _ - -, � � the area served and be UL listed far its in ended r •. . t pu pose. Strobe infensrty shall be sized tv provide a minimum of. 0375 footcandles at any point in any public space. All alarm indicating devices shall be fitted with the manufactures red surface mounted back box for surface mounted / applications. All strobes shall j pp be synchronized ed an continue separately te/Y after silence only upon reset will they discontinue. time. / 5. Addressable Device Types 1 1 i. General / 177 d 177cd 177cd 1 177cd 117c tl 1 The system controlane over 1 its two wire multi F S F drop channel must be capable of % S com munrcatin with he e g t types of addressable devices specified below. Addressable devices will .-� OILING...' CEILING 'CEI INC L CEILINGhe CE LIN i located as shown on the drawrn s. g MOUNTED MOUNTED. MOUNTED Mm UNTED MOUNTED i T i T ir. Addressable Pull Stations (Manual Fire Alarm Boxes L I a`Il .O9 Addressable pull stations sh communicate cate thestation's status (alarm normal to the control ane/ over two wires which also _ _.__i tourpower" 1 de o the pull station. t o The address will be Iset on each station. The stations. will be A p 1 r7 L a . J� manufactured 1.---- � nc facturod from high impact red Lexan. The station will mechanically latch upon oerat on 177cd and remain so until manually reset by opening in with a key common to all systemem locks. Pull stations willbe single action. s I I I I I i I I I I :.. ----_ --- - --- - - - - -- ---- ---- - _-- - - rrr. Smoke Detectors CEILING -- MOUNTED (1)' The sensors shall be a photo type and obtain its operating power from the supervisory current in the �-- fire alarm detection loop. The detectors microprocessor utilizes both elements & measures the signals with rconditions. ICE,-� C) F F. _-- g aspect to time. Detection sensitivity shall be independent of environmental -�' O �- The sensitivity of the sensor shall be adjustable. F (2) The duct smoke sensors shall be a photo sensor and obtain its operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. Auxilia DPDT rely s shall be art of the rY Y p _ . duct housin . Activation of the relays shall be through the system program. Duct smoke sensors EF shall also be wit � 177cd h ed to shut down individual HVAC units upon the detection of smoke. Rewrote 177cd 177cd 177cd 177cd FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES 1. THIS RISER REPRESENTS A TYPICAL SYSTEM AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR I INSTALLATION. SYSTEM SUPPLER SHALL PROVIDE INSTALLATION DRAWINGS S AND SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS. EXACT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS SHALL ER S BE COORDINATED WITH THE SYSTEM SUPPLIER & FLOOR PLANS. THE F INSTALLATION SHALL MEET NEC, NFPA & ALL APPLICABLE STATE & LOCAL 5cd CODES.. 2. SYSTEM SUPPLIER SHALL SUPERVISE INSTALLATION, PROGRAM AND TEST 5cd .SYSTEM, AND INSTRUCT OWNER ON SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING SHALL BE IN 1/2" MINIMUM CONDUIT. OPEN WIRING FS MAY BE USED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING PROVIDED THAT IT IS PLENUM TS RATED, 4. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL MONITOR AND CONTROL MODULES AS RECOMMENDED BY SYSTEM SUPPLIER. 5. ALL CONTROL CABINETS SHALL BE IN GROUNDED PER N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS AUX least ten (10) years, and has a fully -equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the PANEL WITH EXISTING BUILDING FIRE AND PER SPECIFICATIONS. 6 REFER T SPECIFICATIONS O aPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONALREQUIREMENTS. R Q REFER TO x DRAWINGS FOR DEVICE QUANTITY AND LOCATIONS. VISIBLE DEI T THE FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING AND INSTALLING ADDITIONAL POWER SUPPLY PANELS FOR ALL HORNS AND HORN/STROBES IN THE ENTIRE BUILDING. THE ACTUAL NUMBER AND CAPACITY OF THE POWER SUPPLIES REQUIRED IS COMMENSURATE WITH THE TYPE AND STYLE OF SYSTEM PROPOSED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL REQUIREMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL 120 VOLT BRANCH CIRCUITS AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE FIRE ALARM CONTROL SYSTEM. LED rndIcator/ke test switch shall be installed whey in F � Y edicated on fhe drawings. If not indicated F S F � „ .: . on the drawings, the switches shall be located on the unit when it is accessible or on a n CEILING CEILING g � nearby CEILING CEILING CEILING- corridor wall is the unit is in an inaccessible location. Confirm al /ovations with, the architect MOU TED MOUNTED MOUNTED MOUNTED MOUNTED before installingif not shown on the drawings. g iv. Flow and Tamper Switches (1) Flow and tamper switches shall consist of a cast aluminumPiP e saddle which houses an electrical mechanical device to which is attached a corrosion free, flexible; low density, polyethylene addle. The paddle conforms with the inside diameter of the sprinkler pipe and p p pp ) �__:senses water movement. The flow switch shall incorporate an adjustable time delay mechanism v between paddle operated stem and alarm initiating contacts. Flow switch shall be UL listed. 57921 `STATE OF w ;v,. EOR /0 N A l ``\ rr„nlinl���� DUCT DETECTOR HVAC CONTRO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE IN ITS DESIGN THE ABILITY TO, UPON THE ACTIVATION OF ANY INITIATING DEVICE (PULL STATION, SMOKE DETECTOR, DUCT DETECTOR) , PERFORM A GLOBAL SHUT DOWN OF ALL HVAC UNITS IF THE LOCAL AHJ REQUIRES THIS FEATURE. 6. Installation L Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's t s recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power -Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits. All 77cd junction boxes and covers shall be sprayed red. Wiring color code shall be maintained tamed throughout: —177cd- 177cd 177cd ---- —( 77cd — _ 1 S ii. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely p Y CEILING CEILING CEILING, CEILING CEILING coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. MOUNTEDOUNTED M MOUNTED M UNTED MOUNTED ui. the contractor shall clean all. dirt and debris from I m the inside and the outside of the fire alarm — r I I I equipment after completion of the install p installation. (i� \ i i iv. The manufacturer's authorize r _ d representative shall provide on-site supervision of installation and all i related programming. Descriptions for each addressable device shall be provided by the Owner at the o timeprogramming, --_ __--- f v. Fire Alarm wiring shall be run in a conduit system below lay in ceiling orjoists in exposed areas... Wiring. and conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to sting ceilings, floors and walls. Open cable maybe used in J space orst s if plenum rated. 7• Testing i. The completed fire alarrri system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner. FIRE ALARM PLAN SCALE: 1/16” = V-0°' 8. Warranty i. The contractor t .tor shall warrant the completed sprinkler alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use. ii. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with the NFPA-72H guidelines, ANN 9. Quality Assurance i. Each and all items of the Fire/Sprinkler Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm SIGNAL CIRCUIT/S E.O:L:�75cd F�35cd ANN system manufacturer 77 y m n a cturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U. L."label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single SIGNAL CIRCUIT/S E.O.L. $ F F CONNECTION TO MONITORING control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable. 6cd 10cd 77cd 35cd AGENCY ii. Complete installation shall conform to applicable sections of NFPA - 72 and 72 E, NEC (NFPA-70) COM FiRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL and Local requirements. F FIRE ALARM LEGEND TO ADDITIONAL INITIATION DEVICES DS DS TS FS +24 0 PROVIDE ALL. CONTROL MODULES, iii. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a I DESCRIPTION S SMOKE DETECTOR ER S - - SMOKE DETECTOR -ELEVATOR RECALL F HORN/STROBE (STROBE LIGHT INTENSITY AS 5cd INDICATED) STROBE ONLY (STROBE LIGHT INTENSITY AS 5cd INDICATED) LLJ PULL STATION FS FLOW SWITCH TS TAMPER SWITCH DS DUCT -SMOKE DETECTOR. INSTALL IN RETURN t IN SUPPLY DUCT WHERE REQUIRED BY AUX least ten (10) years, and has a fully -equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the PANEL WITH EXISTING BUILDING FIRE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. ANN ANNUNCIATOR - 40 CHARACTER DISPLAY x a f Yv�.a:f R , r installationEL ALARM PANEL. FIRE ALARM PANELS . EL Y a Ff t s �v Y 9 z s r s. - 3 x ; � ?gid r r SHALL BE ABLE TO COMMUNICATE DUCT DETECTOR HVAC CONTRO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE IN ITS DESIGN THE ABILITY TO, UPON THE ACTIVATION OF ANY INITIATING DEVICE (PULL STATION, SMOKE DETECTOR, DUCT DETECTOR) , PERFORM A GLOBAL SHUT DOWN OF ALL HVAC UNITS IF THE LOCAL AHJ REQUIRES THIS FEATURE. 6. Installation L Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's t s recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power -Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits. All 77cd junction boxes and covers shall be sprayed red. Wiring color code shall be maintained tamed throughout: —177cd- 177cd 177cd ---- —( 77cd — _ 1 S ii. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely p Y CEILING CEILING CEILING, CEILING CEILING coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. MOUNTEDOUNTED M MOUNTED M UNTED MOUNTED ui. the contractor shall clean all. dirt and debris from I m the inside and the outside of the fire alarm — r I I I equipment after completion of the install p installation. (i� \ i i iv. The manufacturer's authorize r _ d representative shall provide on-site supervision of installation and all i related programming. Descriptions for each addressable device shall be provided by the Owner at the o timeprogramming, --_ __--- f v. Fire Alarm wiring shall be run in a conduit system below lay in ceiling orjoists in exposed areas... Wiring. and conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to sting ceilings, floors and walls. Open cable maybe used in J space orst s if plenum rated. 7• Testing i. The completed fire alarrri system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner. FIRE ALARM PLAN SCALE: 1/16” = V-0°' 8. Warranty i. The contractor t .tor shall warrant the completed sprinkler alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use. ii. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with the NFPA-72H guidelines, ANN 9. Quality Assurance i. Each and all items of the Fire/Sprinkler Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm SIGNAL CIRCUIT/S E.O:L:�75cd F�35cd ANN system manufacturer 77 y m n a cturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U. L."label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single SIGNAL CIRCUIT/S E.O.L. $ F F CONNECTION TO MONITORING control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable. 6cd 10cd 77cd 35cd AGENCY ii. Complete installation shall conform to applicable sections of NFPA - 72 and 72 E, NEC (NFPA-70) COM FiRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL and Local requirements. F FIRE ALARM LEGEND TO ADDITIONAL INITIATION DEVICES DS DS TS FS +24 0 PROVIDE ALL. CONTROL MODULES, iii. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a SYMBOL DESCRIPTION S SMOKE DETECTOR ER S - - SMOKE DETECTOR -ELEVATOR RECALL F HORN/STROBE (STROBE LIGHT INTENSITY AS 5cd INDICATED) STROBE ONLY (STROBE LIGHT INTENSITY AS 5cd INDICATED) LLJ PULL STATION FS FLOW SWITCH TS TAMPER SWITCH DS DUCT -SMOKE DETECTOR. INSTALL IN RETURN AIR DUCT. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL DETECTOR IN SUPPLY DUCT WHERE REQUIRED BY AUX least ten (10) years, and has a fully -equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the PANEL WITH EXISTING BUILDING FIRE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. ANN ANNUNCIATOR - 40 CHARACTER DISPLAY FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL. PANEL IIS REVISIONS Ll.. 0 k LL LU UJ m-- Z LL1 LU 0 C) LO (Y) LU 0 U PI IN I M7t IL_L 1 111 W. I N TO ADDITIONAL INITIATION DEVICES DS DS TS FS +24 0 PROVIDE ALL. CONTROL MODULES, iii. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a CONTROL RELAYS AND INTER -WIRING manufacturer who has been engaged in production of this type of equipment (software driven) for at TO INTER -PHASE NEW BCF FIRE ALARM AUX least ten (10) years, and has a fully -equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the PANEL WITH EXISTING BUILDING FIRE w Lu installationEL ALARM PANEL. FIRE ALARM PANELS . EL SHALL BE ABLE TO COMMUNICATE iv. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with UL. 864 requirements. TROUBLE, SUPERVISORYAND ALARM ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM CONDITIONS RESPECTIVELY FROM ONE UJ PANEL TO THE OTHER (BOTH CONTROL PANEL DIRECTIONS). N M —T U') CO r— 06 03 O 120 VAC. ALARM FIRE ALARM PLANS,NOTES SCALE, NOT TO SCALE AND DETAILS DATE 5/4/12 DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY: JSR ir%n A1^ A AC)Pn IN I M7t IL_L 1 111 W. I N 1,111illi VIII IllIIII�L_;IVl�_L 6�+i _L— i A B (c) D) E') F) MOUNT JUNCTION BOX-18"BEL gW FINISHED CEILING. HOMERUN PLENUM RATED RG59 CABLE BACK TO (3)1" CONDUITS IN TRENCH EQUIPMENT ROOM FOR TV. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS. ALL REGISTER WITH BCF PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, TERMINATE CABLE - - -1 TERMINATE IN FLUSH PHONES GO PER BCF RECOMENDATIONS AT 0TH ENDS. FLOOR BOX. ' 1 TO THIS IDF _ -- — — -- .r - — —F1.2— ur � _ I x 11 Sv SV s:.— [ SV sv - r�_ � TIS -1 I I r .[_ _ [:_� Jta IDF 0 JJ pp SP `�9 =- �_._« - - 1 -- - -t- :-9 _7 LA SV - n I... SP COIL 25, OF THE TELEPHONE &DATA d CABLE IN STRUCTURE ABOVE COLUMN. F F _ r WR ABC T .. U T RE _ ._�_ I A C OS C L Fi J k> SP VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH BCF. SP o - SP SP SP. _ . - ---- - — - -- _ -- _ — _ - �- P — f S O c_3 CELL j% r I / 5P SP SP I i C-1 SP SP 1, r DOI i I I I I I I IPF SP APZ SP SP �411 Sp SP L i I I I I I I„ SP - _.-G.ELL�-- _ SP — _-----�_-:_ SP -WIRE TO AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT NUMBER ONE i` IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. SP SP J \ WIDE TO AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT NUMBER TWO - — - - - Tv .. - IN EQUIPMENT -ROOM. Cfj--- - - ( C_ - CIO (2)1'° CONDUITS IN TRENCH FOR /// I COMMUNICATIONS. TERMINATE IN FLUSH [LOOR BOX. 1 _ I r j ",1COMMUNICATION GENERAL NOTES 1, REFER TO DRAWING E5 FOR ADDITIONAL PLAN NOTES. 2. ALL CATEGORY 5E DROPS AND TERMINATIONS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 568-B STANDARD, AND MAXIMUM 300'LONG. IF CAT 5E EXCEEDS THIS DISTANCE A CONTACT THE OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR INSTRUCTIONS. IF DISTANCE EXCEEDS THE 300' MAX LENGTH THEN FIBER OPTIC CABLE SHALL BE UTILIZED. 3. NO MORE THAN 10 EXTENSION PER I.D.F. EXTENSIONS CLOSEST TO KSU SHOULD BE WIRED DIRECT TO KSU. 4, EXTEND 25 PAIR CAT 3 CABLE FROM SERVICE PROVIDERS DEMARK LOCATION TO EQUIPMENT ROOM. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF DEMARK IN FIELD. 5. PROVIDE 1 CAT. 3,4 -PAIR FROM EQUIPMENT ROOM TO EACH ELEVATOR CONTROL ROOM. (WHERE PRESENT) 6. NO PART NUMBER SUBSTITUTIONS. 7. ALL PARTS CAN BE PURCHASED AT GRAYBAR (1-800-825-5517). 8. NO SUBSTITUTIONS FOR PHONE JACKS, TERMINATIONS, ETC. WILL BE ACCEPTED. 9. MOUNT TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLETS BELOW REGISTER COUNTER. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD. CABLING I I r E r t " 4 INSTALLATION SCOPE OF O @ THE FOLLOWING TASKS SHALL BE PERFORMED SUPPLY AND INSTALL (1) 25 pr CAT 3 PLENUM RATED CABLE FROM THE MDF TO EACH IDF. CABLE SHALL BE WHITE. ® CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT BOTH ENDS ON SPLIT 50pr 66 BLOCKS AND TESTED SUPPLY AND INSTALL (1) CAT 3 4pr PLENUM RATED CABLE FROM THE APPROPRIATE MDF OR IDF'S TO PHONE OUTLET LOCATIONS, TERMINATE THE CAT 3 PHONE CABLES WITH RJ11 OUTLETS AND TEST/LABEL. CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT MDF, & IDF'S ON SPLIT 50pr 66 BLOCKS • BRIDGE CLIPS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON SPLIT 50pr 66 BLOCKS TO CONNECT OUTLET CABLE TO BACKBONE CABLE. • CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT THE PHONE OUTLET. • SUPPLY AND INSTALL (1) CAT 5E 4pr PLENUM RATED CABLE FROM THE MDF TO DATA OUTLET LOCATIONS AP'S, WIP'S. TERMINATE 4 AP LOCATIONS WITH 5688 JACKS, (EITHER SURFACE OR RECESSED IS ACCEPTABLE) ® TERMINATE THE CAT 5E DATA CABLES WITH RJ45 OUTLETS, TEST AND LABEL. CABLE,SHALL BE WHITE. • PROVIDE (1)5 FOOT AND (1)1U FOOT CAT 5E PATCH CABLES. FOR EACH CAT 5E CABLE INSTALLED. • CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT MDF ON 12 PORT MINI PATCH PANELS. QUALITY AS REQUIRED, • CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT THE DATA OUTLET. • SUPPLY AND INSTALL (2)18 AWG 2 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED PLENUM RATED CABLES FROM THE MDF TO ALL SPEAKER LOCATIONS IN A DAISEY CHAIN CONFIGURATION. HOMERUN5 AS INDICATED. • SUPPLY, INSTALL AND TERMINATE ALL SPEAKERS AS PER PLAN. • SUPPLY AND INSTALL (1) 25pr CAT 3 PLENUM RATED CABLE FROM THE DEMARK TO THE MDF IN EQUIPMENT ROOM. • CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED AT BOTH ENDS ON SPLIT 50pr 66 BLOCKS AND TESTED. • PROVIDE RED -LINE AS -BUILT DRAWINGS OF CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE. • EXACT LOCATIONS OF TELEPHONE JACKS, DATA JACKS, AP'S, IDF'S, WIPS, ETC SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH BURLINGTON PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ADDITIONAL FIBER OPTIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. • FIBER CABLE COMMSCOPE R -006 -DS -6F -FSU (SUPPLIED BY VENDOR) CABLE SHALL BE WHITE. • FIBER TERMINATION BOX - QUANTITY OF (2) ONE ON EACH END TERMINATED WITH SC CONNECTIONS (SUPPLIED BY VENDOR) • (2) FIBER PATCH CABLES SC TO SC CONNECTIONS (SUPPLIED BY VENDOR) COMMUNICATION TELEPHONE CONNECTOR EITHER ALLENTEL - AT468 - 4 MODULAR SURFACE JACK OR ALLENTEL AT630A4 WALL JACK. 4 PAIR 24 GA. PLENUM (WHITE) CATEGORY 3 CABLE TO DE RUN TO 566 FIELD TERMINATION BLOCK. PHONES TO BE WIRED TO THE EXTENSIONS LISTED BELOW. ALL WALL JACKS TO BE MOUNTED AT 45" A.F.F. ALL OFFICE PHONE JACKS INCLUDING THE FAX JACKS SHALL BE LOCATED UNDER THE COUNTER TOPS. VERIFY ROUGH IN LOCATION WITH BURLINGTON PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CELL CONNECT FROM CELL LOCATION TO CLOSEST IDF OR EQUIPMENT ROOM WITH CAT 3 CABLE. TERMINATE ON A RJ -45 JACK 568E AT 13'-0" AFF. CAT 5E CABLE ROUTED BETWEEN MDF & OUTLET, TERMINATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 568B WIRING STANDARD ON A RECESSED CAT 5 RJ45 JACK. - BOGEN 3867251 SPEAKERS- SPEAKER TO BE TAPPED (2) TWO SP WATTS 70V 18 GA. 2 CONDUCTOR PLENUM & SHIELDED CABLE SHALL BE WHITE. SPEAKERS TO BE DAISY CHAINED TERMINATING AT EQUIPMENT ROOM. BOGEN S86T725PG-8WVK - SPEAKER TO BE TAPPED (1) ONE WATT 70V 18 GA. 2 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE. SPEAKERS TO BE DAISY SV CHAINED TERMINATING AT EQUIPMENT ROOM. NOTE: TO BE USED WITH ALL SPEAKERS BOGEN - RE84 - SPEAKER ENCLOSURE BOGEN - TB -8 -TILE BRIDGE / BRACKET ujra SIEMON S6611l S66 FIELD TERMINATION BLOCK. SIEMON S89B S66 STAND OFF BRACKET. SIEMON MC425 S66 COVER. 25 PAIR 24 GA. IDF PLENUM CABLE TO BE RUN IN CONDUIT TO EQUIPMENT ROOM. MOUNTED AT 13'-6" AFF. E WIRELESS INTRUSION PROTECTION - REQUIRES CONNECTION VIA CAT 5. MOUNTED AT 13'-6" AFF, xe o - 57921 STATE OF = _ 0% SONAr - 00 0 U) REVISIONS r~, «o COMMUNICATION PLANS DATE 5/4/12 DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY: JSR r� o tsa ujra cu crs (1) cy) CN r o� CD ra a� 4'^' CL 0 U) REVISIONS r~, «o COMMUNICATION PLANS DATE 5/4/12 DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY: JSR ll._.I.u�:�__ - . _..�.✓ ice._ , ......Y.w:.�_.,__y�_�_ �. � __., _. �.�.�_r�_-- - - _ _..._ ___ --__ _� �: ��..,�---- ��, - ­_ -_-__-_7!r-- , - ­__,_____­ -"-I--,,, -1-L, - : : 1 i ,!.LJ_1.,J_L_ ....... .... . Jd�: L _�i,__,,__� ---.,------ -------UL.--u-...-L-,,-.i-,.-.-----j.--!L-,.L�,L.i.,.,--.Jj.. L_____L__L_L___L__.________ . .[ I ". i L 1_111_11__�__L__]�] _!Ll -Li". ­___ i 1 -1 __ - _LJI.! I!, .J_I JAJ. � I I; - __ - ___ I , � ",�",,'�-,i,,,,,,�-,�c��,,,��,,��-,--� ...... -1 . , ___ __ _. I � Ili I I . III ��� I 1 LLL - -1-1. I _____ II"', I : � . I -�---,---"I-----�-i----,-�-----L-,- , �_­_ ­ -1 - -, ___. - - ----- -, ____ _�_,__._ ___,_____. __ _,_____,____. ___1- - - -___1_-._______ ,-,-.--- L�________ 1 ! __________.______ ------, ---.,.-----,.-,,-- __­ __ __­ ------- _._L__________I ___ .­­ _L1__________ . I I � � ! ! . ELECTM"ICAIL SPECIFICATIONS Z Fittings for rigid plastic conduit: Polyvinyl chloride, joints solvent welded in field, providing continuity of xi. Plaster frames shall be furnished for each recessed fixture installed in plaster ceilings and walls. L: RACEWAYAND GENERAL GROUNDING iii. Do not exceed the maximum tensile loaded as : i 1 mechanical strength and water tightness. Fittings and Gement shall be produced by the same manufacturer I� i I �; 11 tt recommended by the cable manufacturer. Never- exceed , A: DESCRIPTION OF WORK I as the conduit. x/i. Pendant mounted fixtures shall utilize pipe stems to mount fixtures at elevations as noted on the 1. The entire power, lighting system as well as building structure, mechanical & plumbing systems, fences & 25 pounds of pulling tension. ; 9 3. Fittings for rigid conduit: Cast or malleable iron bodies, zinc or cadmium plated, with full threaded hubs, drawings. Chains or cords will not be accepted. Wherever the mounting surface slopes, fixtures shall similar metal objects shall be permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with the � I , � , , 1, 1. The electrical contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment, and tools screw covers and gaskets when located in areas requiring gaskets. Approved manufacturers: Crouse -Hinds, be provided with universal type fixture hangers to allow the fixture to hang plumb. minimum requirements of the National Electrical Code, or as specified herein, whichever is the more iv. Minimize OUterjacket twisting during installation. I necessary for demolition and removal of existing and the complete installation of the Pyle National, Appleton, I stringent. I � needed) or bearn type clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. , i 10 new electrical work, ready to use, as shown on the drawings or specified herein. Work , �, 1i xiii. Fixtures shall be installed with due regard for beams, piping, ductwork, and other mechanical or 2. Grourid conductors shall be stranded, annealed copper with green insulation (insulation material as V. Do not remove more of the outerjacket of the cable then is i i ,,� ,� shall include, but not be limited to the following: I 4. Couplings and connectors for flexible steel conduit: Malleable iron or steel, zinc or cadmium plated and plumbing equipment. specified for general building tise), absolutely necessary for termination. individual pairs may ! i. Fumish and install new conduit and wire. shall fasten to the conduit by a clarriping action around the periphery. Connectors for "liquid -tight" flexible conduit shall be approved for the purpose and maintain the liquid -tight feature of the installation. Approved xiv. Incandescent fixtures shall be thermally rated, protected and marked for their application especially in 3. The entire power and lighting system shall be perrriaoeotly and effectively grounded including panels, be untwisted a maximum of 0.5 inches from the point of termination. i ii. Fumish and install all fuses, circuit breakers etc, manufacturers: Thomas & Betts, Steel City, O -Z Gedney. I I � nting, to protect against over -temperature and combustion. The installation shall comply starter enclosures, motor frames, and other exposed, non-current carrying parts of the electrical equipment. . f I ! III. Fumish and install new lighting fixtures & wiring devices. . I with Section 410-65 thru 410-72 the NEC. The equipment ground conductor shall be separate from the neutral conductor and shall not be used as a I vi. Cable pathways shall be routed in such a way as to i � iv. Furnish and install new fire alarm panel & devices. � 5. Bushings: Grounding type, with insulating plastic insert; malleable iron, zinc or cadmium plated, for steel xv. Branch circuit conductors shall be run in fluorescent fixture wiring channels only as permitted by the I load current carrying conductor. maintain clearance from sources of electromagnetic I � I 2. The exact location of all items shown on the electrical drawings is dependent upon fie/d conduit and aluminum alloy for aluminum conduit. Install grounding type bushings as required in the grounding section of this specification. N,EC, The Contractor shall be responsible for providing afi necessary boxes and conduit foran 4. Any item covered by the preceding paragraph which is within six feet of grounded metal and not directly interference (i. e, - light fixtures, motors, power conduits, etc.) maintain a minimum 6" of air space between cables � conditions. Review the plans and specifications for all parts and consult with other � � approved installation. interconnected with the grounded metal shall have a flexible bare copper cable connection not smaller than and EMI sources. I i trades of this project for pertinent data on sizes, locations, wiring, etc., as required for : I 6. Fittings for conduits : All conduit runs at building expansion joints shall be provided xvi. Where a modular wiring system is installed, all ceiling mounted recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures #6 A WG to the grounding system. E. Telephone cable outerjacket color shall be grey. I I a complete electrical installation. I . . I with O -Z type expansion fittings. Sizes shall be as dictated by the conduit size. A bonding jumper shall be securely connected to each conduit. Exterior exposed runs shall be furnished with suitable receptacles to match the modular wiring system furnished and installed 5. Where building type conductors are installed in a raceway, a green equipment grounding conductor shall be vii. Cables shall be routed in such a way as to minimize the overall length of the run. Cable length shall not exceed 90 : 3. The electrical contractor shall not attach to, cover up, or finish against any defective . ' of PVC conduit shall be provided with expansion fittings at intervals not exceeding by this Contractor. Each fixture shall be equipped to permit either single or multiple fixture circuit included in each raceway system. meters. I work, or install in a manner which will prevent proper installation of the work of other manufacturers recommendations. . wiring as is appropriate for the fixture type. I a pair as a result of termination to the patch panel shall be I 5. The services of a recognized independent testing laboratory shall be engaged to conduct al/ tests described I trades. I I 1 7. Outlet, Pull, Terminal and Junction Boxes in Classified (Hazardous) Areas: Cast boxes shall be copper -free xvii. When fixtures are installed in a fire proof ceiling, the fixture shall be U� L. listed to maintain the 6. Lighting fixtures permanently connected to the conduit system shall be grounded by means of a grounding conductor run inside the conduit. Fixtures mounted on trollies or portable lighting units shall be viii. Cable management system: Provide a complete cable . 4. The electrical contractor shall warrant a// work & material indicated on � I ' ! these electrical drawings for a period of I year from the date of final aluminum with integral hubs or box wall thickness sufficient for a minimum of five full tapered threads. fire proof rating or the fixture shall be fire proofed by the electrical Contractor using a U. L. grounded . by means of a grounding conductor in the portable cord. I management system including but not limited to: Cable runways, horizontal and vertical wire management panels, . I acceptance. Warranty shall include any additional labor or material � ; Covers shall be screw -on bolt -on through 12" x 12" boxes and hinged removable bolt -on covers for larger boxes. Boxes other than outlet boxes shall be equipped with a breather drain and equipment grounding lug accepted standard. see architectural drawings for ceiling ratings. ____ 'Y" hooks, velcro cable ties, stainless steel cable ties, etc. i . I.I re 11. "I quired to repair or replace defective item. � and all boxes shall be, as applicable, for installation in the particular classified (hazardous) areas which are designated 1 xviii. At the time of final inspection a// fixtures and equipment shall be complete with all required glassware 7. Convenience outlets shall be self -grounding type or shall have a green grounding conductor installed from the ground lug on the outlet to the outlet box. ix, "J" hooks shall be a minimum of 12" wide and come � 11� I B: CODES, PERMITS AND FEES an the drawings. Approved Manufactures: Crouse -Hinds, Pyle -National, Appleton, Adalet, O -Z Gedney, or Killark. andlor reflectors, clean and free of defects. A . ny glass -ware, or reflectors, etc., which have defects 6. Perform all acceptance and operational tests in the presence of the ArchitectlEngineer. Notify the 4 complete with a removable and reusable retaining strap. J I I I . shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense before final acceptance. 8. Motors shall be connected to the equipment ground conductor with a conduit grounding bustling and with a hooks shall support a maximum of 6 cables. I I 1. All work included by the drawings and specfflcatioris, together with afi material (or � 8, Conduit Fittings in Classified (Hazardous) Areas: Conduit seals andlor drain seals shall be installed in strict All fixtures shall be supported per NEC Article 410. I bolted solderiess lug connection or) the metal frame. I I equipment) furnished, shall comply with the latest published codes and standards listed I accordance with the NEC in classified (Hazardous) areas designated on the drawings, with special attention xix. All lamps shall be in working order at the time of final acceptance of the work by the Owner and 9. The armor of interlocked armor cable, wiring channels, cable trays, and all metallic conduit including rigid, x. Provide VelGro cable ties at the racks as required to finish II . insofar as such shall apply. All electrical items shall be UL labeled & listed. to the following: ArchitectlEngineer. This Contractor shall replace all defective lamps with new lamps until the work is EMT, and flexible conduit shall be connected at each end to the equipment ground conductor utilizing a dress the cable installation. Tie a maximum of four cables. 1 I 2. The contractor shall secure a// permits and pay a// fees that are required by the I. Entering or cross -connecting enclosures containing arcing or high temperature devices, finally accepted. conduit grounding bushing. Junction boxes and other enclosures (sizes above 5" x 5') shall utilize an Velcro Cable ties shall be black. I applicable local and state codes. � 1. /1. Two-inch conduit and larger entering any enclosure. equipment ground lug to securely bond the equipment grounding condu ctor to the enclosure. I 0. TIAIEIA 606 complaint labeling � . iii. Passing from Division I to Division Z from Division 2 to non -classified areas, with or without a barrier. xx. Low voltage lighting transformers should be protected by fuses. Fuse sizes shall be as . 3. Perform a// work in accordance with the latest edition of applicable codes including, I iv. Multi -conductor and shielded cables. I I . recommended by the transformer manufacturer. Busman type 10. Where any grounding conductor requires physical protection to maintain grounding integrity, it shall be run A. Provide a complete communications system labeling system. Include but I� but not necessarily limited to those listed below: i I I HRS or Littelfuse 155020, fuse holders are recommended. through a non-ferrous conduit or bonded to a continuous steel conduit at both ends. riot limited to: Cables, jacks, patch panel racks, etc. All labeling shall . . I I . I I. The National Electrical Code - sometimes referred to herein as G: ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES I I I I.The grounding electrode system shall consist of Y4" diameter x 10"copper clad comply with standards of TIAIEIA 606. , i I the "NEC" - (NFPA- 70). ! 1 . xxi. Solid state transformers for low voltage lighting shall not be used for dimming applications unless the ground rods. Exterior ground rods shall be driven to 12" below finished grade & be I . I i 1. Provide all necessary trenching, backfill & removal of trenched material from site. � 1 I fl. National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI -C2). 1. Supports shall be suitable for the device or equipment to be mounted. All supports shall present a neat I transformer and dimmer are a U. L. listed assembly specifically intended for the application. � provided with a 12" diameter x 30" long rigid pvc pipe w/ screw cover for inspection B. Provide . 8" x. 75" typewritten black lettering on white laminated adhesive . � : iii. All applicable state and local codes. . � I appearance, and shall be installed in such a way that they do not detract from the appearance of the space, Supports shall have adequate strength and shall be installed so as to properly support the device or . � 3. Outdoor and Site Lighting Installation: . purposed. center ground rod in pipe & install pipe flush with grade. pvc pipe and label on each datalcOaX Gable. Provide the outlet number that the cable I iv. Applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act equi . pment mounted on them. differences may occur between the Reflected Ceiling Plans and the Electrical Plans, inform the cover shall be traffic rated, interior ground rods shall be driven to 6" above grade & feeds. Labels shall be placed on each cable at the rack and in eact . I . I I . . I. Site lighting luminaires shall be as called for on the drawings. installed as close to a wall as possible. afi connections to ground rods shall be outlet box, I �� C: SHOP DRAWINGS I . . . cadweld type. � I 1�1 . 1 2. Electrical supports shall be attached to the structure by one of the following methods: ii. Bases for site and roadway luminaires where required, shall be augured into the earth and concrete M: COMMUNICATIONS C. Provide 1.375"x.280"black typewritten letting on white adhesive �. 1. The electrical contractor shall furnish shop drawings for approval by the engineer L Wood - wood screws. I I shall be poured into the augured hole without a sona tube below grade to allow the concrete to fill the 1. All telephone / data Gable and connecting hardware shall be rated category 5e. I polyester label an each data and co-axiaIjack located at the outlets and i before starting the work I I I I ii. Concrete - expansion bolts or cast in place anchors. natural crevices in the earth. Portion of base above grade shall be formed using a sonatube. Exposed I 0. Operational tests shall be performed on all electrical systems, and shall include, but not be limited to, . in the patch panels. Wrap label an sides of modularjacks. � I 1 2. The following is a list of items to be submitted: I iii. Structural steel - approved brackets or machine bolts. I . portion of finished base shall be smoothed, and voids filled with grout. 2. All telephone / data cable and connecting hardware shall be terminated in the TIAIEIA 568B 4 pair configurations. D. Each jack at each outlet shall be labeled with its own number. as a I i. All motor starters, motor control centers, and related components. . . I H: CONDUCTORS I iii. Bases shall have reinforcing steel as indicated on the contract drawings and shall be Class 'A'concrete. � preface, a data jack number shall be labeled with a 'D', telephone cables I shall be labeled with "T". Where data jacks are mounted in the same I J J . All disconnect switches, panelboards, and related components. . �� iii. All lighting fixtures . . . iv. Anchor bolts for poles shall be performed for the pole bolt circle at the factory. 3. The communications system shall be installed by qualified contractors who have been certified by the system manufacturer for a period of at least two years prior outlet box they both shall have the same number designation. : i I v. All wiring devices 1. Conductors shall be new, 600 volt, 90c, type XHHW, THHN or THWN insulation, stranded copper only. I Equipment mounted on the building perimeter foundation walls shall be shimmed at least 114 inch to commencing this work. All installing workers shall be BICSI certified level I I . I i v. All life safety system products I Minimum size shall be #12 A WG for runs of less than 100 feet total circuit length (out and back for single K. Lighting and Receptacle Panelboards installers or have completed the telecommunications installerltechnical program E Provide a complete labeling plan to the owner for the review prior to i , � I vi. All communication system products phase circuits and out only for three phase circuits with no neutral). Use #10 AWG for circuits longer than 1. Panelboards for 4801277, 2081120, or 2401120 volt lighting and receptacle service shall be dead front offered by the national joint apprenticeship and training committee. The job commencement of work for approval. ; � � I 3. One reproducible copy of the shop drawing shall be submitted to the engineer for 100feet. Other sizes shall be as rioted. Control wiring maybe #14AWG. The neutral conductor of a three phase circuit (such as three circuits feeding receptacles) which feeds HID and fluorescent lighting, type, conforming to NEMA standard PB- I- I - 71 and UL 6 7, and consisting of three phase, three or foreman shall be a BICSI Gertified technician. Copies of all certificates of the company employees shall be submitted by the contractor with the shop drawings. I 1. Category 5E cable testing I comment, Other copies of the shop drawings shall be distributed as per other I office receptacles and any other non linear loads subject to the generation of harmonics (or as noted on the four wire solid neutral, main lugs or main overcurrent device as indicated, branch overcurrent devices . requirements of the job or owner's requirements, as required. drawings) shall be one size larger than the phase conductors, I as noted and equipment ground bar, a// in a surface or flush mounted code gauge galvanized sheet 4. All cable and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All A, The contractor shall test each cable after Installation and termination to certify that I . steel cabinet as indicated, Enclosure to be NEMA I unless noted otherwise with primer and finish each cable complies with EIAITIA category 5E standards. I� . D: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I 2. Compression type lugs arid connectors shall be used for all terminations and splices. All terminations shall paint of the manufacturers standard. methods of construction that are riot specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the owner or I. The testing methods and apparatus for fie/d testing of cabling links shall � . 1. The drawings represent the design for the listed manufacturers'requirements. If any be permanently identified and numbered, using "Brady" labels or other approved equal. Wire numbering , L Standard enclosure shall be NEMA 1, unless noted otherwise, with primer and finish paint of the owners representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and be TIA TSB 67 level /// complaint. � I substitutions are accepted by the engineer, this contractor shall be responsible for all shall be panelboard and circuit numbers. Also, all wiring which passes through junction or pull boxes shall manufacturers standard. Cabinets shall be oversized where necessary to accommodate the entrance of I manufacturer indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable I � necessary modifications,, including cost, to the electrical system required because of i I . be identified with appropriate numbers. When pane,lboard/circuit numbers are not appropriate for . I several large conduits andlor when necessary to avoid overcrowding except cabinets for panels manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be I fi. Notify the owner a minimum of two working days prior - to testing the I the substituted equipment or material. . identification, the contractor shall assign a unique number and record this number an the construction set. . mounted flush shag be not more than 22 inches wide and 5-314 inches deep unless otherwise approved equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified ad subject to approval. communication network so that the owner, at his discretion, can observe i � 1 2. The electrical, mechanical, architectural, structural, and al/ other drawings as well as the I I . by the architectlengineer. Trims shall contain hinged doors and shall be equipped with flush chrome I 5. testing. � specifications and addendums are part of the contract documents. any electrical I: WIRING DEVICES I . plated combination key locks and catches. Locks shall be all keyed alike and two keys furnished to the Strictly adhere to all category 5E (BICSI and TIA/EIA) installation practices when � I requirements called for or) other trades contract documents shall be included in the i I owner. installing utp data cabling. . iii. Any cable links which do not certify at EIAITIA category 5E standards I � I electrical bid, . I I . I . . I 1. Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA IND I and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide color devices and wall plates as selected by architect, Coverplate color I � I � ii. Column -type enclosures shall be similar to the standard enclosure except panel shall be approximately 1 � � 6. Category 5E patch panels. shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at his own expense. t 1 I I I 1 3. The contractor shall visit the job site and become familiar with afi existing conditions. � shall match device color. Confirm color selection with architect before Purchasing and installing. 8-112 inches wide for mounting between building column webs as indicated, and provided with A. Physical Characteristics . iv. The cable shall be tested with owners testing apparatus and any � I I I : Submission of a bid assumes the contractor has reviewed or accepts all fleld extension trough and pullbox with neutral bar when shown on the drawings. i. Panels shall be made of black anodized aluminum in 24, 48, 96 port discrepancies of the test results shall require the contractor to retest the �I . Conditions and existing conditions. No additional compensations' shall be allowed for 2. Receptacles: Devices shall be specification grade, NEMA 5-20R configuration. Duplex type, Hubbell Cat � III. Where spaces are noted on the drawing, equip the panelboard with bus and all necessary hardware for configurations. links in question in the presence of the owner at the contractors expense. I I I labor or material because of ignorance of these conditions before or after bid No. CR5362, single outlet type, Hubbell Cat No. CR5361, GFC1 duplex, Hubbell Cat No. CR GF5362. Catalog future circuit breaker installation. I I . / . . I I �� ,. I submission- I i. I I numbers for Hubbell are shown for reference purposes and equivalent receptacles by other manufacturers as Panels shall accommodate a minirtium of 24 parts for each rack v. The contractor shall provide the owner with written results of the � 11 i . . noted above are also approved. Receptacles shall comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1. Special iv. Metal frame and plastic covered typewritten card shall be mounted inside each panel door. mount space (Irms = 44.5rnm (I. 7in.)) certification process. results shall be provided no more then 10 working 4. Discrepancies between the drawings or between the drawings and actual field receptacles not shown below shall be specification grade with Nema configuration as noted on the drawings. Information entered onto the cards shall correspond to the circuit numbers as installed in the field. iii. days after tests are completed. I I I conditions shall be brought to the attention of the architect and the engineer prior to . Panels shall have modularjacks employing a tri -plane staggered 12. Warranty: I submitting the bid. The more comprehensive and most expensive scope of work shall be, 3� Ground -fault interrupter (GF1 or GFC1) receptacles as Indicated above shall be designed for and installed in 2. Overcurrent Protective Devices . . I contact array with a flat "hairpin" contact design made of beryllium A. The Jack Manufacturer shall provide a 25 year, guarantee on the components, considered for the electrical bid unless written clarification is provided by the � architect and the engineer prior to sub"tting the bid. a 2-314 inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3. i, General use circuit breakers for panelboards shall be bolt -on molded plastic case type, 1, 2, or 3 pole, copper with a minimum 50 -micro -inch gold plating on contact performance, and installation integrity of the entire structured cabling system. quick -make, quick -break, with trip -free operating handle, position indicating and thermal -magnetic surfaces over 50-100 miro-inch of nickel complaint with fcc part 68. � I . i E: RACEWAYS 4. Snap switches: Devices shall be specification grade quiet type, 20 A 1201277V, single pole Hubbell Cat trip device. Furnish 2 and 3 pole breakers with common operating handle and common trip iv. B. The connection hardware, cable and installer shall all be certified by the jack � I I � I No. CS1221, two pole Hubbell Cat No. CS122Z three pole, Hubbell Cat No. CS1223, and fourpole, Hubbell Cat No. mechanism. All circuit breakers used for switching applications shall be U.L. listed type "SWD" Panels shall be available in a T568B wiring scheme, manufacturer for the entire structured cable system. � I f 1� EMT conduit shall be used in all locations which call for conduit unless noted otherwise. I CS1224. Catalog numbers for Hubbell are shown for reference purposes and equivalent receptacles by other manufacturers as noted above are also approved. Devices shall be Specification grade, quiet type ac for that application. all circuit breakers used for protection of motors, refrigeration equipment, or "HA " 7. Category 5E compfiantjacks - UTP I Conduits routed thru areas of significant temperature differences shall be provided � I � switches, and shall comply with UL 20 and NEMA WDI. I HVA C equipment shall be U. L. listed type CR for that application. A. Physical Characteristics N: EXECUTION I with seal -off fittings to minimize condensation. Conduits penetrating fire walls shall be ; flrestopped per NEC & details shown on drawings. 1, I 5. Approved manufacturers for wiring de ' vices: ii. Circuit breakers furnished with panelboards shall conform to the following interrupting ratings L Jacks shall be 8 position un -keyed. 1. The contractor shall exercise due caution when working so as not to damage that portion of the electrical I I I I . (symmetrical) in amperes unless otherwise noted: � I system that is to remain. 1 2. Rigid PVC Schedule 40 shall be used for all underground or below slab ii. Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall � I i I I . conduit runs. All conduits shall be run in joist space or within wall I Hubbell P&S . Voltage Trip No. of Lc. Amperes Frame snap mount in an industry standard keystone opening "x58O') 2. Positively no conduit or wire removed shall be reused in the new installation. I I cavities. Exposed conduits shall be run perpendicular or parallel to I ( 760 I I )yterior wgllq (� floor. I I I C I 3. eavy wa ngid steel conduit shall be used in all exposed interior applications below I 6. Dimmer switches: solid state dimmer switches conforming to NEMA WD 1, mounted in outlet boxes For Rating Rating Poles (Symmetrical) Size I . I Ili. Contact plating shall be a minimum of 50 micro inches of 3. All circuits shall be identified on the panel directories by this contractor. At the completion of the job, the � � I structural ceiling and exterior exposed applications. provide 2 coats of rust inhibiting � I incandescent fixtures; switch poles and wattage as indicated, 120 V, 60 -Hz, continuously adjustable toggle, I 120 15-100 ampere 1 22,000 100 arnp hard gold in the contact area over 50 micro -Inch of nickel. contractor shall provide each panelboard with a n w typed directory with the existing loads as noted from . 0 I paint for exterior runs. Paint shall match surface conduit is attached to. single -pole, with on-off switch. Equip with electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and.TV 240 15-100 ampere 2&3 2ZOOO 100 amp the old directory and the now loads as installed. I � I I I . I I I 4. Type 'MC'cable or flexible metal conduit with ground conductor shall be used for interference. Dirtitners to be Lutron "Nova T -Star" series for dirnmers rated up to 1500 watts and "Nova" series for 2000 watt dirrimers. Lighting switches shown adjacent to dimmers shall be Lutran "Nova T -Star" 240 125-225 ampere 2&3 2Z 000 225 amp 240 250-400 ampere 2&3 42,000 400 amp iv. Jack termination shall follow the industry standard I I 0 IDC. I 4. The contractor shall keep on the job, one complete set of working drawings on which he shall record any I � connecting light fixtures, or motors. (Utilize 6'maximum lengths). MC' cable can be used I I I 1 or standard "Nova" style to match dirnmers and shall be provided with a single, one piece coverplate. 277 15-100 ampere 1 25,000 100 amp I v. Jacks shall utilize a paired punch down sequence. Cable pair deviations or changes from Such contract drawings made during construction. Record drawings shall show I ,,, I within wall cavities to connect receptacles. I . Color shall be specified by architect. 480 15-100 ampere 2&3 25,000 100 amp twists shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all changes in the following: . I I . 1 5. When power or control conductors are installed in a raceway, a green equipment 480 125-225 ampere 2&3 30,000 225 arrip 480 250-400 ampere 2&3 4ZOOO 400 amp . conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair i. Size, type, capacity, etc. of any material, device or piece of equipment. I "I J ! grounding conductor shall be included in each raceway system arid shall be sized as 7. Wiring device accessories 1 480 400-800 ampere 2&3 42,000 800 a mp characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer. ii. Location of any device or piece of equipment. I ; i shown on the drawings or if not noted on the drawings, then in accordance with Table 1 250-95 of the NEC, or as indicated on the drawings If green insulation is not available, 1. Wall plates: Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. . vi. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 A WG stranded or solid III. Location of any outlet or source in the building service system. iv. Routing of any conduit, or other building electrical service. : the grounding conductor shall be bare and clearly and permanently marked at all tap , Provide plates and attachment screws which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. iii. Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be similar to general use circuit breakers specified; 15-20 conductors. I , I I and terminating points by green "scotch" marking tape, code markers, or other approved Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated. Provide smooth nylon coverplates for ampere, I or 2 pole with 5ma sensitivit Furnish when indicated on drawing. Y. . - These drawings shall be kept clean and undamaged, and shall not be used for any other purpose ttian I . �� means. finished areas, and galvanized steel plate for unfinished areas. . vii. Jacks shall be compatible with TIAIEIA 606 color code recording deviations from working drawings and exact locations of concealed work. After the job is I I I I iv. Fuses over 600 ampere shall be Bussman Hi -cap time delay type KRP-C, or Gould Shawn-lut A4BQ labeling. completed, this set of drawings shall be delivered to the owner in good condition, as a pe"rianerit record of ! I 6. All conduit shall be securely fastened in full accordance and as directed by the latest ii. Floor service outlets: Modular, above -floor service outlets and fittings of types and ratings indicated. (601-2000 ampere) or Gould Shawmut A4BY (2001-6000 ampere) 600 volt, UL Class I with the installation as actually constructed. ! � I edition of the National Electrical Code, In addition to the NEC requirements, conduit Construct of die cast aluminum, satin finish. Use design compatible with floor outlet wiring methods minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 ampere rms symmetrical. viii. Jacks shall be marked with T568B wiring. I I hangers, supports, or fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at the end (within I indicated. Provide 20 Amperes, 125 Volts, gray duplex receptacles. NEMA configuration 5-20R 8. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable (UTP) � 0: CUTTING AND REPAIRING �� I : I I ,: I I I ! � � 1 __ I � I ii I � I� I---.-- -1--- 1) I ___ I I - � . .. . . I - \0\\\� I I I I 1�/////// - I ,\\�\�\C,E __. � - Y, .- .. /_ . . � I - I .. � ,_�� - .I. .. _:� -11: .. - Z�: : 57921 . , - ::7 . *�� * . :::i , I . * : a� - . Z7 , -)O-. : W ::.- �', 0 1. STATE OF ... J.Q �� � �, ,<\% ,�, �, -',Z�- -�� . '-1 �%;`- 4 0 R \�) -`*Q� I- I,/ . .... \ 1111,116N***** ,�� ,�� /////// A�- J . 1111101\\�\�\\\ = 1-- I-- C,q (y) - W 0 UIL < (0 0 052 i 6 ) or each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. where indicated. Provide with 314 inch or I inch NPT, I inch long, locking nipple for installation �� , ..... I � ", 7 �',�,� �y .. * ? 1. The testing work shall include all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to perform and record a// necessary x. Lay -in troffers in suspended ceilings and surface type fixtures triount ed to suspended ceilings shall be 1, � I "I __�� , A. Category 5E four pair Linshielded twisted pair cable: multi -paired cable, unshielded four twisted pair, 24 gauge solid copper annealed 1. All necessary cutting in walls, floors and other such work shall be neatly and carefully done, and the work . i F: FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT I� i I �; 11 tt � with minimurn interrupting rating of 200,000 ampere rms symmetrical. I conductors. shall be repaired in an approved and workmanlike manner. No cutting into the structural parts of the ,I � , ; 9 I to 6000 ampere shall be suitable for UL Class I fuses. . G. Cable installed underground in -slab or below slab shall be rated for � ,��,�, , , _11�'1'2% .1, I 01 , ;�� 2�`�%,'-,'��t ",I V1,01- 11� I ,8. Horizontal arid vertical conduit runs may be.supported by one -hole malleable straps, , I clamp backs, or other approved devices with suitable bolts, expansion shields (where I. Install switches and receptacles in outlet boxes as specified elsewhere in this specification. Install vi. Provide spare circuit breakers installed in panelboards as indicated on the panel schedule as shown an the drawings. Provide 10% spare (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of fuses installed. I , � � �, �­. I �, R il � - 7777771, 1 I I I � needed) or bearn type clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. single pole toggle switches so that the switch is on in the "Lip" position. Install receptacles with the , �, 1i ,� 8, 11 I I I . I I I U-shaped ground slot at the top or to the left. ` 11 twisted pair cables. 2. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for afi damage to work of his, or other trades, caused by his . 1 9. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits will not be permitted. I I I I'll 1� li � , ,� 'j! !,�, I I �, '7,-3%, , I. Provide fusible or non -fusible safety switches as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall be quick- I I A work or through the neglect of his workmen, All patching and repairing of damaged work shall be done by B. Category 5Ejacks I �",;,?J,P o - I "I �,, � . 11 cable will be fire rated for use in air return spaces or shall be installed the trade which originally installed it, at the direction of the owner's representative, and the cost of such I � - ., " 1 � , 1� � . . . . . . . . . . . 77', "I � iii. Three phase receptacles shall be wired such that alt have the same phase sequence. enclosures in factory areas, NEMA I enclosures in other indoor areas and NEMA 4X stainless steel type in a complete conduit system. 11 , J: LIGHTING I � requl . red, whether shown on the drawings or not. Pull boxes shall be approved for use I in the area where they are to be installed. Pull boxes orjunction boxes shall be . . I iv. The receptacle circuit and panel number shall be indicated on the inside of a// outlet boxes, or directly enclosures outside unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Furnish three pole, single -throw switches unless otherwise indicated, with current and voltage ratings as indicated. 1 D. Data cable outerjacket color shall be blue. I I � i 1 provided in accordance with the following schedule: I . on the conductors by means of a wire labeling system. . I I I / , I . . Provide safety switches with an external operating handle interlocked with the cover door to prevent E. Telephone cable outerjacket color shall be grey. I exposed surfaces of finished areas will be permitted. point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in . I I � I. Straight runs -not a ver one hundred (I 00) feet apart. t, I the door from being opened while the switch is in the "on" position except by operating an inconsDicuous interlock defeatino mechanism Provide inearis for nadlackinry the nneratinry handle in C P: TESTING . I i continuous metal conduit body. Refer to plans for specific details about the routing of I I I . 1 the Go nduits. All empty conduits shall be provid ed with a #10 pull wire. 2. Indoor Installation: I a pair as a result of termination to the patch panel shall be I 5. The services of a recognized independent testing laboratory shall be engaged to conduct al/ tests described , . I I = 1-- I-- C,q (y) - W 0 UIL < (0 0 052 i 6 ) or each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. where indicated. Provide with 314 inch or I inch NPT, I inch long, locking nipple for installation v. Fuses 600 ampere or below shall be BUssman low -peak dual element type LPN -RK (250 volt) or LPS- Cabe manuiddurer and product Snail be a partner to ck manufacturer to qualify farjack manufacturer standard 25 year 1. The testing work shall include all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to perform and record a// necessary x. Lay -in troffers in suspended ceilings and surface type fixtures triount ed to suspended ceilings shall be . 1 7. Conduits or boxes may not be supported by ceiling support wires I where compatible with wiring method. � I . RK (600 volt) or Gould Shawmut Amp -trap type A2K (250 volt) or A6K (600 volt) UL Class RKI A. Category 5E four pair Linshielded twisted pair cable: multi -paired cable, unshielded four twisted pair, 24 gauge solid copper annealed 1. All necessary cutting in walls, floors and other such work shall be neatly and carefully done, and the work . i F: FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT in fixtures shall also be supported by two independent support wires running frorn diagonally opposite or other ceiling supporting hardware. I , 8. Wiring device installation: with minimurn interrupting rating of 200,000 ampere rms symmetrical. I conductors. shall be repaired in an approved and workmanlike manner. No cutting into the structural parts of the I Panels shall be properly labeled on front and back with the . � I to 6000 ampere shall be suitable for UL Class I fuses. . G. Cable installed underground in -slab or below slab shall be rated for � building, which may impair its strength, shall be permitted without the prior written approval of the owner. Square D --- ,8. Horizontal arid vertical conduit runs may be.supported by one -hole malleable straps, , I clamp backs, or other approved devices with suitable bolts, expansion shields (where I. Install switches and receptacles in outlet boxes as specified elsewhere in this specification. Install vi. Provide spare circuit breakers installed in panelboards as indicated on the panel schedule as shown an the drawings. Provide 10% spare (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of fuses installed. I B. Cable shall ineet or exceed EIAITIA 568 commercial building wiring If such cutting is permitted, the area shall be suitably reinforced to restore the structural integrity of the . work to its designed value. . I I � needed) or bearn type clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. single pole toggle switches so that the switch is on in the "Lip" position. Install receptacles with the I, Transformers shall be indoor dry, two winding, quiet type, with ventilated enclosure, conforming to � standards and EIAITIA technical systems bulletin 36 urishielded installation defects. UJ 0- I I . I I I U-shaped ground slot at the top or to the left. 31 Safety Switches I twisted pair cables. 2. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for afi damage to work of his, or other trades, caused by his . 1 9. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits will not be permitted. I I I fi. Duplex receptacles shall be wired with the neutral wire to the silver binding screw. I. Provide fusible or non -fusible safety switches as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall be quick- C. Plenum cable is required, jacket will be teflon or like material and work or through the neglect of his workmen, All patching and repairing of damaged work shall be done by B. Category 5Ejacks I 10. Conduit runs between outlets shall contain not more than the equivalent of three (3) � . make, quick -break, heavy duty visible blade type, horsepower and I squared T rated. Use NEMA 12 cable will be fire rated for use in air return spaces or shall be installed the trade which originally installed it, at the direction of the owner's representative, and the cost of such I qUarterbends. Provide junction andlor pull boxes where shown on the. drawings or as iii. Three phase receptacles shall be wired such that alt have the same phase sequence. enclosures in factory areas, NEMA I enclosures in other indoor areas and NEMA 4X stainless steel type in a complete conduit system. repair shall be paid by the electrical contractor. J: LIGHTING FCBN taps for transformers 25 KVA and below. Transformers 25 KVA through 75 KVA shall be � designed for floor or wall mounting, � requl . red, whether shown on the drawings or not. Pull boxes shall be approved for use I in the area where they are to be installed. Pull boxes orjunction boxes shall be . . I iv. The receptacle circuit and panel number shall be indicated on the inside of a// outlet boxes, or directly enclosures outside unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Furnish three pole, single -throw switches unless otherwise indicated, with current and voltage ratings as indicated. 1 D. Data cable outerjacket color shall be blue. I 3. Absolutely no cutting of wall, floor or other finished material or fastening of electrical components to the i 1 provided in accordance with the following schedule: I . on the conductors by means of a wire labeling system. . I I I / , I . . Provide safety switches with an external operating handle interlocked with the cover door to prevent E. Telephone cable outerjacket color shall be grey. I exposed surfaces of finished areas will be permitted. point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in . I I � I. Straight runs -not a ver one hundred (I 00) feet apart. I v. Combination switchlreceptacle shall be installed in a two gang box with a combination I the door from being opened while the switch is in the "on" position except by operating an inconsDicuous interlock defeatino mechanism Provide inearis for nadlackinry the nneratinry handle in C P: TESTING . I I ii., One (1) 90 degree bend - riot over seventy five (75) feet apart. switchlreceptacle coverplate. Connect the receptacle to the lighting circuit ahead of the switch and � the "off" position. Equip switches with auxiliary contacts when indicated. Cabe manuiddurer and product Snail be a partner to ck manufacturer to qualify farjack manufacturer standard 25 year 1. The testing work shall include all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to perform and record a// necessary x. Lay -in troffers in suspended ceilings and surface type fixtures triount ed to suspended ceilings shall be � iii. Two (2) or more 90 degree bends - not over fifty (50) feet apart. locate the switch on the side of the box closest to the door. Note, this method is to be used only for secured mechanically by screws, rivets, clips, etc. as per Section 410-16(C), NEC, Additionally, lay- . warranty. tests and adjustments of equipment, including Load Center Unit Substations, Motor Control Centers, High i F: FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT in fixtures shall also be supported by two independent support wires running frorn diagonally opposite I I . � . I 120 Volt lighting system. 277 Volt lighting switches and 120 Volt receptacles shall be located in � III. Fuse clips shall be rejection type for fuses specified (up to 600 ampere), Fuses clips for 601 ampere I projecting racks at- other foreign matter. Where muck or unstable ground is encountered � in the bottom of the trench, it shall be excavated to a depth of at least 12in. below the I Voltage Cable, 600 Volt Wire and Cable, and Grounding, as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or I Panels shall be properly labeled on front and back with the I I 1. In Class I and Class // hazard areas, as designated on the drawings, explosion -proof I . � separate boxes. . to 6000 ampere shall be suitable for UL Class I fuses. . G. Cable installed underground in -slab or below slab shall be rated for where necessary to verify performance requirements. Square D --- I I flexible metal conduit shall be used for all final conduit terminations at motors and to all � other devices subject to vibration or movement This shall include all pendant mounted vi. Confirm final location of all wiring devices and outlet boxes with ownerlarchitect prior to rough -in. 4. Transformers direct buried applications & come . complete with a flooding compound & polyethylene jacket. 2. Inspection tests shall provide a visual inspection of electrical equipment for manufacturing, shipping or I I lighting fixtures and conduit runs at building expansion joints in Class I and Class // � i hazard areas, Electrical ground continuity shall be provided as noted above. 9. Wiring devices listed or noted on the drawings as weatherproof shall be provided with a cover which I, Transformers shall be indoor dry, two winding, quiet type, with ventilated enclosure, conforming to Isolate power cables to be megger tested by opening switches at each end of cable prior to testing. Apply installation defects. UJ 0- � I maintains the weatherproof integrity when the cover is closed. Receptacles noted as suitable for operation NEMA standards, 220 degrees Celsius insulation for continuous operation in a 40 degree 9. Installation 3. Acceptance tests shall show that the methods and materials used in the installation of equipment conform to REVISIONS � 1Z Telephone and data (including other special communication systems such as cable TV) in a wet locations shall be provided with a cover which will allow the receptacle to remain operational Celsius ambient temperature with a temperature rise not to exceed 80 degrees Celsius. � I - � A, Patch panels category 5E t during wet conditions with a plug inserted into the receptacle. Provide a minimum of two 2-112% FCAN and four 2-112% applicable codes and standards, and the manufacturers installation instructions, arid to determine that the conduits shall be a minimum of 314" in size unless noted otherwise, and shall run continuous I i from outlet to outlet and back to the main terminal board, or shall be stubbed into the B. Category 5Ejacks FCBN taps in the primary winding for transformers over 25 KVA and a minimum of two 2-112% i. Panels shall be installed to provide minimal signal equipment involved may be energized for operational tests. I I ceiling space (6" above the ceiling) and provided with a plastic bushing. Bond � . I J: LIGHTING FCBN taps for transformers 25 KVA and below. Transformers 25 KVA through 75 KVA shall be � designed for floor or wall mounting, impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely to the 4. Operational tests shall show the electrical equipment will perform the functions for which it was designed. in the conduit grounded to the same ground. Minimum acceptable readings for disconnected cables shall be 1 : conduit stub with a #10 bare copper conductor to the nearest electrical outlet box or i 1. Lighting Fixtures: see drawings for manufacturers catalog numbers. point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in . . I necessary to protect the work or adjacent property. Sheeting, bracing, and pea gravel . I I shall be installed by the electrical contractor at no additional expense to the owner. I so that they will not be distorted by handling incidental to normal maintenance. than 79 inches above floor when measured to the center of the switch handle. i. Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal . . I i continuous metal conduit body. Refer to plans for specific details about the routing of I I I . 1 the Go nduits. All empty conduits shall be provid ed with a #10 pull wire. 2. Indoor Installation: I a pair as a result of termination to the patch panel shall be I 5. The services of a recognized independent testing laboratory shall be engaged to conduct al/ tests described II . . I I . I. The Contractor shall refer to the Architectural drawings for ceiling type, construction and details of � ii. Sound levels shall not exceed those established in ANSI standard C89 shown in the following table: no greater then 0.5 inches (13mm) herein with the exception of routine insulation resistance, continuity and ratation tests. ____ � i I Backfill shag consist of 3 inches of compacted sand below conduits and 12" above � conduits. Clean screened fill shall be installed and compacted to 6" below final I vi. Surface type fluorescent lighting fixtures mounted on acoustical ceiling must be coordinated with the 13. Cables installed in plenums without conduit shall be UL classified for low flame resistance � mounting. Adjust fixture trim ring as required for correct mounting in ceiling fixture is to be installed. KVA dB level ii. Panels shall be installed according to manufacturer's 6. Perform all acceptance and operational tests in the presence of the ArchitectlEngineer. Notify the . and low smoke properties with 7EP"Teflon or Halar insulation suitable forplenum I i I applications per Article 760 of the N. E. C. � All fixtures shall be supported per NEC Article 410. I 0-9 40 instructions and properly mounted to a rack, cabinet, � bracket or other appropriate mounting device. ArchitectlEngineer of time of test at least two (2) days prior to testing. Notify manufacturers of electrical iii. Each panelboard shall be identified with a legend plate of lamicoid plastic inside the door for panelboards in finished areas and on the outside of panelboards in unfinished areas with the panel untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to the jack shall be no greater then 0. 5 inches (I 3mm) I I. Inspect ground conductors and connections for compliance with plans and specifications and for � I ii. Suspended ceiling systems shall be supported for fixture installation as noted above, and as a 10-50 45 equipment to permit their representatives to witness the test should they so request. - - I i 14. Conduits below grade shall be installed in conformance with: minimum condition, as noted in ANS11ASTM C636-76, par. 2-7, CEILING FIXTURES. I 51-150 50 Ili. Panels shall be installed such that cables terminated to the I iii. Ductjoints shall be sealed with waterproofjoint compound. Ducts shall be supported I land shall be supported to carry at least twice the weight of the lighting fixture. . designation as shown on the drawings. I ii. Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturers satisfactory workmanship. After installation of the grounding electrodes, I I provide ground resistance testing prior to the interconnection of other systems, Do riot � i, . 151-300 55 panel can maintain mininium bend radius of at least 4 times I 7. Submit test reports, including complete data and actual readings taken, for a// equipment tested to the �? I . I i 1. Provide all necessary trenching, backfill & removal of trenched material from site. � 1 iii. Install fixtures in accordance with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. Where substantial 301-500 60 the cable diameter into the 1DC contacts, Cables shall be Architect/Engineer for approval after each test performed. Do not energize any equipment for operating . � I I to prevent movement when encasement is placed. Ducts shall be secured to suspended ceilings, any Code -required additional ceiling supports as approved by the Architect, shall � above the ceiling. housings or other appropriate mounting device. conditions. i � . differences may occur between the Reflected Ceiling Plans and the Electrical Plans, inform the � supports and spacers placed for tiered ducts. . � liv. All secondary power service underground ducts shall be encased with 3000 psi concrete. terminated on the panel such that there is no tension on the tests until data has been approved. Include copies of the final approved test reports upon completion of the . fli. Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminated to the . ii. Reports shall include all resistance readings obtained, temperature, humidity and condition of the soil I ELECTRICAL I I All underground ducts shall be 4 " in diameter schedule 40 rigid non-metaflic (P. V. C.) ducts viii.,Provide supports for a// lighting fixtures as detailed on the Drawings, as speci fied, or as required by loads on each panelboard and the loads shall be equally distributed on each of the phases of the � I ii. The bottom of the trench shall be undisturbed earth or thoroughly compacted fill. The ArchitectlEn-ineer for resolution nf thn iWQrro �n . work as Dart of the reGUired nneratina and maintenance data to be furnished as oriffarl in ni;yiQir,r) i the fixture specified. Fixtures installed in unfinished areas (areas iocluding but not necessarily limited panelboard. I I cable diameter into the ldc contacts, cables shall be terminated that there is tension the I . PECIFICATIONS I encasement shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the general trades i contractor shall be responsible for such compaction. the bottom shall be free of V _1y I III. Furnish transformers having voltage, KVA ratings and connections as indicated an the drawings. iv. conuLicLors in if te Lermirialion contacts. -11 . x. Lay -in troffers in suspended ceilings and surface type fixtures triount ed to suspended ceilings shall be expense. . I � secured mechanically by screws, rivets, clips, etc. as per Section 410-16(C), NEC, Additionally, lay- . vIii. Approved Manufacturers for Power Distribution Equipment: ii. Do riot exceed the minimum bend radius as recommended i F: FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT in fixtures shall also be supported by two independent support wires running frorn diagonally opposite I by the cable manufacturer. Maintain a maximum bend � � . . I projecting racks at- other foreign matter. Where muck or unstable ground is encountered � in the bottom of the trench, it shall be excavated to a depth of at least 12in. below the iv. The Contractor shall coordinate fixture construction details with ceiling system in which they are I Panels shall be properly labeled on front and back with the . 8. Give each power feeder and subfeeder cable (600 Volt Wire and Cable) a continuity and megger test. Cutler HammerlWestinghouse Cleveland Switchboard Co. degree bend. . . � . I type will also be permitted. Approved manufacturers, Thomas & Betts, Steel City, O -Z Gedney, structure with a separate wire. The surface fixtures shall be secured to these clips. . Square D --- I I bottom line of the ducts and replaced with pea gravel in the proper grade. Duct shall installed, Le.: support system dimensions, flanges where required, acoustical tile or pan pattern, etc. 5. Panelboard and Transformer Installation cable number and port connections for each port. Isolate power cables to be megger tested by opening switches at each end of cable prior to testing. Apply UJ 0- i . B. Category 5Ejacks megger tests, using a I 000 volt megger, between each conductor and ground with the other two conductors �7 � not be installed on or in frozen ground. sheeting or bracing shall be provided where 1 v. Rows of fixtures shall be installed accurately as to line and level. Fixtures shall be securely mounted L Mount panelboards at uniform height throughout the building, and such that the top switch is not more in the conduit grounded to the same ground. Minimum acceptable readings for disconnected cables shall be 1 I necessary to protect the work or adjacent property. Sheeting, bracing, and pea gravel . I I shall be installed by the electrical contractor at no additional expense to the owner. I so that they will not be distorted by handling incidental to normal maintenance. than 79 inches above floor when measured to the center of the switch handle. i. Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal . . I (one) megohm. Cable must pass megger test to be reported as acceptable. I ____ � i I Backfill shag consist of 3 inches of compacted sand below conduits and 12" above � conduits. Clean screened fill shall be installed and compacted to 6" below final I vi. Surface type fluorescent lighting fixtures mounted on acoustical ceiling must be coordinated with the ii. Install handle guards on a// breakers for night lighting, emergency, and similar circuits when indicated. J mpal rment by preserving wire twists as close as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of 9. The following test and inspections shall be made on the grounding system. LU lt� grade � � or as detailed in architectural specifications. Final grade patch shall be by E, C. I . Architectural drawings in order that a main "T" runner will be placed in the center of each fixture, andlor each raw of fixtures. Main IT" runner shall be of at least the same length as the lighting fixture iii. Each panelboard shall be identified with a legend plate of lamicoid plastic inside the door for panelboards in finished areas and on the outside of panelboards in unfinished areas with the panel untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to the jack shall be no greater then 0. 5 inches (I 3mm) I I. Inspect ground conductors and connections for compliance with plans and specifications and for � - - _____ I iii. Ductjoints shall be sealed with waterproofjoint compound. Ducts shall be supported I land shall be supported to carry at least twice the weight of the lighting fixture. . designation as shown on the drawings. I ii. Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturers satisfactory workmanship. After installation of the grounding electrodes, I I provide ground resistance testing prior to the interconnection of other systems, Do riot �? , at least 3in. above the trench bottom on plastic supports with spacing not exceed 5'. I i Before duct is placed, supports shall be aligned, set to grade, and placed in concrete I vii. All fixtures shall be securely supported with approved hangers. Where fixtures will be installed in I iv, Install not less than two spare 1-114 inch conduits from each flush mounted panel to an accessible area instructions and properly mounted in plates, frames, grounding perform tests under unusually wet weather; tests should be performed during normal weather . � I I to prevent movement when encasement is placed. Ducts shall be secured to suspended ceilings, any Code -required additional ceiling supports as approved by the Architect, shall � above the ceiling. housings or other appropriate mounting device. conditions. . � supports and spacers placed for tiered ducts. . � liv. All secondary power service underground ducts shall be encased with 3000 psi concrete. be provided by this Contractor. . � I v. When branch circuits are not scheduled on the drawing, they shall be arranged to balance the phase . fli. Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminated to the . ii. Reports shall include all resistance readings obtained, temperature, humidity and condition of the soil I ELECTRICAL I I All underground ducts shall be 4 " in diameter schedule 40 rigid non-metaflic (P. V. C.) ducts viii.,Provide supports for a// lighting fixtures as detailed on the Drawings, as speci fied, or as required by loads on each panelboard and the loads shall be equally distributed on each of the phases of the jacks maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 titnes the . . at the time of the tests. I . . I with ground wires, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. concrete � I I I the fixture specified. Fixtures installed in unfinished areas (areas iocluding but not necessarily limited panelboard. I I cable diameter into the ldc contacts, cables shall be terminated that there is tension the I . PECIFICATIONS I encasement shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the general trades to warehouses, factory areas, manufacturing areas, office spaces without lay -in ceilings, and spaces onjacks such no on I 0. Operational tests shall be performed on all electrical systems, and shall include, but not be limited to, . ; !, `,,� portion of the specifications, above lay -in ceilings) shall not be fastened directly to the structure. In these cases, unistrut type � conductors in the termination contacts. building lighting system, panotboards, motor starters and control devices, alarm circuits and site lighting , I � � 1� v. Encasement shall be continuous monolithic pour providing a minimum of 3" channel along with the appropriate fasteners and clips shall be used to support the fixtures. Refer to vi. Mount panelboard, safety switches, and similar equipment securely to walls or steel supports. C. Category 5E UTP cable I equipment. I . � � completely around the ducts. Concrete shall riot be poured directly on top of the - ducts, but shall be poured from the sides and allowed to flow over the ducts. the drawings for specific support requirements in addition to those noted here. I Equipment mounted on the building perimeter foundation walls shall be shimmed at least 114 inch . I . : - -_ I 1 1 I ix. Fixtures shall not hang directly from conduit boxes unless the boxes have been specifically designed from the wall to permit back ventilation. I I i. Provide telephoneldata cable of manufacturers standard materials as indicated by published product information, Q: GUARANTEE I DATE 1 5/4/12 � vi, Bell ends shall be installed at all duct terminations or as required by the power I 1 company. Fittings, couplings and other accessories, as recommended by the for such purposes. These boxes shall be supported independent of the conduit system and shall not reiv ,,Dan the conduit for sunnort1. vii. Provide supports for truss mounted and wall mounted transformers. All transformers which are designed and constructed as recommended by DRAWN BY: TRR CHECKED BY- JSR Material, equipment and installation shall be Guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of - - � - - : 1�m hl� A A nr%f% i � manufacturer, shall be provided and installed, vii. Ducts shall be cleaned by radding and brushing. It shall be the contractors I mounied above paneiboards shan be mounted away from the wall by an amount equal to the depth of I the, panelboard. The width of the panelboard shall also be maintained clear behind the transformer. manutdcalrer, tur a compiele trislahauun and ior applications indicated. acceptance. Defects which appear during that time period shall be corrected by this contractor at his �I I responsibility to assure a full bare opening throughout the duct system. x. Lay -in troffers in suspended ceilings and surface type fixtures triount ed to suspended ceilings shall be expense. . I � secured mechanically by screws, rivets, clips, etc. as per Section 410-16(C), NEC, Additionally, lay- . vIii. Approved Manufacturers for Power Distribution Equipment: ii. Do riot exceed the minimum bend radius as recommended i F: FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT in fixtures shall also be supported by two independent support wires running frorn diagonally opposite I by the cable manufacturer. Maintain a maximum bend � � . . comers of the fixture to the overhead structure. Surface mount fixtures shall be additionally supported General Electric Company Siemens radius of 4 times the cable diameter, Never exceed a 90 I 1. Couplings and connectors for EMP Die cast zinc, steel, or aluminum compression type. Set screw � by means of at least two clips for each fixture which surround the T -bar and are tied to the overhead Cutler HammerlWestinghouse Cleveland Switchboard Co. degree bend. . . � . I type will also be permitted. Approved manufacturers, Thomas & Betts, Steel City, O -Z Gedney, structure with a separate wire. The surface fixtures shall be secured to these clips. . Square D --- I I . � Ir- I I II � . i . I . � I . . I I I I . 11 , . ­­ I I , 1 ___ -­ I IN i'J ,, I , ­ I � ! i I - - __ - i I I I I I I I I I I 1 III I ,I 1, 1 1 1 I 1� I I I I I I I III, I I ,11 11111 11-1 III III I I I I I . . . I I I I